
4r-» ^ r -X- 

jlTTaliii It? 

lUxiiilini 


1 V c v 

fl !; 







COPYRIGHT DEPOSm 



I 


♦ * 



I 




I 


A 




I 


t 

• i 


I 


ft « 

% ■ 



i" 1 ^ * 

V 









f 







> 




\ 



•T . 


i, 




. 9 


4 



«- 


f 


« 

« * 


% 



« 





( 


\ 




9 





« 





t 


I • 


•p 


< 





»■ 


$ 





I 


t 













I 


vX^ 

/^^rtn) 








' »r « 


--3 



.4 





* 



t* 

* ? • 


t 


V 


r. 


I. 


\ • 


f 


>- %. 


r. 


Li 




•. [; 


« 




r . 




i: 





0 


« 


/ 


t 



* 


• ^ 



9 




Pushing the raft off into the channel, It 
was soon caught by a tidal current 
and carried slowly toward the island.” 

Page 48 


Wrecked on a 
Coral Island 


Edwin J. Houston, Ph. D. (Princeton) 

Anthor of Five Months on a Derelict,” ” The Boy Prospector,” 

“ The Boy Electrician,” “ The Boy Geologist,” ‘‘ The Search 
for the North Pole,” ” The Discovery of the North Pole,” 

”Cast Away at the North Pole,” “The Wonder 
Book of Volcanoes and Earthquakes,” etc., etc. 



Philadelphia 

The Griffith & Rowland Press 

Boston Chicago Atlanta 

New York St. Louis Dallas 






CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

I. The Wreck of the Derelict Brig ii 

II. The First Day on the Island 23 

III. The Flotsam from the Wrecked Brig 35 

IV. The Final Breaking up of the Brig. A Valua- 

ble Discovery 48 

V. Repairing the Boat 59 

VI. Circumnavigation of the Island 71 

VII. Parker Cliffs. A View of Harding Island 

from Charles Hill 86 

VII I. The Cocoanut Palms and Birds of the Island . 98 

IX. The Limestone Grottoes of Parker Cliffs . .116 

X. The Erection of Jackson House and the Build- 

ing OF THE Boat 129 

XI. The Captain’s Conundrum. “How Coral Is- 

lands ARE Formed” 143 

XII. The Islands of .the. Harding Lagoon 158 

XIII. The Swimming-pool 173 

XIV. The Unburied Skeleton AND His Buried Treasure 187 

XV. The Coral-encrusted Wreck 202 

XVI. The Sea-slug or B^che de Mere 212 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

XVII. Stung by a Sea-nettle 226 

XVIII. The Sea Grotto at Parker Cliffs 244 

XIX. Cut Off by the Tide. Battle with a Giant 

Squid 257 

XX. The Foundations of Parker Cliffs 274 

XXI. Everyday Life on Harding Island 283 

XXII. The Earthquake 299 

XXIII. After the Earthquake 310 

XXIV. The Captain and Hiram Blown out to Sea. 

Captain Jack 321 

XXV. More Trouble at Jackson House. Harold’s 

Dream 333 

XXVI. Captain Charley. An Impromptu Comic Opera 346 

XXVII. The Bottle on the Beach. Harold and 

Charley to the Rescue 363 

XXVIII. A Happy Reunion 375 

XXIX. The War Canoe 383 

XXX. In Captivity 395 

Appendix 406 


LIST OF FULL-PAGED ILLUSTRATIONS 


Page 


Pushing the raft off into the channel, it was soon 
caught by a tidal current and carried slowly 
toward the island ” (Frontispiece) 48 

The pillars . . . closely resembled the pipes of 
a huge organ 122 

''Boldly facing the huge monster, he jabbed the 

spade in one of its eyes '' 26p 

" Rompey outran the lad, and in a few moments 
returned carrying in his mouth an empty but 
sealed bottle” 366 

" They . . . were just able to see a tiny speck 

moving rapidly from the island ” 400 


CHARACTERS 


Captain William M. Parker^ commander of the 
Ketrel. 

Lieutenant Arthur Harding^ first mate of the 
Ketrel. 

Harold Arthur Harding^ nephew of Lieutenant 
Harding. 

John Parker Jackson^ a ward of Captain Parker. 

Charles Young Pleasanton^ picked up at sea in an 
open boat. 

Hiram Higgenbotham, boatswain of the Ketrel. 
John Maddox^ an early inhabitant of the island. 
Rompey^ a collie dog. 

Satan, a poll-parrot. 


Wrecked on a Coral Island 


CHAPTER I 

The Wreck of the Derelict Brig 

Breakers on the starboard bow ! ” cried the lookout. 

The speaker was one of a crew of three boys and 
two men, all of whom were on deck. Their vessel, 
a brig, had evidently experienced stormy weather. 
Neither of its masts was standing, having been broken 
off close to the deck. 

But besides its missing masts, the brig had the ap- 
pearance of having weathered more than a single 
severe storm. Not only had its rudder and rudder-post 
been swept away, but one familiar with vessels could 
see the remains of a jury rudder that had been carried 
away by heavy seas. 

Everything about the brig showed that she lacked 
the repairs that are always given to a vessel intended 
to be kept in continued use. The paint on the wood- 
work had long ago disappeared, and the woodwork it- 
self showed signs of decay. The outer sides near the 
water-line were not only covered with barnacles, but 
had taken on the greenish tint that, in the sea, is gen- 
erally one of the surest signs of age. Indeed, an ex- 
perienced observer would probably have suspected, as 
was the case, that for a long time the brig had been 

II 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


a derelict, and was only being temporarily employed 
by its small crew; for they had no means either for 
steering or propelling the vessel, and were being car- 
ried not where they wished to go, but wherever the 
winds and the waves chose to take them. 

But one accustomed to the sea could have detected 
more than the old and dilapidated condition of the 
brig. He could also have seen undoubted evidences 
of its threatened breaking up at almost any moment. 

Deep anxiety could be seen in the faces of the small 
crew, especially in those of the two men. That all 
recognized the danger of the brig going to pieces at 
any moment, was evident by the life-preservers they 
had fastened around their bodies. Indeed, even a 
collie dog, that was standing near the two younger 
boys, had been similarly provided; only, instead of a 
single preserver, two preservers had been employed, 
one fastened immediately back of the fore legs, and 
the other in front of the hind legs. Evidently the 
owners of the dog were mindful of its safety. 

For fully six days the brig had battled against an 
almost continuous storm. During this time it had been 
so severely beaten by the waves that those on board 
were surprised it had not fallen to pieces long be- 
fore. They knew it could not hold together much 
longer and, as best they might, had prepared for the 
end. During the prevalence of the storm, the heavens 
had been so continuously overcast that it had been 
impossible to determine their exact locality by an ob- 
servation of the sun or other heavenly body. Con- 
12 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


sequently, they did not know in just what part of the 
ocean they were. 

When the lookout reported Breakers on the star- 
board bow ! ” they all looked anxiously in the direc- 
tion indicated. They could just detect a short line of 
breakers near them, while farther beyond was a much 
longer line. In both, the water was being hurled fu- 
riously against the land with a loud, booming sound. 
Indeed, the keen sight of the lookout had been greatly 
aided by the evidence of his ears; for, he heard the 
roar of the breakers before he could dimly discern 
them. 

Curiously enough, almost immediately after the look- 
out had reported the threatening dangers, the sky be- 
gan to lighten on their bow, and the sun, momentarily 
breaking through a rift in the clouds, distinctly dis- 
closed the two lines of breakers. The nearer line was 
off a small reef lying directly across the path in which 
the brig was drifting. The more distant one stretched 
across their path for several miles to the right, and the 
left along the shores of an island. But as they were 
unable to steer the brig, they could only wait for what 
appeared to be certain destruction. If thrown on the 
nearer reef they would be wrecked. If they escaped 
this, they must necessarily be dashed against the much 
longer line of the reef of the island. 

The little crew of five was a crew comprised of our 
old friends whose adventures have been recited in 
‘‘ Five Months on a Derelict” Hiram Higgenbotham 
was lookout and had reported the breakers to Capt. 

13 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Arthur Harding-, first lieutenant of the Ketrel, and sub- 
sequently captain of the derelict brig. The other 
members of the crew were three boys, John Parker 
Jackson, a ward of Capt. William M. Parker, com- 
’mander of the Ketrel; Harold Arthur Harding, a 
nephew of Captain Harding, and Charles Young 
Pleasanton. Jack, the oldest of the three boys, was 
not quite seventeen, while the two other boys were 
much younger, being nearly fourteen. 

It may be well, for the sake of those who have not 
read “ Five Months on a Derelict,” briefly to recite the 
prior history of the crew of the derelict brig; to tell 
just how they happened to be on the brig, as well as 
to describe briefly some of their adventures. 

The full-rigged ship, Ketrel, had left Liverpool for 
Yokohama, Japan, under the command of Captain 
Parker. After a pleasant voyage to the South Atlantic 
it had stopped to discharge a part of its cargo at Cape 
Town, near the southern extremity of Africa; for, it 
had taken the southern route from the Atlantic to the 
Indian Ocean in preference to the shorter, though in 
some respects less advantageous, route through the 
Suez Canal and the Red Sea. 

Leaving Cape Town, the Ketrel sailed nearly due 
east. When off the southeastern coast of Australia, an 
open rowboat, containing neither oar-locks nor oars, 
was picked up adrift. Its only passenger was a collie 
dog. This animal exhibiting a marked preference for 
Harold was given to the lad, who thus became its 
master. This dog, whose name “ Rompey ” was found 

14 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


engraved on its collar, possessed unusual intelligence 
even for a collie, a species of dogs that, as is well 
known, are especially marked for their intelligence. 

When the Ketrel reached the China Sea it was 
completely wrecked by a great storm, the dreaded ty- 
phoon or cyclone. All the crew were safely trans- 
ferred to the ship’s boats. One of these boats, com- 
manded by Lieutenant Harding, contained besides two 
of the crew, Hiram Higgenbotham, the boatswain of 
the Ketrel, and two boys, John Parker Jackson and 
Harold Arthur Harding. Captain Parker, who was 
the last to leave the Ketrel, was only a short distance 
from the ship when she foundered. The boats kept 
together, steering for the coast of China, Captain 
Parker’s boat leading, and Lieutenant Harding’s fol- 
lowing. During the first night the boat commanded 
by Lieutenant Harding was separated from the other 
boats and, after unsuccessfully endeavoring to find 
them, had proceeded alone toward the coast. 

The storm, or, more correctly, a succession of storms, 
continued for five days, and gave those in Lieutenant 
Harding’s boat much severe work to keep afloat. 
During the storm the two sailors were swept over- 
board. On the fifth day after the sinking of the 
Ketrel their boat was run into and destroyed near 
midnight by a derelict brig. They succeeded not only 
in boarding the brig, but also in transferring to it 
the provisions and water supply they had in their 
boat. Bearing in mind the severe weather through 
which they had passed, it was natural that they feared 

15 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


all the other boats had been swamped and their 
crews drowned ; but in a letter found in a floating bot- 
tle, picked up at sea long afterward, many thousands of 
miles from where the Ketrel was sunk, they read the 
glad news that all the other boats, with their entire^ 
crews, had been picked up by a steamer bound for 
Tokio. 

They found the brig, though water-logged, quite 
comfortable. Its cargo consisted mainly of supplies 
for the towns that had been springing up in the neigh- 
borhood of the mines recently discovered in Southern 
Africa. The greater part of this cargo consisted ot 
lumber and millwork for portable houses. Since all 
this lumber had been subjected to a chemical treatment, 
it had not become water-logged. The cabin and 
middle hold, therefore, were above the water-line, and 
since a large part of the cargo consisted of different 
kinds of groceries, canned goods, and air-tight 
packages of rice, corn, and oatmeal, beans, peas, etc., 
there was more food on board than they could eat 
during several years. Then too, the wrought iron 
water-tanks still contained an abundance of fresh 
water, and they had managed to keep them filled by 
the frequent and heavy rains that fell on the brig. 

In addition to the above there was a plentiful cargo 
of small hardware, household goods, and kitchen uten- 
sils. They had, therefore, been able to spend an agree- 
able time on the brig, during which they had been 
carried by the winds and ocean currents to many parts 
of the Pacific. During this voyage, which up to the 

i6 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


time referred to in the beginning of this story had 
covered a period of five months, they had experienced 
many exciting, though generally speaking, pleasant 
adventures. 

Among one of the most exciting of these adventures 
was when they had been carried by a storm nearly into 
the heart of the great Sargasso Sea of the North 
Pacific. They finally escaped from this danger by 
being towed out of that almost windless and stormless 
sea by a huge cachelot, or sperm-whale, they were for- 
tunate enough to harpoon. 

During one of many storms the brig had safely 
weathered they were nearly run down by a huge 
steamer that was shortly afterward wrecked. This 
information was obtained from the boy, Charles Young 
Pleasanton, who was afterward picked up in an un- 
conscious condition in one of the open boats of the 
steamer, containing the decomposing bodies of four 
men. 

Curiously enough, this boy was the former master 
of Rompey, who instantly recognized him. Charley 
and Harold became warmly attached to each other, 
and agreed that the dog should belong to them equally. 

We come back now to the crew of five on the dere- 
lict brig, at the moment the lookout had reported 
breakers ahead. The momentary lightening of the 
sky that almost immediately followed the sighting of 
the breakers continued. The clouds were blown away, 
and in a short time the full sunlight of a tropical day 
illumined all the ocean around them. They could now 

17 


B 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


see, a mile beyond the breakers, the dazzling white sand 
beach of a coral island, against which a line of breakers 
was dashing, while a short distance back of it were the 
green plumes of the tops of cocoanut palms. 

But what commanded their instant attention was the 
line of breakers furiously dashing against the nearer 
reef that was entirely disconnected from the distant 
sand beach. This reef, which we will call the breaker 
reef, in order to distinguish it from the island reef, was 
not continuous. Here and there were channels through 
which the water was furiously rushing in the general 
direction of the distant island. 

The brig was being rapidly carried by the waves to- 
ward the breaker reef. They had no means of naviga- 
ting her, not even a rudder, and were therefore obliged 
to wait for the inevitable striking of the vessel. Nor did 
they have to wait long. Caught by the tidal current, 
the brig was being carried through one of the openings 
in the submerged reef. They had already begun to 
lower one of the brig’s boats, the one in which Charley 
and his dead companions had been found. Seeing that 
the boat if lowered would reach the breakers, the 
^captain gave up the effort, and beckoning to his com- 
panions to follow him, ran toward the opposite side of 
the brig, and mounting on the rail, stopping a moment 
to shout: 

“ Keep together in the channel, and swim away from 
the reef,” dove into the water. 

None of them hesitated to follow him, not even 
Rompey. They heard the crash of the brig against the 

i8 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


reef as they reached the water. With the exception 
of Hiram, they were all good swimmers. The boys, 
indeed, were unusually good swimmers, and were 
almost as much at home in the water as a duck is in 
a pond. 

They kept as near together as possible. At first they 
had no little difficulty in preventing the waves from 
dashing them against the reef, but soon, caught by 
the strong tidal-current that was settling toward the 
distant island, they were rapidly carried along with it. 

‘‘ Take it easy,” said the captain. “ The tide is 
rising and is setting toward the island. We have a 
swim ahead of us of at least a mile before we can 
reach land.” Then turning to Harold and Jack, he 
remarked : ‘‘ I know you two can cover that distance 
easily. How is it with you, Charley? ” he added, turn- 
ing to the other lad. 

‘‘ I have often gone much farther, sir, in the ocean 
off Australia. I can easily reach the island.” 

“ Charley,” inquired Harold, I suppose Rompey 
will have no trouble in swimming that mile ? ” 

“ Don’t worry about that,” said Charley, laughing, 
“ Rompey can swim it better than any of us.” 

The only one of the party who had any difficulty 
was Hiram, who, like most sailors, knew more about 
moving over the water in a boat or ship than of swim- 
ming through it. However, aiding him from time to 
time, they at last found a piece of the wrecked brig, and 
placing him on it, continued to swim with it toward the 
distant island. 


19 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Satan, a poll-parrot they had found on the brig and 
made a pet of, had, of course, accompanied them. She 
was far more at home in the ocean of air than any 
of her companions were in the ocean of water, and so 
flew through the air toward the island, although al- 
ways keeping near them. She was greatly excited and 
continued to scream out the various phrases she had 
learned, even adding, to their great surprise, a number 
of far from choice additional phrases they had never 
before heard -her utter, which she had apparently 
learned long before her introduction into polite society. 

As they steadily drew near the island, the water 
suddenly shoaled near the shore, and they soon stood 
on a beach of fine white coral sand. 

Looking back to the wrecked brig they could see 
the breakers dashing furiously against the breaker 
reef, and enveloping it in a cloud of mist, while along 
the beach of the island, both to the right and left as far 
as the eye could reach, they saw a continuous sand 
jeach lined almost continuously by breakers. The 
sea was breaking over one part of the beach, and at 
times poured water on the land that did not return to 
the ocean. 

“ Where are we. Captain Harding? ” inquired Jack. 

“ On a coral island,” was the reply. 

‘‘ Have you any idea in what part of the ocean? ” 
continued Jack. 

I cannot tell you its exact latitude and longitude,” 
answered the captain. ‘‘We have been unable to make 
an observation of the sun or other heavenly body for 
20 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the past five days. The island, however, cannot be far 
from some point of the Pacific midway between the 
coast of South America on the east and the coast of 
Australia on the west.’' 

“ And what is our latitude? ” continued Jack. “ I 
know that we are somewhere south of the Equator.” 

“We must be somewhere between 15° and 18° 
south,” replied the captain. 

“ Well, cap’n,” said Hiram, “ ez there’s a-plenty fer 
us to do, what shell we do fust ? ” 

“ The most important thing,” replied the captain, 
“ is to endeavor to recover as much of the wreckage 
of the brig as possible. Nearly all that floats should at 
last reach the island. Unfortunately, much of our 
foodstuffs will sink in the waters near the reefs over 
which the breakers are dashing. Still some of these 
goods may reach the island, especially, such as are 
packed in wooden boxes, barrels, or hogsheads. Do 
you remember just how the brig broke up, Hiram? ” 
he continued, addressing the boatswain. 

“ I kain’t tell fer sartin, cap’n,” was the reply. “ It 
all happened so etarnally suddent that I ain’t able to 
say jest what did take place. I think, howsumever, 
that ez the brig was thrown agin the reef she broke into 
two pieces. The half toward the bow was pretty well 
smashed, but the other half, that near the starn, held 
together, and was landed in fairly shallow water.” 

“ Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold, “ Hiram is 
right. The brig broke into two pieces. The part 
toward the bow was smashed, but the other part, nearly 
21 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


half, was wedged in between rocks where the water 
was not very deep, for I remember seeing the brig 
more than half out of water/’ 

“Yes, captain,” said Jack, “ that’s just what I saw.” 

“ And I too,” exclaimed Charley. 

“ So I’m the only one,” remarked the captain, smil- 
ing, “ who failed to look back toward the brig.” 

“ That, sir,” remarked Jack, “ was because you were 
so busy thinking about our safety that you only looked 
forward and not backward.” 

“ I guess you’re right, Jack,” was the reply. “ If 
we can build a raft so as to reach the wreck, we may 
be able to recover much of our canned goods and 
groceries, as well as some of the household stuffs, for, 
as you remember, most of these goods were stored in 
the vessel near the stern. Here too was the cabin con- 
taining the library, the manuscript of the doctor’s work 
on the “ Physical Geography of the Sea,” and most 
of the scientific instruments.” 

“ Cap’n,” said Hiram, “ kin we do enything now? ” 

“ No, Hiram,” was the reply, “ even if we had a raft 
or boat it would be dangerous to visit the reef at high 
tide. The tide is still running up, and judging from 
the appearance of things on the beach, will probably 
continue to run up for an hour longer. The tide will, 
therefore, not be low again for many hours.” 

“ Then what can we do, captain? ” inquired Jack. 

“ I think the first thing will be to dry our clothes. 
So let’s cross the island toward the lagoon, where we 
will probably find a good place for this purpose.” 

22 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER II 

The First Day on the Island 

Harold and Jack, who had never seen a coral island, 
wondered what the captain meant when he spoke 
about crossing the island to the lagoon; for, both 
were nearly sure he had never seen that island before. 
They were puzzled, therefore, to understand how he 
could speak so confidently about crossing the island 
until they reached the lagoon, whatever that was. 
Seeing that the captain was busy thinking how best 
to meet their new difficulties, they refrained from ask- 
ing questions, and followed him as he climbed the slope 
of the beach toward its top. 

It was not much of a hill; probably not more than 
five or six feet in height, but it was fairly steep. The 
beach consisted of coral pebbles and coral sand, a few 
worn shells, and occasionally the bones of fish, or 
the bleached shells of crabs. Reaching the top they 
saw a piece of wooded land rising gradually to a 
height that nowhere exceeded twelve or fifteen feet 
above the level of the sea. 

This part of the island was covered with a shallow 
layer of soil, consisting mainly of white coral sand 
slightly darkened here and there by small quantities of 
soil derived from the gradual decay of plants and 
animals. The highest land in this part of the island 
23 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


was situated about one-sixth of a mile from the ocean. 
It was evident that its layer of soil was shallow since, 
in some places, huge fragments of coral rock projected 
above the surface. Although of coral-limestone, yet 
these blocks had been so blackened by exposure to the 
air, or by the dark-colored lichens that they were of an 
almost black color. They were of various sizes, some 
being quite large. Where fragments had been broken 
from them during recent storms, the fractured portions 
showed the same brilliant white color as the coral sand 
on the beach. Continuing to press onward for one-sixth 
of a mile, in the same direction ; i. e., opposite to that 
of the ocean, they at last came to the edge of another 
beach, also of dazzling white sand, that sloped down- 
ward by a gentler inclination than the beach facing the 
ocean, to a beautiful lake some fourteen miles in length 
and twelve miles in width. 

Here’s the lagoon,” said the captain, as they stood 
at the top of its beach looking over this large body of 
water. 

It was a beautiful sight. Near the shores the waters 
were of a wonderful yellowish-green, while farther 
away they were of a blue that reminded them of the 
waters of the deep ocean, save that the tone of the 
blue was somewhat lighter. 

Walking down the sloping beach to the edge of the 
lagoon, they could see that the bottom here was covered 
with a layer of fine sand, although at other places, as 
they afterward discovered, the bottom was either 
muddy or was covered with growing corals. 

24 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


When the captain exclaimed, “ Here’s the lagoon,” 
Harold, speaking in a low tone to Jack, said: 

“ So lagoon means lake. Jack, does it not? ” 

“ It seems so, Harold,” was the reply. 

“ Have you never seen a coral island before, Har- 
old? ” said Charley, who overheard the conversation. 

'' No, Charley, neither has Jack. Have you? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply ; moreover, I have read about 
them. A regular coral island always has the shape 
of a narrow ring of land encircling a clear spot in the 
ocean called a lagoon. There are beaches both on the 
outside facing the ocean, and on the inside facing the 
lagoon.” 

This was certainly the structure of the island on 
which they had been cast, for an irregular ring-shaped 
mass of land, as far as they could see, completely sur- 
rounded the lagoon. Everywhere, except on the north- 
east, the island was low, and for the greater part, from 
one-third to one-half a mile in width ; that is, counting 
the width as the distance across the ring from the ocean 
to the lagoon. On the northeast, howeVer, it was both 
higher and broader. There was an abundance of 
bright green vegetation, the greater part of which ap- 
peared to consist of cocoanut palm trees. 

The island was so extremely odd in appearance that 
it greatly interested both the boys, especially Jack, who, 
turning to the captain, said : 

“ Won’t you tell us something about coral islands, 
captain ? ” 

‘‘ All-in good time. Jack,” was the reply. “ Just now 

25 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


we must get off our wet clothes and dry them. They’ll 
soon dry if we place them on the beach, and while this 
is going on, I think a bath in the lagoon will be re- 
freshing; for, as you know, none of us have had our 
clothes off since the beginning of the storm about a 
week ago. But before doing this, come with me along 
the shore of the lagoon, I want to show you some- 
thing.” 

They followed the captain as he walked along the 
sandy beach at the edge of the lagoon until they came 
to a place where, growing in the shallow water on the 
bottom, a number of curious-looking objects could be 
seen closely resembling huge china asters, or, perhaps, 
more closely, big chrysanthemums. They were fur- 
nished with colored appendages, or arms, that looked 
like the petals of these flowers, and, moreover, like 
them, were of different gorgeous colors. 

“ Be careful, boys,” said the captain, while in 
swimming, not to touch any of these animals.” 

Do they bite, captain ? ” inquired Jack. 

No, but they can give painful stings,” was the 
reply. 

‘‘Are they animals, Uncle Arthur?” exclaimed 
Harold in surprise. “ They look more like flowers 
than animals.” 

“ They do, indeed, resemble flowers, but they are 
animals for all that. They are called zoophytes, 
Harold,” was the reply. “ As you will probably re- 
member, zoophytes are animals that closely resemble 
plants.” 


26 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Oh, I remember now,’' said Harold. Zoophytes 
are plant-animals. But they don’t look like the zo- 
ophytes we saw on the seaweed or wrack near the 
Aleutian Islands.” Harold was referring to a delicate, 
white, lacelike coating that covered the surfaces of 
the kelp or seaweed they had been observing, in the 
North Pacific, while on the derelict brig. 

There are many kinds of zoophytes,” said the 
captain. “ Those you are now looking at are of the 
kind that furnish the material from which coral islands 
are formed. I’ll tell you about them some other time. 
But let us now go back to the place where the lagoon 
has a sandy bottom, where there are no zoophytes in 
sight. We will take off our clothes, spread them out 
on the beach to dry, and while waiting will have a 
pleasant bath. Don’t go out far from the shore. If 
there is any direct communication with the ocean there 
will probably be sharks in the lagoon.” 

It did not take the boys long to remove their wet 
clothes and spread them out on the hot sand of the 
beach. A swim is something a live, healthy boy is 
always glad to take, and the clear waters of the lagoon 
were very attractive. Moreover, their wet clothes, 
heated on the outside by the tropical sun, and on the- 
inside by their bodies, were beginning to steam, and 
were, therefore, extremely unpleasant. Besides, their 
cork life-preservers they had not yet removed, acted 
not unlike overcoats, and overcoats in the tropics, near 
midday, are far from comfortable. 

The boys were so eager for a swim that they had 
27 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


their clothes off, spread them out on the sand to dry, 
and were in the water fully five minutes before either 
of the men. 

The fine coral sand was soft to the feet. The waters 
though quite warm, were so much cooler than the body 
that they enjoyed their swim to the limit, and were 
soon having great times ducking one another, and 
playing the pranks so common to boys when swimming 
in water at a pleasant temperature. Indeed, they en- 
joyed the swim so thoroughly that the captain had 
some difficulty in persuading them to leave the water, 
every now and then, to turn their clothes, so that 
the sun might dry them more rapidly, and when this 
was done for the last time, it required some additional 
persuading to get them out of the water to dress. 

They had time carefully to look around them while 
dressing. There were four islands in the lagoon, all 
of which appeared to be formed after the same plan as 
the island on which they had been cast. All were of a 
circular or oval outline and, like the larger island, en- 
circled lagoons or bodies of water. 

How does the water get in here from the ocean. 
Uncle Arthur?” exclaimed Harold. ** I noticed 
while swimming that the water is of about the same 
saltness as the ocean.” 

Look there, Harold,” exclaimed the captain, turn- 
ing to a part of the beach on the right, at a distance of 
about half a mile. 

Harold saw, in the direction indicated, a place where 
the land was somewhat lower than the rest of the 
28 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


island. Here, every now and then, a high wave from 
the ocean broke over the island and ran down into 
the waters of the lagoon. 

‘‘I wonder where we can get drinking water?” 
exclaimed Jack. “ I am thirsty with the swim and the 
walk.” 

Possibly,” said Charley in a laughing tone, you 
are also thirsty because you haven’t had a drink for 
the last five or six hours.” 

“ I guess you’re right, Charley,” replied Jack, laugh- 
ing. “ However, Pm thirsty all right. Are springs 
generally found on coral islands, captain, where one 
can get fresh water ? ” 

Yes, Jack,” was the reply; there is generally no 
difficulty in getting plenty of good drinking water on 
a coral island, sometimes from springs, though gener- 
ally by digging wells. As a rule, there is hardly any 
part of a coral island where good drinking water will 
not quickly collect in wells dug from five to ten feet 
below the surface. We may, however, find a spring 
near the part covered with trees. Suppose we look 
for one over here where the trees come near to the 
top of the beach of the lagoon.” 

After a search of about fifteen minutes they found a 
spring from which a plentiful supply of excellent cold 
water was found running down the beach into the la- 
goon. Having satisfied their thirst, as well as that of 
Rompey, they continued their way across the island 
toward the ocean. 

When they started to cross the island toward the 
29 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


lagoon, Satan, unwilling to be left behind, perched on 
Jack’s shoulder, calling out occasionally : 

I’m hungry ! Give me something to eat ! ” 

No one took notice of the bird, but after the swim, 
and while on their way to the ocean, Harold, listening 
to what the bird said, remarked : 

“ So am I, Satan,” and then turning to Hiram, he 
remarked : “I suppose we ought to find something to 
eat on this island, ought we not? ” 

“ There be a-plenty,” remarked Hiram. “ It’ll be 
odd if we don’t find good eating in the cocoanuts on 
them trees,” he continued, pointing to a clump of co- 
coanut palms. Do ye think ye can shin up thet 
tree,” he continued, pointing to one of the tallest of 
the trees. ‘‘ Ye’ll find the nuts only at the top in the 
clump of leaves there.” 

‘‘ I shouldn’t wonder if I could,” remarked Harold, 
walking toward the tree that Hiram had pointed out. 

‘‘ And so can I,” exclaimed Charley. 

The lads were good at climbing and soon reached 
the top of the tree, when they began throwing a num- 
ber of cocoanuts down, and then quickly came down 
themselves. 

Each of the party now had a good-sized cocoanut, 
but the question was how to get at anything good that 
might be inside of it, for the nuts were not very attrac- 
tive looking as they came from the tree. 

‘‘ I hev eaten cocoanuts afore,” said Hiram. Let 
me pint out to ye how to begin,” and taking a knife 
from his pocket he opened the blade and showed them 

30 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


how to remove the thick covering of husk. The nut, 
SO uncovered, had near one end three dark spots some- 
thing like eyes, one of which was larger than the others. 
‘‘ Ye can cut a hole easy here,” said Hiram, pointing to 
the largest eye. 

Then cutting a hole at this place he handed the nut 
to Harold, saying: 

“ Try a drink o’ cocoanut milk, my lad.” 

To look at the lad’s face the sample was evidently 
quite satisfactory; for he expressed in pantomime his 
approval of the liquid by grinning and rubbing his 
stomach with his free hand. The nut was partially 
filled with a thin milklike liquid of a somewhat sweet- 
ish taste equal, as Harold stopped drinking for a mo- 
ment to declare, to the best drink he had ever taken. 

Either by the aid of Hiram’s knife or their own pen- 
knives, all five were soon busily engaged in drinking 
the liquid nourishment they were taking from the co- 
coanuts. When each had emptied the nut, Hiram 
remarked : 

“ Now, ye are through the fust course, let’s pass on 
to the next,” and showing them how they could most 
easily break open the nuts, they did so and found 
them filled with a delicious white, sweet, and almost 
solid meat, nearly an inch thick. 

But it had a far different taste from the compara- 
tively dry, hard, and tough meat found inside the 
cocoanuts that reach such distant places as London, 
New York, or Philadelphia. Instead of being hard 
and tough, it was more like a partially hardened cream 

31 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


or sweet butter. Indeed, it was so luscious that none 
of them stopped eating until the entire contents had 
been devoured. The noisy requests of Satan for a 
share of the feast, and the quieter though no less ear- 
nest waggings of Rompey’s tail, resulted in Charley 
opening an additional nut which was shared between 
the bird and dog in proportion to their relative sizes. 

Seeing that the boys were tired and sleepy, for none 
of them had had much sleep during the past two or 
three nights and days, and knowing that the tide would 
not be low until near six o’clock, the captain suggested 
they should all take a sleep. So leaving one of their 
number awake to watch, it being understood that the 
watch should be relieved at times agreed on, the others 
were soon in a sound, refreshing slumber. After 
several hours sleep they continued their walk toward 
the ocean, which they reached at the same place where 
they had landed. 

So curious a change had taken place during their 
absence that at first sight neither Jack nor Harold could 
believe it was the place at which they had landed. In- 
stead of finding a fairly steep sand beach extending 
down to the ocean, there had been added to the land 
a wide piece of smooth, nearly flat rock, several hun- 
dred feet in width, beyond which the waves were 
breaking. This additional land sloped gently down to 
the ocean. 

When Hiram saw the look of surprise in the faces 
of both Harold and Jack, he exclaimed : 

What be it thet surprises ye, my lads ? ” 

32 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ The place looks so different,” said Jack. The 
island seems to have gained so much ground since we 
left it not many hours ago.” 

“ Yes,” said Harold ; ‘‘ when we left the water was 
here,” pointing to the edge of the coral beach, ‘‘ and 
now,” he said, it looks as if all this land had been 
added to it.” 

“ In truth,” said Jack laughing, during the few 
hours we have been away and sleeping, a change has 
occurred greater than that poor Rip Van Winkle ex- 
perienced in the little village of Sleepy Hollow, when 
he returned from his sleep of a hundred years in the 
Kaaterskill Mountains. This, you remember, was 
after taking a glass of schnapps given to him by the 
little fellows when he had carried liquor up the 
mountains.” 

‘‘ I say. Jack,” said Charley laughing, “ perhaps we 
have been sleeping longer than the few hours you be- 
lieve. Possibly it was not merely cocoanut milk we 
drank, but a wonderful drink prepared by some wicked 
magician who hocused it for us.” 

‘‘ Oh, shut up, Charley,” cried Jack laughing, none 
of your joking. Tell us, captain,” he said, turning to 
that gentleman, ‘‘ what has made the wonderful change 
in the appearance of the place.” 

‘‘ Don’t you remember. Jack,” said the captain, 
“ while swimming in from the breaker reef how 
shallow we found the water within several hundred 
feet of the island? A large portion of the outer side 
of a coral island, that is, the side turned toward the 
33 


c 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ocean, consists of a gradual sloping area of hard coral 
rock called the shore platform. This part is almost 
completely covered by the ocean during high tide, and 
almost uncovered at low tide. What has happened is 
simple. It is now low tide and the shore platform has 
nearly run dry of the water that covered it at high 
tide. This has made the great increase in the area of 
the island.” 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER III 

The Flotsam From the Wrecked Brig 

It was now about five o’clock in the afternoon. All 
were greatly refreshed by their few hours of sleep. 
Considerable wreckage brought by the tide from the 
brig was spread over different parts of the flat surface 
of the shore platform. By far the greater part of this 
material consisted of pieces of cork, boards, or such 
kinds of millwork as wooden doors, window-frames, 
door-frames, and various other parts of portable wood 
houses. Besides these, a number of boxes and barrels 
were either lying on the different parts of the shore 
platform or on the sandy beach. 

There is much to be done,” said the captain to his 
companions. ‘‘ Suppose we first move the boxes and 
barrels to the top of the beach, where they’ll be out of 
the way of the next high tide.” 

The contents of barrels filled with flour had been 
ruined by the water. The contents of two puncheons 
marked port wine was in good condition, the pun- 
cheons being of course watertight. There was a num- 
ber of boxes whose contents, on opening, were found 
to be in satisfactory condition. These were filled with 
ten-pound packages of oatmeal, cornmeal, rice, and 
dried fruit, such as apples and peaches. Several bar- 
rels they had found when first on the brig about one- 
35 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


third filled with crystallized sugar, the remainder hav- 
ing been dissolved by the water and which they emptied 
out, dried, and then carefully headed. While floating 
from the brig to the shore probably one-fourth of the 
sugar they had contained was not yet dissolved. So, - 
pouring off the water that had leaked in, they placed 
them where they would dry on exposure to the hot air. 

Besides the floating packages, they found several 
chairs and tables from the household goods, and a 
number of wooden bedsteads. There were also several 
bundles of highly colored blankets like those from 
which they had made overcoats while in the cooler 
regions of the Kurile Islands. The dye stuffs of the 
blankets were fairly fast so that, although thoroughly 
soaked, the colors had not run to any great extent. 
There was also a number of mattresses, soaked in 
sea- water, but not otherwise injured. 

“ These will be of use,” said the captain, referring 
to the blankets and mattresses. ‘‘ A few days’ ex- 
posure to the sun will thoroughly dry them.” 

None of the boxes or barrels that contained canned 
goods or other heavy articles was found. These of 
course had sunk when thrown into the water on the 
partial breaking-up of the brig. 

Unless the part of the brig you all say you re- 
member having seen resting on the rocks is still stand- 
ing, we can hardly hope to recover much of our heavier 
groceries.” 

Wall, captain,” replied Hiram, thet half of the 
brig is still standing all right ; for thar she is,” point- 

36 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ing to the distant breaker reefs, standing up above the 
water. She looks as if thar wuz much good stuff still 
in her.’’ 

Looking toward the distant reef, they could now dis- 
tinctly see a portion of the brig. This was not only 
because they were standing on the shore platform near 
the ocean, but especially because the cloud of spray 
raised by the breakers that had cut off a view of the 
brig shortly after they had left it, had now disap- 
peared, and its remains were visible. 

The captain did not immediately answer Hiram. He 
was evidently engaged in deep thought. At last he 
spoke to his companions as follows : 

“We must find some way to reach the remains of 
the brig early to-morrow morning. There are still 
several hours before sunset. Let us at once begin 
making a rude raft so as to have it ready by to-mor- 
row’s low tide. We ought to be able to build some 
form of raft for this purpose, should we not, Hiram ? ” 
he said, turning to the boatswain. 

“ Sartinly, cap’n. With all this stuff floating by,” 
he said, pointing to many large pieces of the timbers 
from the sides of the broken half of the brig, “ we kin 
build a raft easy. Then, ef we manage to git off when 
the tide is running down, I reckon we kin reach the 
wreck of the brig. Of course, it’ll not be safe to git 
thar much afore the water is slack, sence them breakers 
are wery dangerous, as we hev reason to know.” 

“ Then let’s begin,” said the captain. 

“ Fust of all,” said Hiram, “ we must find a landing- 

37 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


place ; fer, although the breakers ain’t wery strong now, 
arter a while, when thet tide rises, a raft would be of 
no use, ez we couldn’t land her.” 

Then,” said the captain, we must at once begin 
looking for some kind of harbor where we can build the 
raft” 

But the finding of a harbor was by no means easy. 
Harbors were few and far between. They had care- 
fully examined the coast for six miles to the west be- 
fore they found a fairly good harbor, which they 
agreed to call Jackson Harbor, after Jack. 

Most of the heavy pieces of wreckage from the brig 
had been carried by the waves to the edge of the shore 
platform, and were floating in the deeper waters of 
the ocean near its outer edge. After considerable trou- 
ble they got these together at Jackson Harbor, and 
placing them side by side, held them in place by other 
lighter timbers laid over them — pieces crosswise and 
also side by side. Fortunately, among the wreckage 
was some cordage, some of it of considerable length. 

“ I wish I hed a barrel of nails and a hammer,” 
growled Hiram. “ One don’t know how waleable tools 
be ontil he hasn’t ’em. Howsumever, we must do the 
best we kin with this ’ere rope.” 

It was long after dark when they stopped working, 
not because the work was finished but for want of 
light. 

“ We will get up early to-morrow morning,” said 
the captain, ‘‘ sa as to complete the work in time 
to take advantage of the tide that will then be 

38 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


setting out from the island. Of course, we’ll time our 
leaving so as to reach the brig at slack water. I hope 
we can safely board the brig and load our raft with 
any goods that may not be spoiled by the water, and 
leave for our return to the island before the breakers 
become too dangerous. 

Cap’n,” said Hiram, ez we have no means fer 
tying the raft to the shore, hedn’t we better pass the 
night on her so as to be thar to keep her from starting 
off ef the tides during the night should begin to carry 
her away from the island ? ” 

Your suggestion is excellent, Hiram,” said the cap- 
tain. ‘‘ We’ll spend the night on the raft. I guess we 
can manage to be tolerably comfortable. Certainly we 
shall be more so than if we should attempt to sleep 
on the damp shore platform. Of course, we’ll divide 
our party into watches, so as to see that the raft does 
not start out to sea shortly after the beginning of the 
ebb tide.” 

There were two watches, the first consisting of Cap- 
tain Harding and Jack, and the second of Hiram, 
Harold, and Charley. Nothing of importance occurred 
during the night except that during Hiram’s watch 
they were obliged to call the captain and Jack to help 
keep the raft from being carried out to sea shortly after 
the beginning of the ebb tide. 

Long before there was light enough to see dis- 
tinctly they were up preparing breakfast, after which 
they put the finishing touches on the raft. Then wait- 
ing until such time during the ebb tide as they judged 
39 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


would bring them to the brig by slack water, they suc- 
ceeded in pushing the raft off from the shore platform 
and were moved slowly by the tide toward the brig. 

Fortunately, there was a fairly strong wind blowing 
directly from the island toward the brig. Aided in 
this way they reached the breaker reef at about the 
time of slack water. 

If they had been surprised at the great change in 
the width of the island between the ocean and the 
sand beach, when they returned to it from their swim 
in the lagoon, they had greater reason for being sur- 
prised when they reached the site of the breaker reef. 
Instead of dashing waves and threatening currents, all 
they saw was a strip of coral reef with several breaks 
through which the water was slowly running out 
from the island; so slowly, indeed, that the currents 
could hardly be observed. The reef had then been 
left high and dry. Moreover, there was a fairly ex- 
tended area of flat rocks corresponding probably to 
the shore platform of the coral reef that was also out of 
the water. Indeed, had not a channel existed along 
the side of that part of the reef on which the remains 
of the brig had been thrown, it would have been im- 
possible to bring their raft within fifty or sixty feet 
of her. 

The platform, or rock surrounding the reef on the 
side toward the island, was covered with various heavy 
articles that had been thrown from the brig, and had 
sunk to the bottom before they reached the deeper 
water outside. But what especially pleased them was 
40 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


to see that the remains of the brig was resting high 
and dry on the highest part of the breaker reef, and 
that, strange to say, it did not appear to have been 
very badly broken by the shock that thoroughly 
wrecked the half nearest the bow. 

“ The first thing to do,” said the captain to Hiram, 
“ is to board what remains of the brig. It looks as if 
there ought to be large quantities of valuable materials 
that are still uninjured.” 

“ Cap’n,” exclaimed Hiram, “ while ye are doing 
this, ril see ef I kin find some spikes and a sledge ham- 
mer to put the raft in better shape.” 

On boarding the remains of the brig they were 
greatly relieved to find that comparatively little water 
had entered it. The cabin was still fairly dry, but had 
been badly broken by several timbers that had been 
forced into her during the going-to-pieces of the other 
half of the brig. Unfortunately, these timbers had 
hopelessly ruined the chronometer and sextant, as well 
as most of the scientific instruments. The round table, 
at which they had passed so many pleasant hours in 
reading and talking, had been smashed into pieces that 
were lying on the floor, and the papers and other arti- 
cles that had been left in the drawer were scattered 
over the floor of the cabin. 

While these losses were greatly regretted by the 
captain, there was a part 'Of the contents of the cabin 
that had not been injured. The valuable library was 
almost intact, except that some of the books had been 
wet by the spray of the breakers. But there was 

41 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


something the captain was looking for apparently with 
considerable anxiety. Jack, who made a fair guess at 
what this was without saying anything, commenced to 
look on the floor and examine the articles that were 
scattered over it in all directions. Finally picking 
up a package of papers, he turned to the captain and 
said: 

“ Captain, isn’t this what you are looking for ? ” 
handing him the manuscript of the doctor’s book on 
the Physical Geography of the Sea.” ‘‘ It must have 
fallen out of the drawer of the round table when it 
was broken by the timbers that were thrown against 
it when the brig was broken in two.” 

I am very glad this manuscript has not been in- 
jured, Jack,” replied the captain, carefully examining 
the bundle of manuscript which, to his great joy, 
was found to be in fairly good condition; for, as you 
know, when we get back to civilization I hope to have 
it published, and shall see that any royalties received 
from it are paid to the doctor’s heirs.” 

When the captain spoke about what he hoped to do 
when they got back to civilization. Jack said to him : 

‘‘ Do you think we will ever get back to civilization, 
captain ? Are the chances good for our doing this ? ” 

'' It is hard to say. Jack,” replied the captain. ‘‘ We 
must wait and hope.” 

There was silence for a few moments. Both speak- 
ers realized that their chance of being taken off the 
island by a passing vessel depended both on the char- 
acter of the island as well as on its situation, and on 
42 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


neither of these questions had they then any informa- 
tion. 

As soon as the captain was convinced that no se- 
rious damage had befallen the manuscript, he turned 
to his companions and said : 

Now, we’ll see whether any of the cargo stored in 
this part of the vessel has escaped damage from the 
water. From the condition of things in the cabin, I 
think we will find many of the groceries and other 
articles in fairly good condition.” 

While the captain and Jack had been examining the 
manuscript of the doctor’s book, Hiram, who had gone 
with Harold and Charley to look for spikes and ham- 
mers, came into the cabin with the cheering news that 
the goods in the middle hold of the brig appeared to be 
but little injured by the wreck. 

Hiram had brought with him a tool-box, several 
large hammers, and a quantity of large iron spikes 
and nails. Speaking to the captain, he said : 

The fust thing I’d like to do would be to put our 
raft in condition so it kin hold together better.” 

An hour’s hard work was spent at Hiram’s sugges- 
tion in spiking together the upper and lower timbers. 

When this work was completed, the captain, turn- 
ing to his companions, said : 

“ Of course we must get away from the reef before 
the coming high tide brings the breakers with it. We 
have now only a few hours left and must, therefore, 
hurry.” 

In view of the short time left for transferring the 
43 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


goods from the brig to the raft, a less intelligent man 
than the captain might have at once begun this work, 
but the captain knew that because they had so little 
time they could not afford to hurry thoughtlessly. In 
other words, though he would not fail to hurry, yet he 
appreciated the necessity for hurrying intelligently. 
In this respect he was not unlike the surgeon who, 
while performing a major operation, had inadvertently 
cut a large artery. His assistant, losing his nerve by 
the flow of blood, endeavored in a hurried, unintelli- 
gent way to check it. 

'' Stop,y cried the surgeon, “ we have no time to 
hurry ” ; though, nevertheless, while talking, he took 
every precaution that nothing that was being done 
should require to be done twice. 

And so it was with the captain. Instead of at once 
setting them all to work carrying the goods from the 
hold to the deck of the brig, and then from the brig 
to the raft, he proceeded, with the assistance of Hiram 
and his companions, to rig up a block and tackle, so 
that the goods could be raised from the hold to the 
deck and then lowered to the raft. Although this took 
fully three-quarters of an hour, both to find the neces- 
sary materials and to rig them in place, yet, when done, 
by dividing their number into three groups — i. e., two 
in the hold, two on deck, and one on the raft, they 
were able readily to do in a single hour what would 
otherwise have taken many hours. 

By means of the advantages thus gained, they were 
able to place such an assortment of goods on the raft, 
44 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


that it was sunk in the water almost above the lower 
line of its timbers. 

Quite naturally, while unloading the brig they paid 
especial attention to her condition. It was evident 
that the timbers of the half that remained standing on 
the reef had been so severely wrenched by the blow 
against the reef that she was liable to fall to pieces at 
almost any moment. Jack, who had noticed the 
anxiety in the captain’s face, said : 

“ Captain, how many more trips do you think we 
can make to the shore and back before she goes to 
pieces ? ” 

I cannot say. Jack,” said the captain anxiously, 
“ that is what has been bothering me. You remember 
the brig has been threatening to go to pieces long be- 
fore she was wrecked on the reef. She has of course 
been still more weakened by the severe shock that broke 
her in two. Indeed, I am greatly surprised that she 
has not completely broken up long ago. In her present 
condition she may go to pieces at any moment, but I 
hope she will hold together until the next storm, or the 
next unusually high tide. However, as far as I can see, 
we have done all that is possible to do. If she goes to 
pieces before to-morrow we can congratulate our- 
selves on the valuable supplies we now have on the 
raft.” 

It may be interesting to note the character of their 
first raftload of goods. It consisted of great quantities 
of groceries, canned goods, and food products of all 
kinds, placed in watertight packages. Besides these, 
45 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


there were various articles of hardware, such as pots, 
kettles, pans, table cutlery, and cooking stoves; then 
too, there was an assortment of household goods and 
chinaware, etc. All these would be of great value if 
obliged to make any prolonged stay on the island. In- 
deed, when to the above we add that there was an as- 
sortment of such household furniture as bedsteads, 
chairs, tables, mattresses, blankets, as well as a collec- 
tion of kitchenware with numerous watertight pack- 
ages of matches, I cannot blame my readers if they 
charge me with telling an improbable story. But it 
must not be forgotten, as has already been mentioned, 
and as has been more fully recited in Five Months on 
a Derelict,” that the cargo of the derelict brig, besides 
being formed largely of cork and millwork lumber, 
consisted of large quantities of such articles as would 
be required by the people of the mining towns. 

When this is remembered the wonder ceases, for 
the articles needed at the mining towns were the very 
things required by our shipwrecked friends, who were 
about to establish their house on a coral island instead 
of in Southern Africa. 

Besides the above-named goods, there were special 
articles placed on the raft both by the captain and by 
Hiram. The captain saw that all the books and charts, 
together with not only the uninjured scientific ap- 
paratus but even the parts that remained of those that 
had been ruined, were included. He was delighted that 
the pair of powerful field-glasses they had found when 
first coming on the brig, as well as a pair he had 

46 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


brought with him from the Ketrel when they had left 
her in the open boat, were uninjured. Knowing too, as 
he did, the excellent fishing-grounds that are generally 
found both on the shore platform, as well as in the 
lagoon, he saw that a good assortment of fishing-lines, 
hooks, etc., was secured. He also was careful to take 
all the guns, revolvers, and powder he could find. 

Hiram, who was skilled as a ship’s carpenter and as 
a cabinet-maker, was careful to take with him all the 
ship’s carpenter’s and cabinet-maker’s tools he had 
found on the brig, as well as an assortment of nails, 
brads, and screws, and small hardware generally. He 
also secured, as well as he could rapidly, not only a 
good supply of strong twine suitable for the manu- 
facture of nets, but also an assortment of ropes and 
cables. 


47 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER IV 

The Final Breaking-up of the Brig. A 
Valuable Discovery 

But the tide was now rising rapidly, and the breakers 
were beginning to pour so angrily over the reef that 
it would have been dangerous to remain longer, so 
pushing the raft off into the channel it was soon caught 
by a tidal current and carried slowly toward the island. 

The tide was still rising when they reached Jackson 
Harbor and securely moored the raft by the cables to 
several iron bars driven into the cracks in the lime- 
stone. Fortunately, the opening through the shore 
platform did not pass directly from the ocean toward 
the beach, but turning abruptly toward the east formed 
a harbor that completely shielded it from the breakers. 
The harbor was therefore safe even during severe 
storms, when it would have been impossible to land on 
any other portion of this part of the coast. Moreover, 
there was a sufficient depth of water to render the 
harbor accessible even at the lowest tide. 

Although the head of the harbor where they moored 
the raft was much nearer the beach than any other 
parts of the island yet examined, there was neverthe- 
less a strip of the shore platform, about fifty feet in 
width, that had to be passed before the dry land of 
the beach was reached. 


48 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


The captain, therefore, had to devise means for 
safely unloading. The raft had been so heavily laden 
that if an attempt were made to push it over the shal- 
low waters of the shore platform it might easily be 
grounded. And even if they succeeded in taking it 
to the edge of the sand beach they would certainly be 
unable to unload before the place was left dry by the 
receding tide. In either case, therefore, being caught 
on the shore platform, they would be obliged to wait 
for the next flood tide, and this would occasion too 
great a loss of time. 

Consequently, there was nothing to do but to wait 
until the low tide permitted them to carry or roll all 
their goods to the top of the sand beach. Although 
this required three hours of hard work, yet they had the 
satisfaction, as each load was safely left on the top of 
the beach above the reach of the waves at high tide, 
of thinking how much comfort they could get from the 
goods they had thus rescued from the wreck. 

They had been working so continuously since leav- 
ing in the early morning, that there had been but little 
opportunity to obtain any food other than that which 
they had brought from the brig. Therefore, although 
it was quite late when they had completed their work, 
they gladly helped Hiram set up one of the cook- 
stoves, and starting a fire, made a cup of hot chocolate 
and heated several cans of soup. This done, they en- 
joyed a comfortable night’s sleep on shore on mat- 
tresses placed on the bedsteads brought from the brig. 
Although the only canopy over their heads was the 
D 49 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


brilliant arch of heaven, lighted as it was with innumer- 
able stars, yet they slept soundly. The raft being now 
securely attached by cables to the shore platform could 
safely be left. Not knowing the character of the 
island on which they were, they divided their company 
into watches, who took turns in remaining awake while 
the others slept. 

Since it would be impossible to leave the island next 
morning until about eight o’clock, there was plenty of 
time not only to prepare a good breakfast, but also to 
cook food for use on their second trip on the raft. 

The captain was unusually quiet during breakfast. 
Seeing that he was planning something for the general 
good, they avoided leading him into conversation. At 
last, turning to Hiram, he said : 

“ Hiram, we ought to be able to make our brains 
save the hard work our bodies were obliged to do 
yesterday, as well as the time lost in waiting for the 
change in the tide. It was hard work taking the goods 
across the shore platform. I have a plan to avoid this 
work,” he continued. 

“ Wall,” said Hiram, ‘‘ let’s hear yer plan, cap’n.” 

“ Yes, Uncle Arthur,” cried Harold, “ tell us how 
we can save both the work and the waiting.” 

Especially the work,” added Charley laughing. 

‘‘ Easily enough,” replied the captain good-na- 
turedly. And then turning to Hiram and pointing to 
a large quantity of flooring boards that had been 
washed up by the waves, and piled in a heap at the top 
of the sand beach, he added : Why can’t we build a 

50 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


raft with these boards and leave it at Jackson Harbor, 
so that when the shore platform is still covered with 
water we can load some of the goods on it and so 
carry them by water from the raft to the sand beach. 
Besides this, we shall need a small raft in order to pass 
between the harbor and the shore during high tide 
when the light raft has been moored alongside the 
heavy raft.” 

“ Thet's a great idee, cap’n,” replied Hiram, “ and 
sence I hev brought tools and a lot of nails, there’ll be 
no trouble in building a raft big enough to carry to 
the beach in three or four trips all the goods we bring 
on the other raft. Ef we work smart, we kin unload 
the raft on its next trip, and take the smaller raft back 
to the larger raft afore the tide runs down.” 

The boys were enthusiastic when they heard the 
captain’s simple plan. They, therefore, constructed a 
smaller raft and moored it by a cable to the edge of the 
shore platform at Jackson Harbor near the large raft in 
plenty of time to reach the breaker reef with the larger 
raft, about the time of slack water. 

As far as they could see, the condition of things at 
breaker reef had not changed from what they had been 
on the occasion of their former visit. The remains of 
the brig was still resting on the rocks, and the space 
around the reef as before was bare and covered with 
the heavier articles that had been thrown from the brig 
when the other half had been broken by striking 
against the reef. They had not thought it worth their 
while to place these goods on the raft as long as so 

51 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


many goods in better condition remained in the vessel’s 
hold. 

We’ll not take the time now,” said the captain, ‘‘ to 
remove them. This can be done some other time. 
Even if the brig breaks to pieces, it will be possible to 
collect the heavier of these articles afterward.” 

There was, however, one of these articles that Hiram 
was especially anxious to secure. This was the small 
bronze cannon he had taken from the derelict pirate 
vessel they had boarded while in the Sargasso Sea 
of the North Pacific. The captain’s permission being 
obtained. Jack assisted Hiram in placing the cannon 
on the raft. 

When this was done Hiram stood for a moment 
looking at the cannon with a pleased look, and re- 
marked to Jack : 

“ One kain’t never tell what use we may put this 
thing to some time or other.” 

“Against people or animals, Hiram?” inquired 
Jack. 

“ I kain’t say,” was the reply. “ But at any rate, 
it’s best to hev it; fer generally, when ye need sich a 
thing, ye’re apt to need it wery partikler.” 

“ That’s so,” said Jack laughing. 

“ Jack,” said Hiram, “ I know we brung a lot of 
powder with us yesterday, but ef ye see any more don’t 
forgit to have it loaded on the raft.” 

Using the block and tackle, they again loaded the raft 
with a great variety of the goods still remaining on the 
brig, including, especially, the canned goods and small 

52 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


articles of hardware. At the request of the captain, 
Hiram selected the materials for several portable houses, 
nor did they forget to take several boxes containing the 
panes of glass for use in the window-sash. They con- 
tinued working on the brig until the rising tide again 
brought with it the breakers, when they were obliged 
to cast off from the reef and permit the tide to carry 
the raft back again to the island. 

On reaching Jackson Harbor they found their lighter 
raft to work admirably, and were able readily to make 
five successive trips between the larger raft and the 
sand beach and return it to the side of the larger raft 
for use the next morning before the shore platform had 
been left dry by the receding tide. 

They made additional voyages to the brig on several 
successive days, and in this way were able to transfer 
to the beach a large portion of its valuable cargo. It 
was hard work, but the brig contained so much mate- 
rial that would be of value to them while on the island 
they did not mind it. 

On their return from the fifth voyage, seeing the 
younger boys were tired from the continuous hard 
work, the captain suggested that Rompey and they 
should take a walk along the beach to rest themselves. 

'' Don’t go more than a mile or so,” said the captain; 
we don’t yet know whether the island is inhabited or 
not, so there’s no telling what you might meet.” 

‘‘ Big bad men might run away with little boys,” 
said Jack laughing. 

They might; might they? ” said Charley laughing. 

53 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Come, Harold, let’s punish this big bad boy,” and 
rushing at Jack they soon had him on his back in the 
sand pummeling him good-naturedly. 

You’ll call us little boys, will you? ” said Charley. 

Come now, take it back.” 

All right,” said Jack laughing. “ You great big 
little boys, please let me up.” 

I guess we’ll let him up this time, Harold,” said 
Charley. 

Oh, yes,” remarked Harold, ‘‘ but only this time. 
Look out for the next time. Jack. According to my 
arithmetic, two little boys may be better than one big 
boy.” 

“ I guess we can trust you alone,” said the captain, 
who had been an amused observer of the above-men- 
tioned incident. 

The young boys started off on their walk accom- 
panied by Rompey, who ran joyfully ahead, greatly 
pleased that his young masters had at last ceased, if 
only for a time, from hard work. At last, the dog 
got so far ahead as to be almost out of sight, When 
they had at last gone so far from the others as to be 
unable any longer to see them, they heard Rompey 
loudly barking. 

‘‘ I wonder what Rompey sees ? ” inquired Harold. 

“ I don’t know,” replied Charley. “ Let’s hurry up 
and find out. From the way he is barking, I guess it’s 
something he thinks worth looking at.” 

‘‘Yes,” replied Harold; “and what is more, it is 
something that pleases instead of angers him. Don’t 
54 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


you notice it is a glad, pleased bark, and not an angry 
one?” 

“ That’s so,” said Charley. 

Running up the beach the boys saw what had so ex- 
cited the dog. It was the wreck of Boat No. 23, the 
boat in which Rompey had been picked up in a nearly 
famished condition. 

Rompey had recognized the boat and had taken this 
method of calling his masters’ attention to it. 

'' It is in bad condition,” said Harold to his com- 
panion, ‘‘ but I guess Hiram can make it good and safe 
now he has his tool-chest with him.” 

I’m sure he can,” said Charley, examining the boat. 

But Rompey had apparently seen something else ; for 
he again began barking, ran a short distance farther 
up the beach, and turning, gave the boys clearly to 
understand that he wished them to follow him. 

“ Let’s see what else he has found,” said Charley. 

As soon as Rompey saw that his masters were fol- 
lowing him he ran with a joyous bark a short distance 
ahead and, running up to something that was lying 
in the sand, he placed one of his paws on it, and sha- 
king his tail looked up into their faces as if to say : 

“ Here is something else I have found. Don’t you, 
think I’m a clever dog? ” 

Rompey was thus calling attention to what was one 
of the oars of the boat and two of the oar-locks, while 
lying near them were the three remaining oars, all 
uninjured. 

‘‘ Do you remember, Harold,” inquired Charley, 

55 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


whether the other two oar-locks were in the boat? 

“ Yes,” said Harold, I remember seeing both of 
them there.” 

Let’s take the oars and the oar-locks to the boat,” 
said Charley, “ and go tell the captain and Hiram what 
we have found.” 

Their companions were greatly pleased at the good 
• news Charley and Harold brought them. 

‘‘ I reckon we’d better go and look her over, cap’n,” 
said Hiram. Onless she’s in a wery bad condition, I 
reckon we kin fix her up fer use.” 

I hope so,” said the captain, for without a boat on 
the island we would be at a great disadvantage.” 

Hiram gave the following opinion after examin- 
ing the boat : : 

She bean’t hurt much. I kin sartinly put her in 
good condition, and thet without wery much work.” 

“ About how long do you think it will take, Hi- 
ram ? ” inquired the captain. 

“ Wall, ef all of ye help,” replied Hiram, I think I 
kin do it in about one day’s full work.” 

Then,” said the captain, ‘‘ we’ll give to this work 
the first day we are unable to make a trip with the 
raft to the brig.” 

‘‘ Cap’n,” said Hiram, who had been examining the 
sky, do ye see them clouds in the west?” 

“ Yes, Hiram,” was the reply. ‘‘ They look ugly, 
don’t they? ” 

They suttenly do,” replied Hiram. Ef I’m not 
greatly mistaken, thar’s a-plenty of wind back o’ them. 

56 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Ef the storm comes which I think is cornin’, wot is left 
of the brig’ll probably go to pieces to-night.” 

I hope not,” said the captain. There is still much 
in her hold I would like to get on the island.” 

** But even if she goes to pieces to-night, captain,” 
said Jack, ‘‘ we have so much safe on top of the sand 
beach, we can hardly complain.” 

‘‘ That’s right. Jack,” said the captain. “ We have, 
indeed, recovered a much greater quantity of material 
than we could reasonably have expected to do. How- 
ever, we will know better in the morning.” 

Fearing the coming storm might injure their goods, 
they erected a rude shelter over them, sufficient to pro- 
tect them from a heavy rain. That night, after supper, 
a severe storm broke op the island, and although it was 
too dark to see what was happening, they could hear 
the roaring of the breakers at breaker reef. 

I guess the poor brig will go this time, Hiram,” 
said the captain. 

I reckon ye’re right, sir,” was the reply. 

After seeing that their rafts were securely moored 
by cables to the edge of the shore platform, they sought 
the cover of their rude shelter and turned in for the 
night. 

Early next day all anxiously looked toward the dis- 
tant reef. The breakers were dashing furiously over 
it. Although they carefully scanned it with the field- 
glasses they had brought from the wreck, yet they 
could see nothing of the brig. It had evidently been 
swept away by the breakers. 

57 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


There was nothing to do now but to wait until the 
storm subsided. This it did not do until the end of 
that day. Since, however, the rain was falling heavily, 
they made no attempt to repair the boat, but were, 
nevertheless, careful to drag her up beyond the top of 
the beach, lest she should be further damaged by the 
unusually strong waves from the ocean that were 
dashing furiously over the shore platform up the sand 
beach. 

“ Captain,” said Jack, I suppose as soon as the 
storm has passed you will take the raft to breaker 
reef and bring back whatever of the heavy goods we 
may find resting on the rocks that are left uncovered 
at low tide ? ” 

“ Yes, Jack,” was the reply, we will make one and 
possibly two trips for this purpose, for there will cer- 
tainly be a great quantity of goods found resting on 
the bare surface of the reef.” 


58 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER V 
Repairing the Boat 

The next morning broke with such a bright tropical 
sun and cloudless sky that it seemed almost impossible 
that only yesterday there had been so severe a storm. 
Turning a pair of glasses toward the breaker reef the 
captain looked anxiously to see whether any of the brig 
yet remained above the water, but there was nothing in 
sight Had anything been there he would certainly 
have seen it, for there was now but little spray. 

About two o’clock in the afternoon, pushing the 
heavy sea-raft out from Jackson Harbor, they started 
for the reef. Though no signs of the half of the brig 
were to be seen, yet there was plenty of evidence that 
it had gone to pieces; for they repeatedly passed por- 
tions of her timbers floating in the water between the 
island and the reef. 

Hiram looked on these timbers with longing eyes. 
Anything in the shape of wood possessed great attrac- 
tions for him. He therefore suggested to the captain, 
the advisability of securing some of the timbers to the 
raft. 

There be so many uses, cap’n, to which we kin put 
’em,” he said. 

No, Hiram,” was the reply. “ I think we shall 
find much more valuable stuff on the reef. Besides, 
59 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


practically all of these timbers will eventually be 
washed on our island. Although they may be carried 
by successive tides a number of times between the 
island and the reef, yet most of them will in the end 
find a resting-place on our shores.” 

They saw still greater evidences of the breaking of 
the brig when they reached the breaker reef. The bare 
surface of rock was almost covered with heavy articles 
that had been thrown into the water when the brig 
went to pieces. Indeed, there was enough of these 
articles here not only to load down the raft, but even 
to load it again on their visit the following day. 

There was one article lodged on the reef that caused 
no little surprise. As already related in “ Five Months 
on a Derelict,” they had found some coal when they 
first boarded the brig in the China Sea. This was so 
small in quantity that they had used all of it by 
the time they had been blown into the Sargasso 
Sea of the North Pacific, where they obtained a quan- 
tity of driftwood that served admirably as fuel for 
their cooking stove. Although Hiram had made, as 
he then believed, an exhaustive search of the hold, no 
more coal had been discovered. Now, however, they 
saw scattered over the surface of the reef some four or 
five tons of coal that had been stored in some inac- 
cessible part of the brig. 

''We must get that stuff on the raft,” said Hiram. 
" It’ll be wery convenient for our cooking stove.” 

" What a queer place for a coal mine,” said Charley 
laughing. 


6o 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


It don’t make any difference, Charley,” said Jack, 
‘‘ it’s coal all right, so we’ll take it and be thankful.” 

Of course, when the brig finally broke up, some of 
the packages containing foodstuffs that had not been 
removed from the brig were broken up and their con- 
tents scattered not only in the deeper waters but also 
over the surface of the reef platform. In the deep 
waters a multitude of fish, including many large sharks, 
were fighting for the food, while on the bare shore 
platform great flocks of birds were eagerly devouring 
the contents of the broken packages. 

Pointing to the sharks, Hiram said : 

“Ye see, my lads, it’s onsafe to do much swimmin’ 
in these here waters. Them fellers could take any of 
us in at a single gobble.” 

“ It’s fortunate they did not do so while we were 
swimming from the reef to the island,” remarked 
Harold. 

“ You’re right, my lad,” said Hiram, “ and yet thar 
warn’t ez much danger ez you may hev supposed, fer, 
ginerally speaking, sharks be wery cowardly, and don’t 
mostly attack a crowd of men. Nevertheless, I reckon 
we’d better never give them a chance, fer ef they were 
specially hungry they might eat us.” 

The captain appeared to be especially astonished at 
the indifference the birds on the reef manifested to 
their presence. Turning to his companions, he said : 

“ These birds do not appear to have yet learned 
what dangerous animals men are. They act as if this 
were an uninhabited island.” 

6i 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ And that means, captain, does it not,” said Jack, 
“ that our island has not been much visited by ships ? ” 

“ I’m afraid you’re right. Jack,” was the reply. 
“ But we will try to find out. One of the first things 
we must do when there is no chance of saving any- 
thing more from the brig, will be to make a thorough 
examination of the island.” 

As already remarked, they were obliged to return 
to the breaker reef on the next day in order to secure 
the remaining articles. Another day was spent in 
gathering together the wreckage that had been thrown 
on the island. This consisted principally of the cargo 
of cork, mill work, shingles, etc., that had occupied the 
lower hold of the brig. 

On the evening of the day when all this work had 
been finished, while they were sitting together after 
supper, Harold asked the captain : 

‘‘ What shall we do next ? ” 

“The next thing will be to make a thorough ex- 
ploration of our island,” was the reply. “ Though we 
have now been on it for a week we know almost noth- 
ing about it. Of course, we must build a house for 
shelter, as well as a place in which to store our goods. 
Now, it would be foolish to start building until we 
know what part of the island will be most suitable for 
the purpose. I think, therefore, that the next thing to 
do, Hiram,” he said, turning toward the boatswain, 
“ would be to repair the boat so as to be able to circum- 
navigate the island.” 

“Circumnavigate the island. Uncle Arthur!” ex- 
62 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


claimed Harold in a laughing tone. “ I thought cir- 
cumnavigation meant to sail around. We’ll row 
around the island, won’t we?” 

‘‘ Yes,” said Charley laughing, “ we’ll certainly row 
around the island, won’t we? ” 

“ Now, boys,” said the captain good-naturedly, 
“ don’t be so sure you’re right. Unless I am mistaken, 
Hiram will fit a small mast on the boat, so that when 
the wind is favorable we can sail around the island. 
You can rig up a mast, Hiram, can’t you? ” he con- 
tinued. 

I’ve been calculating to do that wery thing,” re- 
plied Hiram. It’s true we ain’t got no better stuff to 
make the sails of than the wariegated blankets, like 
them we used fer our overcoats, but they’ll do fer a 
cat-rig.” 

“ Then we’ll circum-row-navigate the island,” said 
Charley, whispering to Harold. 

“ We’ll spend to-morrow in helping Hiram prepare 
the boat and rig up some kind of mast and sail,” said 
the captain. 

“ Captain,” asked Jack, ‘‘ do you think we’ll be gone 
much longer than a day? ” 

“ Yes, Jack,” was the reply. ‘‘ We wish to do this 
work thoroughly. Besides, it is more than likely that, 
when the breakers will permit, we’ll land on different 
parts of the coast and examine the interior of the 
island, although I intend afterward to walk completely 
around the land of the island, both on the seacoast 
as well as on the shores of the lagoon. We’ll there- 

63 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


fore take plenty of food, as well as such other things as 
we may need during our absence.” 

“ O Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold, '' won’t you 
let us take Rompey with us ? ” 

Rompey, who was almost invariably where Charley 
and Harold were, acted as if he understood what the 
lad was saying ; for he looked earnestly at the captain, 
began wagging his tail, and uttering a succession of 
low, peculiar barks, as if he was trying to say : 

“ Please let me go, I’ll be a good dog and not give 
you any trouble.” 

As we have already pointed out in Five Months 
on a Derelict ” many years ago nearly everybody be- 
lieved that animals are entirely devoid of reasoning 
powers ; that all they do is the result of what is called 
instinct. Now, however, nearly all who have carefully 
observed the actions of animals are convinced that 
while there is no doubt that much of what they do is 
the result of instinct, yet many of their actions are as 
much the result of reasoning as in the case of human 
beings. They had frequently discussed this question, 
and had come to the conclusion from the many intelli- 
gent actions of both Rompey and Satan that they un- 
doubtedly possessed marked reasoning powers. 

When, therefore, the captain, in answer to Harold’s 
question, said : 

“ Certainly, Harold, we’ll take Rompey along with 
us. I am sure he will behave himself and not be in 
the way,” the animal acted as though he understood 
what was said ; for, uttering a number of joyful barks, 
64 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


he ran to the captain and, resting his paws against him, 
endeavored to lick his hands and face. 

Look,” exclaimed Hiram, thet thar animal sar- 
tinly onderstands what is being said.” 

“ I have no doubt whatever about that,” said the 
captain. 

“ Understands what’s said ! ” exclaimed Charley. 
‘‘Of course he does. Don’t you, Rompey?/’ he con- 
tinued, turning to the dog. 

The dog’s answer was to run to his young masters, 
first to Charley and then to Harold, with joyous bark- 
ings and shakings of his tail, as if he would say : 

“ Of course I understand I’m going with you. I 
don’t know where. I believe it is in the boat, but as 
long as you are going it’ll be all right, and we’ll have 
great times.” 

Hiram, who was never happier than when making 
or repairing something in wood, had, on the same day 
the boat had been found by Rompey, laid aside the 
pieces of wood he had selected for repairing it. 

It might be supposed that since the brig was water- 
logged none of the timber forming a part of her cargo 
would be suitable for boat-building. As every one 
knows, water-logged timber is heavier than water and 
will sink in it, but, as has been explained in “ Five 
Months on a Derelict,” all the wood in the brig had 
been subjected to a chemical process that prevented the 
entrance of water. This kept the timber in such a 
condition that it floated in water almost as well as 
would thoroughly dried and seasoned timber. 

65 


E 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


There seemed to be a promise of fair weather for 
some time to come. At any rate, the day they had 
selected for work on the boat broke bright and clear. 
They were all so much interested in this work that 
Hiram, who still insisted on taking the place of cook, 
and was up bright and early, not only to prepare break- 
fast but also to cook food for use while on the boat, did 
not find it necessary to wake his companions. They 
were up as early as he was. 

While they were helping Hiram to repair the boat, 
which they began immediately after breakfast, the cap- 
tain, turning to Hiram, said : 

What shall we do for masts, Hiram? There is 
nothing suitable among the materials we have re- 
covered from the brig. There are several pieces out of 
which we can cut a gaff and a boom, but nothing long 
enough for a mast.” 

We kin git a mast, cap’n,” said Hiram, by cuttin’ 
down one of the cocoanut trees. The wood is fust-class 
fer this use. It’s straight and tough, and I onderstand 
the people who live on islands whar there be cocoanut 
groves use the wood of the tree for oars, clubs, spears, 
and sich things.” 

Then,” said the captain to Hiram, while you and 
Jack are working at the boat. I’ll go with Harold and 
Charley, cut down one of the slim cocoanut palm trees, 
dress it into shape for the mast, and bring it here.” 

And while ye are at it,” said Hiram to the boys, 
bring back as many cocoanuts ez ye kin. They’ll 
make good eatin’ while on the boat.” 

66 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Taking with them one of the axes they had brought 
from the brig, they crossed the island toward the 
lagoon, accompanied, of course, by Rompey. As they 
were leaving, Satan, who had been by no means pleased 
at the work in which her companions had been almost 
constantly engaged since reaching the island, and see- 
ing that Rompey was going with them, flew near them 
screaming : 

‘‘ Another piece here ! 

Reaching the central part of the encircling reef, at a 
point midway between the ocean and the lagoon, they 
selected a tree, the diameter and height of which were 
about what they required, and cutting it down, selected 
the ripest of the nuts with which it was loaded. It did 
not take long to dress the tree roughly into the di- 
mensions of the mast. 

As they were about to return, and were arranging 
to carry the tree and selected cocoanuts along with 
them, the captain said: 

“ Wait a moment, there’s something else we’ll take 
back with us,” and picking up the axe he cut out the 
tender green bud at the top of the tree that was almost 
about to bloom. 

What can we do with that. Uncle Arthur ? ” ex- 
claimed Harold. 

Why, what should we do with a cabbage but boil 
and eat it ? ” replied the captain. 

Why, you don’t mean to call that thing a cabbage, 
do you ? ” inquired Harold incredulously. 

Wait until Hiram cooks it and then tell me what 

67 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


you call it,” was the reply. ‘‘ But let’s be getting back. 
There is much work to be done if we are to get off 
to-morrow in the boat.” 

The captain picked up one end of the wood for the 
mast and placed it on his shoulder, the two boys each 
placing the other end on one of their shoulders, and 
all taking as many of the cocoanuts as they could 
stuff inside their coats or jackets, they soon reached the 
place where Hiram and Jack were at work on the 
boat. 

When Jack looked up and saw the green mass the 
captain was carrying, he exclaimed: 

What is that, captain ? ” 

“ Why, Jack,” said Harold, looking toward Charley 
and winking, don’t you know what that is ? I am 
surprised that a boy so big as to think it takes two boys 
my size to equal him should be so ignorant as not to 
know that that is a cabbage.” 

A cabbage! ” exclaimed Jack. I hope you don’t 
believe I’ll swallow all you kids tell me ” ; and then 
turning to Hiram, he asked : “ Hiram, did you hear 
Harold say that thing the captain has is a cabbage? 
What do you say to that ? ” 

** I guess I’ll hev to say the same thing,” said Hiram, 
enjoying Jack’s surprise. ‘‘ You jest wait till I bile it 
fer dinner to-day. I calculate that when ye begin to 
eat it, ye’ll say it suttenly tastes like a cabbage, so I 
reckon it kain’t be much of a mistake to call it a cab- 
bage.” 

“ What is it, captain? ” inquired Jack. 

68 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ It’s the tender green bud that grows at the top of 
a cocoanut palm tree, from which the blossoms appear 
before the young cocoanuts are formed.” 

Gracious, Jack,” said Harold in a teasing manner, 

didn’t you know that? ” 

How long have you known it, Harold ? ” asked 
Jack good-naturedly. 

‘‘ For at least ten minutes,” said Harold laughing. 

Cap’n,” said Hiram, ‘‘ while Jack and I be finish- 
ing the repairs to the boat, I wish ye and the two boys 
would git to work in making a sail. Ye’ll find some 
sail needles and strong twine in one of the corners 
of my tool-chest.” 

Selecting some of the highly colored blankets they 
cut them into the desired shapes and, sewing them to- 
gether, made a sail which, as Hiram remarked, was 
‘‘ sarvisable though wery stunnin’.” 

It took much longer to repair the boat and get it 
ready for use than Hiram had calculated. Indeed, it 
was late at night before everything was completed and 
the food and other stuff packed; for, considerable 
work was necessary in forming the boom and gaff, and 
in securely attaching them to the mast. 

Next morning, after a good breakfast, seeing that 
everything they intended to take had been placed in 
the boat, they pushed off toward the ocean. The wind 
being in the proper quarter, they hoisted the sail and 
started toward the east on their voyage of discovery 
around the island. It was a beautiful day, and the 
bright sunshine falling on the highly colored sail, with 
69 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


its alternate stripes of green, blue, yellow, and red, 
gave to the boat such a picturesque appearance that, 
taken in connection with their clothes, which by this 
time were far from new, and their dark, sun-bronzed 
faces, might have caused a stranger seeing them to 
conclude that they were not English-speaking people, 
but some of the primitive inhabitants of the island on 
a predatory expedition. 


70 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER VI 

Circumnavigation of the Island ■ 

They had no intention of permitting Satan to accom- 
pany them, but the next morning after the boat had 
been pushed off from the shore and had gone a little 
distance from the island, the bird, as if purposely 
waiting until it would give them some trouble to go 
back with it, flew toward the boat calling out : 

“ Another piece here, thank you,” and finally rested 
on Jack’s shoulder. 

‘‘ Shall I send Satan back, captain ? ” inquired Jack 
smiling. 

** No, Jack,” was the reply, '' I guess we’ll let her go 
with us. We do not expect ever to be far from the 
shore, so if she gets tired she can easily fly to the 
land.” 

The tide was running down when they started, but 
there was still a well-marked line of breakers off the 
coast for the most part. They, therefore, generally 
kept off the island in the deep water beyond the shore 
platform. In a few places, however, the breakers were 
either lacking or very low, so that they were able safely 
to take the boat near the edge of the shore platform. 
Here the waters were clear enough to permit them to 
see small fragments of coral rock, ground-up shells, 
and coral sand that were being washed toward the 

71 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


beach. The captain called their attention to this, say- 
ing : 

‘‘ Keep your eyes open, boys. While on this voyage 
you’ll see many things that will aid you in understand- 
ing how coral islands are formed. The materials you 
see being washed up over the shore platform by the 
waves furnish the limestone from which the island is 
built. They are thus being added, little by little, to 
the mass of limestone that forms the island.” 

‘‘ I thought coral islands were built by coral insects. 
Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold. 

‘‘ That’s a very common mistake that I believe the 
poets are responsible for, Harold,” replied the captain. 
“ Coral polyps do not build coral islands. They simply 
grow in certain parts of the ocean, and while growing 
take from the waters, along with their food, limey mat- 
ters that form bones just as you or I do. But they no 
more live for the purpose of forming limestone than we 
do for forming bones. Then again, they have nothing 
whatever to do with forming the island. That is done 
by the waves. It is the ocean, and not the coral polyp, 
that is the architect of a coral island.” 

Captain,” inquired Jack, is it not a great mistake 
to call coral polyps coral insects ? ” 

Yes, Jack,” replied the captain laughing. It is a 
horrible mistake. A mistake of a whole sub-kingdom ; 
for coral polyps are radiates, while insects are articu- 
lates.” 

In this way they rowed slowly along the island, 
keeping away from the coast when the breakers were 
72 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


threatening, and approaching it when they were absent 
or low. When, however, the tide was at the ebb, and 
the shore platform was completely uncovered, they 
were able to hug the shore more closely. At one place, 
where they could bring the boat to the edge of the 
platform, they could distinctly see the higher land be- 
yond the top of the beach. Here there was an absence 
of the vegetation that covered the island immediately 
beyond the beach in all the parts of the island they had 
so far seen. This was due to the absence of the coral 
sand in which the vegetation grew. In its place the 
surface was covered with huge angular fragments of 
black-looking rocks confusedly piled together like a 
vast field of ruins. These fragments were of various 
sizes, varying from a few cubic feet to a hundred cubic 
feet or over. 

“ What kind of rocks are those, captain ? ” inquired 
Jack. 

Coral rocks or limestone,” was the reply. 

Coral rock! ” exclaimed Harold in astonishment. 

Why, Uncle Arthur, they are almost black in color.” 

Yes,” said Jack, they are not unlike some speci- 
mens of volcanic rocks that I remember seeing in the 
British Museum in London.” 

They're limestone for all that,” said the captain. 

Hiram, we’ll land the boat at the edge of the shore 
platform where the breakers are almost absent. I want 
to show something to the boys.” 

When they landed, the captain and the boys got out 
of the boat, the captain taking a hammer with him. 

73 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Stay and watch the boat, Hiram,” he said to the 
boatswain, we’ll only be gone a short time.” 

When they reached the pile of rough coral rocks the 
captain said : 

Be careful how you climb over these rocks, boys. 
It would be easy to break a bone should you fall be- 
tween them.” Then stopping near a large rock, he 
struck a portion of its edge a sharp blow with the 
hammer. That the stone was hard could be told from 
the metallic sound produced by the blow. Where a 
small piece was broken off the edge showed that the 
mass within was of a pure white color. 

Look carefully at this, boys,” said the captain. 
“ Some other time I’ll explain how coral islands are 
formed. You have seen enough to know that it is 
the waves that bring the broken fragments of dead 
coral from the waters and pile them up on the beach, 
as well as in the higher lands above the beach.” 

‘‘ Where did these materials come from? ” inquired 
Jack. Of course, I see they come from the ocean out- 
side the coral platform, but do they come from the deep 
or from the shallower parts of the ocean ? ” 

From the shallower parts only,” was the reply. 

As they stood looking at the confused pile of angu- 
lar fragments of coral rock, they could see that except 
at the bottom of the mass there was no sand or soil 
whatever. 

I suppose you understand, boys,” said the captain, 
that these heavy rocks could only have been brought 
here by the strong waves that accompany big storms. 

74 


I WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 

ij After a while sand, brought by the waves and the 
I winds, will fill the spaces between the stones.’' 

Charley, who had been attentively listening to the 
I conversation, and had then gone a short distance ahead 
of his companions, came running back to them and said 
; to Jack: 

! Jack, if you come a hundred yards farther on you 
can see where the sand has commenced to collect in 
I the spaces between the rocks.” 

I “ Yes,” said the captain, after examining this place; 
i ‘‘ and still farther on we can see where the sand has col- 
! lected in still larger quantities, and cocoanut trees are 
I growing in it.” 

‘‘ But, captain,” said Jack, how are the solid rocks 
I formed? How are the small particles of coral sand 
^ and fragments of dead coral changed into the hard 
limestone of the coral platform? The coral animals 
cannot form masses of rock like these, can they ? ” 

No, Jack,” was the reply; and then addressing the 
boys he added: You can make up your minds that 

the coral animals have nothing whatever to do with the 
i formation of coral rock. They simply live and die, 

1 leaving the waves and the waters to do the rest with 
i their dead skeletons. You will find in the shallow 
I waters at the edge of the shore platform, nearest the 
ocean, great numbers of different forms of coral 
animals. By the action of the waves, aided by frag- 
ments of rocks, the remains of these animals are 
ground into coral sand, or broken into small fragments, 
which are spread by the waters in fairly even layers 
i 75 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


over the regions where the corals are growing. Now 
the water, resting on this finely ground coral, dissolves 
out a part of the limestone, and this acting as a weak 
mortar, gradually, but firmly, cements or binds the 
mass into a solid rock, thus forming a compact lime- 
stone.” 

“ Are the sand beaches ever hardened in this man- 
ner ? ” inquired Jack. 

Yes,” was the reply, “ sands are solidified by a 
similar cementing action of the waters. Generally, 
however, the solidification is not marked except near 
the top. Beach sandrock consists of more or less 
regular layers, inclined or sloping toward the ocean. 
Sandrock of this character may consist either of fine 
sand only, or of sand mixed with small fragments of 
limestone that have been worn into smooth, rounded 
pebbles. In some cases the mass is so completely bound 
together by the cementing waters that it is nearly as 
compact as ordinary limestone. 

“ A somewhat similar, though less compacted rock,” 
j continued the captain, is formed on the piles of drift 
sand that are heaped together by the winds. Here it 
is the rain-water that dissolves the limestone and thus 
forms the cementing mortar.” 

“ Won’t you tell us something else about the forma- 
tion of coral islands, captain? ” inquired Jack. 

“ Not now, Jack,” was the captain’s reply. ‘‘ What 
I have told you must do for the present. I think, how- 
ever, before we return to Jackson Harbor, or at least 
after we have thoroughly explored the island itself, 
76 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


you’ll know much more about how coral islands are 
formed, especially the particular island on which we 
have been cast. But we must hurry back to Hiram who 
will wonder what has become of us.” 

Entering the boat and keeping it near the water off 
the edge of the shore platform, the captain, turning to 
the boys, pointed to a number of different colored coral 
polyps that they could see growing on the bottom in the 
neighborhood of the edge of the platform. These 
polyps closely resembled the China asters and chrysan- 
themums they had already seen on the edge of the 
lagoon. Calling their attention to some of these pecu- 
liarities, the captain said : 

These are the animals that collect from the water 
the lime out of which the limestone of the island is 
formed. They belong to a class of animals known as 
the actinia. The colored rays resembling the petals 
of flowers are called tentacles, and correspond to arms 
or legs. In this particular species of animal, as you 
can see, the tentacles surround a central opening. Look 
at this specimen,” he continued, pointing to a particu- 
lar polyp, that was cylindrical in shape and over a foot 
in diameter. It is only the upper part of this cylinder 
of limestone that is living; the lower parts are quite 
dead, and the intermediate parts only partially alive. 
As the animal grows the cylinder of limestone in- 
creases in height, so that at length the living part of 
the animal is at a fairly considerable distance from the 
lower end.” 

The boys were much interested in watching the 

77 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


movements of the tentacles of the coral polyp to which 
the captain had called their attention. They were 
arranged around a central opening that looked not 
unlike a mouth. 

“ What do you call that opening, captain? inquired 
.Charley. See the arms are moving just as if they 
were trying to cause the water to pass into it.” 

That’s the mouth of the animal, Charley,” replied 
the captain. “ The animal is feeding, and is causing 
the water of the ocean to flow through its body. When 
it has taken from the waters what it needs, you can 
see that what is left is thrown out of the same open- 
ing.” 

“ And is it from such masses of coral limestone that 
the island is built by the waters? ” inquired Jack. 

Yes, Jack, it is from this limestone as well as from 
various other growths, some of which resemble the 
polyp we are looking at, and from others that are en- 
tirely different in appearance, that all the materials are 
obtained that are employed by the waves in building 
the coral island.” 

As they continued rowing and sailing around the 
island, the captain said to his companions : 

‘‘ For convenience suppose we give names to the dif- 
ferent parts of the island. What shall we call the 
coral island on which we have been cast ? ” 

‘‘Let’s call it Harding Island from our captain,” 
suggested Jack. 

The vote was in favor of this name and was unani- 
mous, except the captain, who did not vote. 

78 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Wall, cap’n,” said Hiram laughing, ‘‘ I reckon ye’ll 
hev to agree, fer the wote was unanimous exceptin’ 
you, who didn’t wote.” 

“ All right,” said the captain, I’m obliged to you 
for the honor,” and then continuing he said : I sup- 
pose we all agree to call the reef on which the brig was 
wrecked. Breaker Reef. What name shall we give 
to the sand beach on which we landed at the end of 
our long swim ? ” he asked. 

Suppose we call it Landing Beach,” suggested 
Charley, which was agreed to. 

Landing Beach was situated on the southern coast 
of the island, about seven miles from its southwestern 
extremity. When they started to explore the island 
they had proceeded toward the east. 

“ And what shall we call the broken pile of lime- 
stone rocks we saw on the part of the island where sand 
had not yet been washed in the spaces between them ? ” 
asked Jack. 

Let us call them the Clinker Coral Fields,” said the 
captain. 

They continued toward the east for several hours, 
occasionally approaching the coral platform, though 
for the most part keeping in the deeper waters off the 
island. 

On one occasion, while sailing at some distance from 
the beach, they noticed a marked change in its ap- 
pearance. Approaching the edge of the shore plat- 
form, in order the better to examine the distant beach, 
they saw that it was formed not of fine sand, but of 
79 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


large pebbles or round boulders of coral rock. The 
captain explained that this difference was due to the 
greater strength of the waves at this part; for the 
water beat so hard against the beach that the smaller 
particles of sand could find no lodgment and were 
washed over the top of the beach on the island. 

‘‘ Let’s call this part of the coast Boulder Beach ? ” 
suggested Charley, which was agreed to. 

They were now nearing the extreme southeastern 
portion of the island. The tide was still low, so the 
entire shore platform was exposed. While this, of 
course, prevented them from approaching the beach 
in the boat, it gave them the opportunity of seeing at a 
glance the shape of the platform. It was nearly flat, 
but rose gently toward the beach. Its width varied 
from two hundred to three hundred feet, although in 
some places it was over four hundred feet wide. 

As already stated, the name shore platform is given 
to the part of the coral island that forms a half-sub- 
merged reef connecting the ocean with the reef that 
encircles the lagoon. Over the greater part of the 
shore platform the waters are so shallow that the reef 
is completely bare at low tide. There are, however, 
portions that are always covered with shallow water, 
the depth of which varies from an inch to about a foot. 

On being asked by Jack how this portion of the 
island had been formed, the captain answered that 
while it was, perhaps, not quite understood, yet it was 
probably due to the action of the waves. 

‘‘ Formations similar to those of the shore platform 
8o 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


also occur on islands formed of sandstone,” he said. 

In some sandstone islands, flat reaches of sandstone 
rock, covered by shallow water at high tide, and high 
and dry at low tide, extend off an island at the base of 
sandstone cliffs that are perhaps a hundred feet or- 
more in height. That these level tracts were formerly 
a part of the cliffs they adjoin, can be seen by the fact 
that at low tide they are continuous with the rock of 
the cliffs. These tracts vary in width from fifty to a 
hundred yards.” 

After a few moments of silence. Jack, who had been 
thinking about what the captain had told them, said : 

“ Captain, do you suppose that the platform of coral 
rock around Breaker Reef was formed in the same 
manner as the shore platform around Harding 
Island ? ” 

I have been giving much thought to that forma- 
tion, Jack,” replied the captain, “ and have come to 
the conclusion that it has perhaps been formed in 
the same manner as the shore platform. I believe that 
Breaker Reef is a small island that is entirely separate 
from Harding Island. Indeed,” he continued musing- 
ly, as if talking to himself instead of to Jack, ‘‘ there 
are some things about Harding Island that I have 
much difficulty in understanding. There are not only 
evidences of subsidence about this island, as there are 
about all atolls, but there also appear to be evidences 
of elevation.” 

I suppose, sir,” said Jack, that is too much for 
any of us to understand ? ” 

F 8i 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Perhaps it is just now, Jack,” was the reply, but 
I hope before long you will all be able to understand 
such matters thoroughly.” 

‘‘ Does any one know, sir,” inquired Jack, “ how 
deep the mass of limestone rock is on the edge of the 
shore platform, or what I suppose is the same thing, 
how deep is the mass of limestone that forms Harding 
Island ? ” 

“ That question,” replied the captain, is easily an- 
swered. Without attempting to explain just how 
it has been discovered, I may say there is no doubt that 
this mass of limestone extends downward for a dis- 
tance of several thousand feet.” 

Do you mean,” inquired Jack, “ that the coral rock 
is several thousand feet thick ? ” 

‘‘ That’s just what I mean,” replied the captain. 

“ Then, of course,” said Jack, the coral polyps are 
able to live in water at least several thousand feet 
deep. Do you suppose, sir, that they are living on 
the entire floor of the ocean, and are thus tending to 
make the water of the ocean shallower ? ” 

Not at all, Jack,” was the reply. ‘‘ Some time ago 
^it was generally believed that the coral polyps could 
'’live at any depth, and were slowly but surely raising 
the floor of the ocean and thus making it shallower. 
Now, however, it can be proved that the coral polyps 
are unable to live in water deeper than about one 
hundred and fifty feet.” 

‘‘ I don’t understand how that can be, sir,” said Jack, 
“ but I will probably be able to understand it after 
82 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


you have shown us more about the peculiarities of the 
growth of Harding Island.” 

“I’ll not attempt, Jack, just now to explain this 
matter. I can do it better after a while. Now, how- 
ever, I will put a conundrum to you, which, although 
at first sight, may seem to make it more difficult to 
understand the formation of a coral island, in reality, 
throws no little light on the matter. Listen to the 
conundrum. All fully developed coral islands have the 
same shape as Harding Island ; that is, they consist of 
a comparatively narrow ring of coral rock surrounding 
a body of water called a lagoon. And although toward 
the middle of the lagoon the water is often many hun- 
dred feet deep, yet this part was at one time the highest 
point of land, the top of a hill or, indeed, most prob- 
ably, the top of a mountain, on an island of ordinary 
formation.” 

Charley, who had been carefully listening to what 
the captain had been saying, and had been making a 
sketch in a note-book he always carried with him, 
showed it to the captain, saying: 

“ Something like this, sir? ” 

“ Yes,” said the captain in surprise. “ Why, you 
have marked talent for drawing, Charley. Have you 
ever taken lessons in sketching ? ” 

“ I have taken a few lessons,” said Charley. “ I 
like to draw.” 

“ O Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold, “ Charley 
does lots of drawing, and does it well too. You ought 
to see some of his sketches.” 

83 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ I say, Jack,’' said Charley, as if to prevent any- 
thing more being said about his ability to draw, which 
was indeed quite remarkable, ** that’s a pretty hard 
conundrum the captain has given you to solve,” and 
then turning to the captain, he added : “ If I didn’t 
know you as well as I think I do, captain, I should sus- 
pect you were kidding Jack, but I believe you are in 
earnest, are you not? ” 

“ I am, Charley,” replied the captain. 

‘‘ Then, Jack,” said Charley, turning to him, I’m 
going to run you a race to see which of us is able first 
to answer the conundrum.” 

‘‘ All right, Charley,” said Jack good-naturedly. ‘‘ If 
you beat me, I will be glad to congratulate you. But 
let me tell you you’ll have to get busy if you want to 
win.” 

When they reached the extreme southeastern part 
of the island, they found both the shore platform as 
well as the land of the encircling reef much broader 
than in other parts. Moreover, the land part of the 
island was much higher than at Landing Beach. 

Shortly before sunset they found something that 
appeared greatly to please both the captain and Hiram. 
This was a part of the coast where the shore platform 
was absent, so that it was possible for them, although 
the tide was now low, to bring the boat up to the edge 
of the sand beach, into a species of harbor. It is true 
it was so small a harbor that it no more than permitted 
the entrance of the boat. It possessed, however, this 
great advantage, it permitted them to pass the night on 

84 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the beach which they could not otherwise have done; 
since, if they anchored their boat at low tide at the 
edge of the shore platform, and then walked across the 
platform to the island, they would be unable to regain 
the boat until the next low tide, while, on the other 
hand, if they landed on the beach during high tide, they 
would be compelled to wait until the tide was again high 
before leaving. Moreover, in most places the breakers 
would have rendered it unsafe to bring the boat, dur- 
ing certain conditions of the tide, to the edge of the 
shore platform. 

The captain proposed to call this harbor, Hiram 
Harbor, after their boatswain. 

That his name should be given to a part of the 
island appeared greatly to tickle Hiram. 

Wall,’' he exclaimed, that suttenly makes me feel 
proud like. To think that Hiram Higgenbotham 
should hev a part of a bloomin’ island like this named 
arter him. Ef my dear mother was still livin’ she 
sartinly would hev been proud when she lamed that 
thar was a part of the world named arter her son.” 

The shore platform was wider and the wooded land 
broader and higher at Hiram Harbor than at the rest 
of the island. Moreover, this broader and higher 
portion extended as far to the north as they could see. 


85 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER VII 

Parker Cliffs. A View of Harding Island 
FROM Charles Hill 

They were up so early next morning that when 
through breakfast it was only three-quarters of an hour 
after sunrise. They had done this at the request of 
the captain, who wished carefully to examine the part 
of the island lying between the break in the shore plat- 
form and the lagoon. 

If there is an entrance here to the lagoon,” said 
the captain to his companions, “ this part of the coast 
will form an excellent site for our house.” 

It was now nearly high tide. If there was any con- 
nection between the ocean and the lagoon, the water 
should now be flowing toward it from the ocean. To 
their great disappointment, however, it soon became 
evident that no such connection existed. Not that 
there were no signs of an old channel. On the con- 
trary, they could clearly trace what had once been a 
channel by its rounded boulders of limestone. But this 
channel was now high and dry, and so far from in- 
clining gently down toward the lagoon, was inclined 
upward by a steep rise. They followed the old channel 
until the highest portion of the encircling reef was 
reached, which was here at least fifty feet above the 
level of the ocean. From this point it extended some- 
86 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


what sharply down toward the lagoon. Here the 
highest point of land instead of being midway between 
the ocean and the lagoon, as in nearly all places they 
had yet examined, was much nearer the latter body of 
water. 

As of course you see,” said the captain to his 
companions, here is positive evidence that Harding 
Island has undergone an elevation. We will probably 
find still higher land farther on, but let’s continue to 
follow the old channel till it reaches the lagoon.” 

As is well known, cocoanut palms generally attain 
their most vigorous growth near the water’s edge. 
There were rows of cocoanut palms on each side of 
the old channel. The idea suggested itself to Jack that 
possibly the trees from which these originally sprung 
commenced to grow along the stream of water that 
long ago connected the ocean with the lagoon. 

“ Captain,” Inquired Jack, " do you think these trees 
originally grew on the sides of the channel when it 
was always filled with water? ” 

Jack’s observation appeared greatly to please the 
captain. 

‘‘ I think so, Jack,” was the reply, although there 
have probably been thousands of years since the bed 
of the channel was suddenly raised. It is certainly 
probable that the original trees from which these 
sprung actually began to grow on the sides of the old 
channel as you suggest.” 

When they reached the shores of the lagoon they 
could still trace the old channel extending down toward 
87 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


its waters. But it did not reach the lagoon. On the 
contrary, it stopped at the portion of the shore plat- 
form that had been elevated with the rest of the island, 
thus leaving the old sand beach on the margin of 
the lagoon high and dry, while between the upper por- 
tion of the sand beach and the lagoon there was a con- 
siderable length of the inner shore platform that sloped 
abruptly to the waters of the lagoon. 

Charley, as well as Jack, was giving much thought 
to the captain’s conundrum as to the middle of the 
lagoon having at one time been the highest point of 
of an ordinary island. When the captain again spoke 
of evidences of elevation, turning to Jack, Charley 
said : 

“ Jack, are you still puzzling over the captain’s 
conundrum ? ” 

Yes, Charley,” was the reply, but I must confess 
that I’m still far from being able to solve it.” 

Then, Jack,” said Charley, see if I cannot help 
you a little. Of course, you must see that if the bottom 
of the lagoon in its deepest part was once the highest 
point of land, say the mountain-peak of a volcanic 
island, then, of course, the coral island must have been 
formed by the gradual sinking of this land. Don’t you 
remember, the captain is only surprised when our island 
shows evidence of rising. If we hope to solve the 
conundrum we must keep the idea of a gradually sink- 
ing island in mind.” 

The captain, who heard Charley’s remark, was both 
surprised and pleased at the thought the young lad 
88 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


had evidently been giving to the manner in which 
Harding Island had been formed. 

“ That’s capital, Charley,” said the captain. Look 
out. Jack, or Charley will guess the conundrum before 
you.” 

All right, captain,” replied Jack good-naturedly. 

If Charley beats me I’ll promise not to be jealous, but 
Charley has certainly given me a point that I think will 
help me no little in solving the riddle.” 

The wider portion of the beach, adjoining Boulder 
Beach, extended in an almost due north and south 
direction to Hiram Harbor. As they sailed or rowed 
for many miles along this portion of the coast the 
evidences of elevation became more marked. Here 
the old shore platform had not only been raised com- 
pletely out of the water, thus markedly increasing the 
width of the island, but portions of its slopes could 
now be seen as almost precipitous walls reaching more 
than two hundred feet above the level of the ocean. 

“ Hiram,” said the captain, let’s take the boat 
some little distance out from shore where we can get 
a better view of the island. Here the cliffs prevent us 
from seeing beyond them.” 

When the boat had been taken three-quarters of a 
mile from the shore they could distinctly see back of 
the cliffs, the summits of two hills that probably 
reached three hundred feet or more above the level of 
the ocean. 

“ The elevation here is much greater than I had ex- 
pected,” said the captain. 

89 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


The cliffs, as well as the surface of the island gen- 
erally, presented the same blackish color, as had the 
angular masses of limestone at Clinker Fields, or more 
correctly, this was the color of the bare rocky surface ; 
for, where there was a sufficient covering of soil there 
could be seen the rich green verdure of the cocoanut* 
palms and other vegetation of the tropical Pacific. 

“ Do you suppose this part of the island is of coral 
formation, captain?” inquired Jack. 

“ I think so, Jack,” was the reply. Indeed, it must 
be, if I am right in supposing that what we see is the 
result of elevation.” 

Is the island still rising, or is it sinking now ? ” in- 
quired Jack. 

I’m almost sure,” replied the captain, ‘‘ that Hard- 
ing Island is now sinking, else how can the coral on 
the south and southwest coast be living. I think you 
will find little or no living coral in the waters off the 
coasts of the cliffs, for here the water is too deep,” 

‘‘ Look out. Jack,” exclaimed Charley, ‘‘ I think I’m 
beginning to see the solution of the captain’s conun- 
drum.” 

Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold, who had been 
looking at the walls of the cliffs, what makes those 
straight marks on the face of the cliffs ? See, there’s 
water dripping down them.” 

“ They are caused,” said the captain, '' by the rain- 
water flowing down the face of the cliffs. The water 
melts or dissolves the limestone of the cliffs as it would 
if they were formed of sugar, only, of course, it dis- 
90 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


solves it much more slowly.” And then turning to 
Jack, he added, “ This proves that the cliffs are of 
limestone. I have no doubt we will find great caverns 
or grottoes both in the limestone of the cliffs and in 
that of the hills which lie between them.” 

Let us call these cliffs Parker Cliffs from the name 
of the commander of the Ketrel,” suggested Jack, 
which was agreed to. 

“ Since we are exploring the island,” continued the 
captain, we must try to find a landing-place where we 
can reach the top of the cliffs. If we then climb to the 
summit of one of the hills we can see at a glance the 
different features of Harding Island, as well as the 
ocean in its neighborhood.” 

It was by no means easy to find a place where the 
cliffs could be readily scaled. However, by continuing 
farther along the coast toward the northeast, they at 
last discovered a place, midway between the two hills, 
where the cliffs appeared to have been partially eaten 
away by a stream of water that descended to the ocean. 
Here, before flowing into the ocean, the stream made a 
sharp bend thus forming a species of breakwater that 
afforded another harbor large enough to shield the 
boat from the breakers. It required careful handling 
of the boat, however, to prevent it from being in- 
jured while being taken into the harbor. But they 
finally succeeded in doing this safely, and anchoring 
the boat started up the almost dry channel of the 
stream toward the top of the cliffs. The incline was 
quite steep. The eroded channel had formed a nar- 

91 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


row defile through short ridges of rocks, the tops of 
which were for the greater part far above their heads. 
Finally, emerging from these depths, they found them- 
selves in a broad valley between the opposite slopes 
of the two hills. Climbing the hill to their left, which 
was somewhat higher than the other, they soon reached 
the top. 

They had a splendid view from its summit. The 
entire island lay in panoramic display below them. 
They could distinctly see that the island had the shape 
of an irregular ring of comparatively small breadth 
surrounding a lagoon or lake. It was now low tide, so 
that the width of the encircling reef was greatly in- 
creased by the uncovered shore platform. 

It was indeed a beautiful sight. The island lay before 
them like a gem in the deep blue waters of the Pacific. 
A line of white foam, formed by the breakers, extended 
almost continuously along the eastern coast of the 
island. Beyond this was the still whiter continuous 
line of the coral sand beach, while near the sand beach 
was an almost continuous stretch of verdure, the 
greater part of which, as far as they could see, con- 
sisted of cocoanut palms. Toward the middle of the 
lagoon the water was almost as blue as that of the 
outside ocean, but near the shore it presented yellowish 
and greenish tints, so that the panoramic scene was 
not lacking in glorious color contrasts. 

They could now distinctly see in the lagoon, extend- 
ing in a nearly straight line from the southeast to 
northwest, in the general direction of the greatest 
92 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


length of Harding Island, four smaller islands, the two 
largest of which, closely resembling each other, were 
nearer the eastern half of the lagoon, the others, which 
were much smaller, being situated near them and im- 
mediately to the west. 

Th6 captain closely examined the islands with his 
glasses. He then handed them to Hiram, by whom 
they were subsequently passed to each of the boys. 

Examined in this way it could be seen that the four 
islands in the lagoon were curious reproductions in 
miniature of Harding Island. Each consisted of a reef 
encircling a lagoon, although in the smallest of the 
westernmost islands the lagoon appeared to have dried 
up. Moreover, in the case of all the islands they could 
see the white coral beach together with a ring of vege- 
tation on the encircling reef. On all of these islands, 
as in Harding Island, the vegetation apparently con- 
sisted principally of cocoanut palms. 

“ Let’s name the different hills. Uncle Arthur,” sug- 
gested Harold. 

“ And the islands also,” said Jack. 

“ All right,” said the captain. ‘‘ We’ll begin with 
the hills. What do you say to Charles Hill and Harold 
Hill?” 

“ That suits me,” said Charley laughing. 

And me too,” added Harold. 

And now for the names of the islands,” suggested 
the captain. “ Charley, suppose you name the two 
largest islands.” 

‘‘ Well, I’ll name them the Twin Islands, they look 

93 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


so much alike. We’ll call the westernmost island, 
Twin Island No. i, and the other Twin Island No. 2.” 

“ Now, Harold,” said the captain, ‘‘ name the two 
small islands.” 

“ Let’s call them Rompey and Satan,” said Harold. 

“ Better call them the Little Kids,” said Jack laugh- 
ing. 

“ You can’t do it,” said Charley good-naturedly, 
‘‘ since the highest points of land on Harding Island 
have already been named after Harold and myself.” 

“ I guess we’ll call them Rompey and Satan,” said 
the captain laughing. ‘‘ The one nearer Twin Island 
No. I will be Rompey and the other Satan.” 

‘‘ If we can find an entrance to the lagoon from the 
ocean and so get the boat on the lagoon, we must make 
an exploration of these islands some time,” said Jack. 

‘‘ Cap’n,” said Hiram, “ kin ye see enything through 
the glasses thet looks ez ef there be a break through 
the reef to the lagoon ? ” 

The captain again made an examination when, hand- 
ing the glasses to Hiram, he said : 

“ I can see no break. Toward the southeastern end 
.of the island, however, there is a place where, as we 
have already seen, the waves occasionally break over 
the land and run down into the lagoon. As we know, it 
is not possible to get the boat through at this place.” 

Hiram made a much longer and more careful ex- 
amination of the reef through the glasses, and said : 

‘‘ No, cap’n, I kain’t see enything. I guess there 
ain’t no break through the reef.” 

94 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Then/’ said Harold in a disappointed tone, we 
won’t be able to explore the islands in the lagoon.” 

“ I ain’t so sure of that, Master Harold,” said 
Hiram. Ef I kin find the time I kin easily build a boat 
that we’ll keep on the lagoon. It may be worth our 
while to do this. Don’t you think so, cap’n ? ” he 
said, turning to that gentleman. 

“ By all means, Hiram, we’ll build the boat,” was 
the reply. Think of the many advantages we would 
have from a boat on the lagoon. It would pay us to 
build it if it was only to save the time in passing across 
the lagoon from one part of the island to another, in- 
stead of walking around by the encircling reef.” 

Then we’ll explore the lagoon islands yet,” said 
Harold gleefully. 

‘‘ Yes,” said the captain, ** but now there is still a 
very important thing to do. Let’s see if there are any 
other islands in the ocean near Harding Island.” 

The captain began to look through the glasses in all 
directions. But Harding Island was evidently a lonely 
island in the Pacific. The most careful examination 
failed to disclose any other land in sight. All around 
^was water, with Harding Island lying immediately 
below the great blue dome of the heavens that rested 
everywhere on the horizon. 

During this conversation Charley had been making 
another sketch of the island. When he had completed 
it the captain said: 

“Let me see it, Charley.” 

“ It is only a rough sketch,” said Charley apolo- 

95 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


getically. ‘‘ There is so good a view here that I 
thought I had better make another sketch to take the 
place of the one already made.” 

“ It’s a capital sketch,” said the captain, examining it 
while the others leaned over his shoulders and looked 
at it with him. Suppose I mark on it the names 
we have just given to the different parts of the island? 
Then, after our return, the first opportunity you have 
you can draw a larger and more careful sketch. And 
on this we will mark any additional names we may 
agree to give to other parts of the island. 

“ Harding Island,” continued the captain, clearly 
stands alone in the ocean. There is no other island 
in its immediate neighborhood. Look for yourself, 
Hiram,” he said, handing the glasses to the boatswain. 

Let’s get back to the boat. We have now been two 
days sailing around the island. I don’t think we had 
better spend more than one additional day in getting 
back to Landing Beach.” 

‘‘ Can’t we stay here a little longer and try to find 
the limestone caverns. Uncle Arthur?” inquired 
Harold. 

'' Not now, Harold,” was the reply, we will do 
this some other day.” 

Returning through the gorge to the boat, which they 
did not reach until near sunset, they concluded to re- 
main on the island during the night. They therefore 
built a fire and got ready for supper. 

While Hiram was building the fire, the captain, tak- 
ing a fishing-line from the boat baited it with a small 
96 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


fish that had been cast up from the sea by the waves. 
Climbing to a portion of the coast facing the deep 
water near the foot of the cliffs, he threw the line into 
the fairly deep water at that point and soon succeeded 
in landing a good-sized fish that Hiram said was a 
species of bonito. 

“ Is it good to eat ? ” inquired Harold, when they 
had taken it to Hiram. 

‘‘ Jest wait till I fry it,” was the reply, and ef you 
don’t say it’s fust-class it’ll be because ye don’t know 
what fust-class eatin’ is.” 

The verdict was in Hiram’s favor. The night passed 
pleasantly and after an early breakfast they succeeded 
in getting the boat safely through the breakers, and 
proceeded on their journey toward Jackson Harbor, 
which they reached late at the end of the third day. 

There was nothing unusual in the appearance of 
the remainder of the coast, except that the entire 
western and southwestern half of the island was very 
much lower than at the eastern and northeastern half. 

As they sat eating supper that night under the 
temporary shelter they had erected at Landing Beach, 
Jack asked the captain where, as far as they had yet 
been able to see during their exploration of the island, 
was the best site for the erection of their house. 

“ As far as I now know,” said the captain, I think 
Jackson Harbor is the best place. However, we can- 
not be sure of this until we have made a careful ex- 
amination of the encircling reef itself, especially as re- 
gards its animal and plant life.” 

G 97 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER VIII 

The Cocoanut Palms and Birds of the Island 

On their return from the circumnavigation of the 
island, they spent a day in rearranging their goods, 
improving the temporary shelter they had built in order 
to preserve them from the tropical rains, in carrying 
their boat up to the highland beyond the beach in order 
to prevent its being lost during their absence, and es- 
pecially in preparing for an exploration of the en- 
circling reef of the island itself. 

“ How long do you expect to be gone, cap’n ? ” in- 
quired Hiram. 

That’s hard to say, Hiram,” replied the captain. 

We intend walking around the island, so as to ex- 
amine carefully whatever is to be found on it, especially 
its plant and animal life. We must do this in order to 
get definite knowledge of the character of the island’s 
food supplies. We must also know positively whether 
any besides ourselves are living here. From what 
we have already seen, I think we shall find the island 
uninhabited except by ourselves. I suppose all this 
can be done in three or four days. Of course it 
depends on whether we meet with anything that re- 
quires an extended examination.” 

What’ll we take with us ? ” inquired Hiram. 

“ As little as possible,” was the reply. “ Nevertheless 

98 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISJLAND 


since there is almost sure to be something we’ll wish to 
bring back, we must try to make bags from netting- 
twine to carry over our shoulders, say something in 
the shape of a large knapsack, like a fishing-net with a 
comparatively small mesh. You can show us how to 
make something we can carry with us, can you not, 
Hiram ? ” continued the captain. 

‘‘ I kin make something like thet, cap’n,” was Hi- 
ram’s reply. Suppose we begin now.” 

Since the boys had already been taught by Hiram 
how to make fishing-nets, they found it an easy matter 
to make a form of knapsack-net that served admirably 
for the purpose desired. 

‘‘ Jack,” said the captain, while I am attending to 
other things, get out a number of fishing-lines. We 
shall probably depend largely on fish for much of our 
food while away from Landing Beach. Don’t forget 
to take a small frying-pan with you, Hiram. Since we 
shall probably wish to explore some of the limestone 
caves and grottoes, we will also take a lot of rope and a 
number of candles.” 

Some of them, captain,” exclaimed Jack in sur- 
prise. “ Do you expect to find a number of them ? ” 

“Yes,” replied the captain. “From what I’ve al- 
ready seen of Parker Cliffs, I expect to find quite a 
number of caves or grottoes — indeed, more than we’ll 
have time to explore.” 

Starting early the next morning, they struck directly 
across the island until they had reached the region mid- 
way between the ocean and the lagoon, when they con- 
99 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


tinned walking toward the southeast, keeping generally 
midway between the two bodies of water. 

As they had already seen, both from the brief visit 
made to this portion of the island when they first 
landed, as well as when they had examined it with the 
powerful field-glasses from the top of Charles Hill, this 
part was covered with a rich tropical vegetation con- 
sisting largely of cocoanut palms. 

But, besides the palms, there were two other trees that 
especially attracted their attention. One of these was 
provided with large, conspicuous, spiny-edged, sword- 
shaped leaves, arranged spirally in three rows near the 
top of several awkward-looking but large trunks or 
branches. This tree was the pandanus, or as it is com- 
monly called, the screw-pine, the latter name being de- 
rived from the spiral or screwlike arrangement of its 
leaves. This grouping of the leaves can best be seen 
when, as is sometimes the case, the tree consists of a 
single trunk. Generally, however, there are several 
trunks, but the long, drooping, spiny leaves give to the 
tree a characteristic tropical appearance. Some of the 
specimens of this tree reached the height of nearly 
thirty feet. The tree closely resembled a gigantic pine- 
apple, and appeared to thrive remarkably well in the 
shallow, sandy soil of the island. 

There was a feature about the screw-pine that struck 
Harold as being extremely odd. Near the lower part 
of the trunk, a short distance above the ground, the 
tree had sent out a number of strong aerial roots that 
growing downward soon reached the soil, and then 
100 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


continuing to grow, served as prop-shaped appendages 
that not only gave the tree the appearance of having 
been raised out of the ground, thus exposing its roots, 
but also served to support the slender stalk by in- 
crasing the diameter of its base. Some of these roots 
that had issued from the side of the tree at a distance 
considerably above, 
the ground, could be 
seen swinging to 
and fro i n t h e air. 

Finally reaching 
the ground these, 
in their turn, would 
firmly fix themselves 
in the soil, thus still 
further broadening 
the support o f t h e 
tree, as seen in the 
mangrove tree repre- 
sented at the right of 
the screw-pine shown 
in the accompanying 
figure. 

What a queer-looking tree,” said Harold, pointing 
to one of the screw-pines, in which the aerial roots 
were well developed. Those roots are like those I 
have often seen near the bottom of tall cornstalks.” 

Another curious feature about the screw-pine con- 
sisted in the globular, or almost spherical balls seen 
hanging to the branches. These curious-looking masses 
lOI 



WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


attracted Jack’s attention, so turning to the captain he 
inquired : 

Does this tree bear anything that can be eaten ? ” 
Yes,” was the reply. ‘‘ The balls you see hang- 
ing to the tree form its fruit. They consist of dry 
seeds, most of which are quite large, having a volume 
of about two cubic inches.” 

Do I understand you,” exclaimed Jack in astonish- 
ment, “ to say that those things are fit to eat? ” 

They are,” said the captain, provided one cannot 
get anything better. They possess a somewhat sweet- 
ish taste, not unlike a green cornhusL I understand 
that on some of the islands of the Pacific, when nothing 
better can be obtained, this fruit is much employed as a 
food.” 

Another tree that also attracted their attention was 
somewhat higher than the screw-pine. This tree, the 
pisonia, some specimens of which attained a height of 
over thirty feet, presented a very beautiful appearance 
since it was covered with bright flowers, and possessed 
a handsome foliage. 

Besides the trees there were numerous creeping 
plants, one of the most beautiful of which bore a 
quantity of attractive yellow flowers. 

It was shortly after noon when they reached a point 
on the island midway between Landing Beach and 
Boulder Beach. Since all were hungry, they stopped 
for dinner near one of the largest trees of a grove of 
cocoanut palms. 

“As, of course, you have seen,” said the captain, 
102 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ the cocoanyt palm is by far the most important of 
the trees on the island. Indeed, it produces so 
many things of value to man that, as has often been 
pointed out, it may be regarded as consisting of a 
dozen or more trees rolled into one. We are hungry, 
so I think well rest here for a while, for we shall be 
able to find in some of the ripe cocoanuts enough to 
make a very substantial meal. We will not attempt 
to cook anything, since so much work remains to be 
done before we walk completely around the island. 
While we are doing this Hiram and I will tell you some 
of the many uses of this wonderful tree.” 

Cap’n,” said Hiram, ef we are going to larn the 
lads something about this here tree, suppose I cut it 
down ; we kin then get at it easier. Ef course, I know 
it would be foolish to cut down a tree regular when 
we wish to get its nuts ; fer this would destroy a wery 
waleable thing.” 

‘‘All right, Hiram, we’ll cut one down now. Of 
course, as you say, we must not make a practice of 
doing this.” 

“ Captain,” said Charley, “ if you only wish to get 
some of the cocoanuts, I am sure Harold and I can 
shin up that tree and throw down as many as you 
wish.” 

“ Thank you, Charley,” was the reply, “ but we wish 
to examine the leaves and all parts of the tree, as well 
as the nuts in their different stages of growth, so I 
think we will cut it down. You see this tree will 
be like an immense book. Consequently, it is necessary 
103 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


to have it on the ground where we can conveniently get 
at all the information it contains.” 

Hiram soon cut down the tree. As the captain had 
asserted, they found on it cocoanuts in all stages of 
growth; there were fully ripe as well as ripening 
nuts; there were the green or unripened nut, the 
flowers or blossoms from which the nut would spring, 
and, last but not least, there was the green bud that 
would eventually produce other flowers. 

'' Now,” said the captain, ‘‘ let’s begin the lesson. 
Each member of the class will select a large thoroughly 
ripened nut. Such as this,” he continued, pointing to 
a nut of this description. 

Now, I call this first-class teaching,” said Charley 
laughing. 

The captain then showed the class how to remove the 
husk from the nut. 

While the method of teaching adopted by the cap- 
tain undoubtedly possessed many advantages, yet when 
every, one in the class, especially the three hungry, 
growing boys had already been taught how to extract 
the sweet watery milk from inside the nut, it was not 
without its disadvantages. Every one in the class was 
beginning to make an opening in the largest of the 
three black 3cars at one end of the shell. 

“ Stop,” said the captain laughing, the class has 
not reached that point yet. You all see those rounded 
black scars, especially the large one which, as you have 
already learned, is the proper one to open when you 
wish to suck out the milk? ” 

104 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘We do,” shouted the three boys in unison. 

“ And what do you suppose the largest scar is good 
for? ” inquired the captain. 

“ To get at the milk,” was the unanimous reply. 

“ Not at all,” said the captain. “ How about the 
thousands of nuts the trees have borne before we came 
to the island ? ” 

“ Don’t try to guess, Harold,” whispered Charley. 
“ He’ll tell us if we only wait, and then we can dig 
through the larger scar and get the milk all the 
sooner.” 

Jack, who had overheard Charley and who, to tell the 
truth, also felt more interested in the contents of the 
nut than in the answer to the captain’s question, was 
also silent. So the captain, somewhat surprised at 
their apparent lack of interest, did just what Charley 
asserted he would do, and said: 

“ It is through the largest of these holes that a green 
sprout issues from the cocoanut when it falls into 
proper soil, and germinates or begins to grow ; for, as 
you probably know, the cocoanut is the seed from 
which the cocoanut tree springs. 

“ Now,” continued the captain smiling, seeing that 
the thoughts of his class were apparently deeper down 
in the nut than on the surface, “ you may now proceed 
to investigate what lies beyond the largest of the three 
rounded black scars.” 

The class apparently did not think it necessary on 
cutting an opening through the scar referred to to 
make a more careful examination of the sweet juice 

105 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


than what they could ascertain from permitting it to 
trickle slowly down their throats. If, however, the 
countenances of the investigators could be regarded as 
trustworthy, the character of the liquid met with uni- 
versal approval. There was, however, possibly one 
objection, which was that even the large nuts they had 
selected did not contain much more that about a pint 
of the delicious liquid. 

“ The class will now break the nut and still further 
investigate its contents,” said the captain. 

This was soon done, and all were busily engaged in 
eating the delicately flavored kernel or meat that lay 
immediately under the shell of a thickness of about an 
inch. 

“ By grating this kernel,” said the captain, a milky 
juice richer than cream is obtained, and from this 
cream a rich fatty substance known as cocoanut 
butter.” 

Arter awhile,” said Hiram, “ when we start to 
cook and git ready fer the night, ef we kin catch a good 
mess of fish in the waters of the reef. I’ll fry some of 
them in this kind of butter. And,” he added, ef we 
kin git some birds’ eggs further on, which is almost 
sartin, I’ll cook an omelet, which I think ye’ll agree is 
fust-class. Then, ez I brought some tea and a pot, I’ll 
brew some tea in which we’ll use some of the cocoanut 
cream.” 

But, Hiram,” said Charley laughing, how will 
we drink the tea ? In our hands ? — for we brought no 
cups.” 

io6 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Why, in cocoanut shells, of course,” said Hiram 
grinning. “ And Fd advise each of ye to bring his cup 
along.” 

They shaped the remainder of the cocoanut shells 
into cups which each put in the knapsack-like net they 
had brought for carrying things. 

“ I like the last part of the lesson very much, cap- 
tain,” said Charley laughing. “ It is certainly com- 
fortable to be able to eat your book after you have used 
it, since it then can never bother you afterward.” 

Unless,” suggested Jack, you make a pig of your- 
self. Captain,” continued Jack, do cocoanut palms 
spread from one island to another by means of nuts 
sown by the waves ? ” 

“ It is not certain. Jack, that a cocoanut tree sows its 
own fruit except in the immediate neighborhood of the 
tree,” was the reply; ‘‘ for, if the nuts fall where they 
find a proper soil, they will, of course, germinate and 
take root. They may, of course, be carried from place 
to place by the waves. If not too long in the water, 
and if not injured when being thrown on the beach 
and, moreover, if they reach a soil suitable for their 
growth they will probably grow. It is doubtful, how- 
ever, if this method of sowing is often successful.” 

“ Does it take a long time for a cocoanut tree to 
bear fruit after it begins to grow ? ” 

‘‘ No,” said the captain, “ I understand from my 
reading that a tree begins to bear fruit in from five to 
seven years. It continues bearing, however, from 
seventy to eighty years.” 

107 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ About how many nuts does a cocoanut palm gen- 
erally bear?” inquired Jack. 

Your question could not be answered by the num- 
ber of nuts found on a tree at any one time, since ripe 
nuts are to be found on trees at all seasons of the 
year, as well as the immature or green nuts, and the 
blossoms, and buds from which the blossoms are pro- 
duced. I understand, however, it is the experience of 
the islands where cocoanut trees are grown for the sale 
of the nuts they produce, that the yield of a healthy 
tree will vary from eighty to a hundred nuts per 
year.” 

‘‘ Hiram,” inquired Jack, is the partially green nut 
fit for anything? ” 

Wall, my lad,” said Hiram laughing, I believe 
thet ef the milk or liquid in the nut is set aside fer a 
while it makes a drink thet fizzles like soda-water.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said the captain, and the creamy pulp con- 
tained in the green nut produces a far richer cream 
than the ripe nut does. 

But,” continued the captain, ‘‘ we have not begun 
to exhaust the useful substances produced by this 
remarkable tree. As you know, the green bud pro- 
duces something very much like a cabbage. The juices 
from this bud are very sweet, and yield a variety of 
molasses. Moreover, by fermenting this molasses an 
alcoholic liquor is produced.” 

As the conversation continued they learned either 
from the captain or from Hiram about a number of 
other useful things the cocoanut palm produces. 
io8 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Among these was the use of the fibers of the husk for 
cordage, twine, and threads; the use of the wood of 
the trunk of the tree for clubs, spears, etc. ; the use of 
the leaves for thatching, for weaving coarse mats, and 
of the finer fibers for the making of ornamental mats, 
as well as articles of clothing. 

But the vegetation was by no means the only form of 
life on the island. They saw many varieties of birds, 
either during their three days’ walk around the island 
or on subsequent occasions. Some of these caused no 
little fright to Satan, who accompanied the party on 
this discovery as well as when they circumnavigated 
the island. Every now and then Satan would seek 
Jack’s shoulder as a place of refuge when some fero- 
cious bird came in view. We can now briefly allude 
to only a few of the more important of these birds of 
Harding Island. 

In the first place there were several species of birds 
called tern, that, as they afterward learned, visited the 
island twice a year for the purpose of breeding. These 
birds build no regular nests, but lay their eggs in tufts 
of grass. 

As we have already remarked, Hiram, although an 
uneducated man, was well up in the natural history of 
the many animals he had observed in the different parts 
of the world. They were now in a part of the island 
where there were many tufts of grass growing in the 
sandy soil immediately above the top of the beach 
facing the ocean. 

Turning to Charley, Hiram said : 

109 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Mr. Charley, would ye like an omelet fer supper ? ” 
“ Cooked with cocoanut butter as you were talking 
about to-day at noon ? replied Charley. Show me 
the omelet, Hiram, and I’ll show you the eating.” 

All right, my lad,” was the reply. See here,” he 
.said, stooping down and picking up several eggs that 
lay on a tuft of grass. Ye’ll find a-plenty of ’em here. 
They be terns’ eggs, and are wery good eating provided 
they beant too near hatched.” 



Tern or Sea Swallow 


“On what food does the tern live, Hiram?” in- 
quired Jack. 

“ On fish they ketch fer out at sea,” was the reply. 

“ Are those tern ? ” inquired Harold, pointing to 
some birds that were resting not far from them on 
the coast. “ They look like the swallow.” 

“Yes,” replied Hiram; “they be sometimes called 
the sea-swallow.” 

As they afterward had an opportunity of seeing, the 
tern, or sea-swallow, when full-grown, has a jet black 

no 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


plumage at the top of its head and nape of the neck. 
The upper part of its body is an ashen gray, while the 
under surface and the wings are pure white. The bill, 
however, as well as the legs and the feet are of a coral 
red, the bill deepening in color to a black near the tip. 
Counting the length of the long tail feathers these 
birds were rather more than fourteen inches in length. 

Then there was a variety of birds with black 
plumage, somewhat larger than pigeons. They were 



Noddy, a variety of Tern 


known as noddies. They make their nests in the de- 
posits of guano that are always to be found on islands 
visited by large flocks of birds. 

The noddy, in reality, is a species of tern, and more 
closely resembles the nighthawk. This bird often 
lights on vessels by night, and has been known in sev- 
eral cases to have saved the lives of sailors perishing 
for want of provisions. 

A peculiarity about the noddy is the character of its 
nest. The bird is in the habit of returning to the same 
III 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


nest year after year. The nest is, therefore, situated on 
heaps of guano in a shallow bed of seaweed that, ac- 
cumulating, reaches a height of about two feet above 
the ground. It is a clumsy looking affair, exceedingly 
dirty, and possesses a disagreeable odor. The eggs are 
of a dark orange color with splashes and spots of red 
and purple. 



Gannett or the Spectacled Goose 


The odor and the dirty condition of the nest were 
very disagreeable to Harold, who remarked: 

1 wouldn’t care to eat any of those eggs.” 

They be better than they look, Mr. Harold,” re- 
plied Hiram grinning. Wait ’till ye eat ’em cooked.” 

Unlike the tern, the noddy has a dark-colored plu- 
mage. The forehead and top of the head is buff col- 

II2 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ored, the back of the head a dusky gray, and the re- 
maining plumage a chocolate brown. The legs, feet, 
and bill are black. The average length of the bird is 
from fourteen to fifteen inches. 

There were two other species of birds called gannets 
and boobies, that also make their nests on the ground.^ 
They were large birds that were skilful in catching fish. 
Indeed, they were so quick in their movements that 
they could catch the flying fish as they leaped out of the 
water. They were also skilful divers, and plunging 
beneath the surface of the water would seldom fail to 
bring a fish out with them. Although quick in the air 
and the water, they were so awkward on the land that 
they could be easily caught. 

The gannet was by far the largest of the birds in 
the neighborhood. It was nearly three feet long, and 
closely resembled the goose. Indeed, as Hiram told 
the boys, the gannet is sometimes known as the solan 
or the spectacled goose. 

The gannet was so swift a flyer that it had no diffi- 
culty in obtaining abundant food from the shoals of 
fish in the waters both near and off the island. The 
gannet lays a pale-blue egg. When full grown the 
bird has a white plumage, with brown-black beak and 
legs and few dark-colored feathers in their wings. 

The color of the booby is brown above and grayish- 
white beneath. These birds take their name, boobies, 
from their stupidity, not apparently having enough 
sense to protect themselves from the attacks of frigate 
birds or of men. 

113 


H 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


The frigate bird, sometimes known as the sea- 
hawk or the man-of-war bird, is one of the most 
beautiful birds of the tropical waters of the South 
Pacific. It possesses a rapidity of flight far exceeding 
any of the other birds. When flying vertically upward 
from the water it moves so rapidly that it soon becomes 
a mere speck in the sky. 

The plumage of a full-grown frigate bird is a deep 



Frigate Bird or Sea Hawk 


black crossed with green. The female is dull black 
'above and white streaked with cinnamon on the head, 
breast, and under parts of the body. The pouch on the 
throat is scarlet, and when distended it produces a cu- 
rious contrast against the dark black of the neck and 
throat. The pure black, long tail feathers are highly 
esteemed among the inhabitants of the Society Islands 
and other islands in the neighborhood for forming the 
headdresses of their chiefs. The body of the bird is 
114 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


quite small, but including the long tail, the male some- 
times attains a length of three feet. 

This bird especially attracted their attention. It 
received its name, the frigate bird, because it gets 
its living entirely by stealing from other birds. They 
watched this bird hover high in the air, waiting until 
one of the fishing birds returned to the island from 
the ocean with fish in its beak, and would then dash 
ferociously at the bird until in fright it dropped its 
prey. In nearly all cases the frigate bird was swift 
enough to catch the fish before it reached the surface. 

Many of the birds, especially the gannets and boo- 
bies, did not seem to associate with the other birds, but 
lived by themselves in separate parts of the island. 

When they stopped for dinner and the night toward 
sunset, they had no difficulty in catching a mess of ex- 
cellent fish, consisting of a species of sole or flounder. 

When fried in the cocoanut butter the fish made 
capital eating, as did also an omelet of eggs similarly 
prepared. After supper they sat awhile by the side of 
the fire talking, and on afterward retiring were soon in 
deep slumber, for they were all tired by the exertions 
of the day. Not yet knowing what, if any, dangers 
were to be met on the island, they took the precaution 
to divide the night into watches. 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER IX 

The Limestone Grottoes of Parker Cliffs 

Next morning, after an early breakfast, they continued 
the examination of the island. Boulder Beach, as al- 
ready mentioned, extended almost due north and south 
to Hiram Harbor. Wishing to examine this beach, 
which took its name from the almost entire absence 
of fine sand, they walked along its edge as near the 
ocean as they could without getting wet; for the 
breakers at this part of the island, which was the 
windward side, were stronger than any they had yet 
seen, except during the stormy weather of their land- 
ing. It was evident that the absence of sand and the 
presence of the boulders were due to the fact that the 
sand that was washed up from the shore platform did 
not remain between the separate blocks, but was car- 
ried by the force of the waves beyond the top of the 
beach. They were not surprised, therefore, that the 
soil on the land adjoining this part of the beach was 
deeper than elsewhere, and that, owing to this, the 
vegetation, especially that of the cocoanut palms, was 
unusually luxuriant. Moreover, the beach extending 
along the shores of the lagoon in this part of the island, 
as well as the bottom of the lagoon near its edges, was 
quite sandy. 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


The waters of the lagoon were very clear, so that 
they could see a great variety of fishes. Among these 
they were greatly astonished to see a number of full- 
grown sharks. 

‘‘ I do not understand how sharks can get into the 
lagoon,” said the captain. “ Their presence would 
seem to show that there is an opening somewhere be- 
tween the ocean and the lagoon.” 

I kain’t onderstand it either,” replied Hiram. 

We could see no sech opening when we examined the 
reef from the top of Charles Hill. Howsumever we’ll 
keep a sharp lookout, and ef such an opening exists 
we ought sartinly to find it.” 

Both in the waters of the lagoon, and especially 
in those of the reef outside the island, they had no diffi- 
culty in catching a mess of excellent food-fish. There- 
fore, as the captain remarked, they could count on 
obtaining an abundant supply of sea-food. 

Continuing toward the north along the wider por- 
tions of the reef at Parker Cliffs, they found places 
where they could safely walk along the edge of the 
cliffs; in other places, however, the cliffs had been so 
eaten away by the waves and the rain-water, that the 
edges had broken off and fallen into the ocean. They 
continued advancing toward the north until they reached 
the valley lying between Harold and Charles Hills. 

At this part of the island, on certain portions of the 
higher land, there were sand-drifts of considerable 
size. Here, the depth of the soil being great, there was 
an especially luxuriant vegetation. 

117 


V 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


They never had any difficulty in obtaining an abun- 
dance of pure cool water for drinking. A shallow pit, 
four or five feet in depth, dug almost anywhere in the 
sand, was soon filled with good water that drained into 
it from the sides. 

“ Why is it, captain,” inquired Jack, “ that water is • 
reached so near the surface on coral islands, while in 
almost all other parts of the world wells of fairly con- 
siderable depth must be dug before the water can be 
obtained? ” 

The captain explained that the island, at compara- 
tively short distances below the surface, consisted of 
a hard, compact limestone through which the water was 
almost as unable to sink as it would be through a well- 
glazed plate of china or earthenware. A comparatively 
shallow deposit of coral sand rested on the top of this 
impervious material. When the rain fell it rapidly 
sank through the soil until it reached the impenetrable 
rock, so that the soil, up to within four or five feet of 
the surface, soon became water-logged. Necessarily, 
therefore, holes dug in the water-soaked soil were soon 
filled with water that filtered in from the sides. 

The captain also explained that the white color of 
most of the soil of the island prevented it from rapidly 
absorbing the sun’s heat. The loss of water by evapo- 
ration from the surface was, consequently, less than in 
ordinary soils. 

When they reached the valley midway between 
Harold and Charles Hills, they proceeded slowly down 
the bed of the stream that drained their slopes. They 
ii8 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


planned to follow this channel to the coast, since here 
they expected to find a number of grottoes and caverns 
in the limestone of the cliffs. 

Reaching the ocean near the break in the cliffs, they 
walked along the shore toward the north until they 
reached the place where the land descended pre- 
cipitously to the water. Here they had an opportunity 
of closely examining the verticle groovings or furrows 
formed by the rain-water pouring over the edges of the 
precipice. 

“ I never knew that rain-water could dissolve lime- 
stone,’’ said Harold. 

“ The water contains a small quantity of carbonic 
acid gas,” said the captain, and therefore is able 
slowly to dissolve the limestone so as to form vertical 
channels. But, besides this action which takes place 
on the surface, the rain-water also sinks into the rock 
at its joints. If the water is unable to escape below, it 
simply fills the crevices and then continues pouri^ over 
the face of the precipice. But if, as is often th$ case, 
the water can escape below, it continues entering the 
ground at the joints and erodes or eats out the lime- 
stone beneath as well as on the surface. Where the 
water enters the limestone there is formed a deep 
hole called a sink-hole or swallow-hole. 

The water that enters the sink-holes,” continued 
the captain, either escapes through openings in the 
face of the precipice, or flows along the inclined layers 
as underground streams and, continuing to dissolve 
the limestone, forms caverns. 

119 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Underground streams, like those on the surface 
frequently empty into a common channel. In this way 
there is formed an underground stream that may ex- 
tend for miles through the limestone rock at a con- 
siderable distance from the surface. Such a stream 
may flow through extended caverns, whose roofs are 
hundreds of feet above the bed. This is especially the 
case at the sink-holes which, though sometimes but a 
foot or so in diameter at the top, yet open out far 
below the surface into spacious chambers.” 

As they closely examined the precipitous walls of 
limestone, they could see in many places that so much 
of the lower portions had been so worn away by the 
beating of the waves, during storms or high winds, that 
the tops of the cliffs threatened to fall into the ocean. 
Indeed, in several places this falling had actually taken 
place, as could be seen from the fragments of limestone 
that lay piled up below. 

As the captain predicted, they had no trouble in 
finding plenty of caverns. At numerous places on the 
walls of the precipice there were openings extending 
directly into it, but these openings were too dark 
to permit them to see how far they extended. From 
most of them water was escaping into the ocean. 

Selecting an opening from the mouth of which a 
large stream of water was flowing, they lighted their 
candles, and entering, began walking along the sides of 
a fairly deep stream of water that inclined gently 
upward. 

The air grew perceptibly colder as they penetrated 
120 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


deeper and deeper into the wall of the precipice. In a 
short time they had to depend for light almost entirely 
on the flames of their candles. Toward the entrance 
they could see the dim circle of light only that marked 
the outlet where the stream escaped from the cavern 
and ran into the ocean, and soon even this light dis- 
appeared. 

Try as far as possible,’’ said the captain to his com- 
panions, to remember the direction in which we are 
walking, whether parallel to the opening, directly to- 
ward the lagoon, or in some direction between the two. 
This knowledge may prove of great value.” 

There were marked differences in the height of the 
roof of the cave through which the stream flowed; in 
some places it was hundreds of feet above the channel, 
while in others it was so near that they were obliged 
to creep in order to get through. Occasionally, they 
came to places where the stream flowed through im- 
mense chambers or caverns, the roofs of which were 
so far above their heads that they could only dimly dis- 
cern them. In most of these, beautiful icicle-like masses 
of pure white limestone could be seen hanging from the 
roof, while immediately under them were hillocks of 
the same substance. 

Of course,” said the captain to the boys, ‘‘ you 
know what these are? ” 

“ I’ve read about them,” said Jack. Those hang- 
ing from the roof are called stalactites, while those im- 
mediately below them are called stalagmites. The 
stalactites are formed in a manner similar to the icicles 


I2I 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


on the eaves of roofs or similar places. As the water 
containing dissolved limestone slowly drops from the 
roof, small particles of solid limestone are deposited 
and in this way pendants are formed. At the same 
time the water dropping on the floor immediately be- 
low, builds up hillocks called stalagmites. Sometimes 
the stalactites grow downward and the stalagmites up- 
ward until they join, thus forming huge pillars that aid 
in supporting the roof.” 

That’s right. Jack,” exclaimed Charley, who had 
gone a .little distance ahead, here are many such 
pillars.” 

In the direction indicated they could see a number 
of columns or pillars extending between the roof and 
the floor of the cave. They varied in thickness, and in 
some places were so close together that it was difflcult 
to force a passage between them. 

Several hundred yards farther up the stream a por- 
tion of the cave was reached where one of its walls was 
neasrly vertical. Here, by an apparent chance that 
seems so frequently to characterize the works of na- 
ture, but which, when properly understood is devoid of 
any chance whatever, a number of parallel stalactitic 
pillars had been formed against a portion of the verti- 
cal wall. The pillars were of unequal length and 
closely resembled the pipes of a huge organ. Beneath 
a huge stalactite that hung gracefully from the ceil- 
ing, a stalagmite had been heaped up that bore a 
wonderful resemblance to a huge pulpit. The combi- 
nation of organ-pipes and pulpit caused this portion 
122 



The pillars . . . closely resembled the 
pipes of a huge organT 

Page 122 



L MJ 




A' ---• I': ’ 





vP' 


9 - 


*■' ^*, 1 ? 




V 

?• '^‘ V- 

a " r 





•% '.r for fi st -'i^' 

I., ^ > ‘j*‘^ ^ L ^ I 

■ '^ii • -'''■■ ■ • r ' • ' ■';.>.•> ,.•■ 

i* 1 ' LW^ T •• ■' ' '. ■ ' ' ., I i ^ ■:, fs- • 

:V4*'l:iBilii.> .V T^;. ill ■■y‘f,t:*. A.^ 


r-^. >4 


, ^ -.. p 'V 

‘ , 4 j^l i • 

3 iB^ ' 3 ■ * * s ♦ 


/r 

1 


4 






I 


4 # ■/;•«':■; .^' 4 ^ 


/ , *- 


Sfv^. ... ; . \'-t\ - 


* . - ^C. ' * • ‘f ,' ' - Si ‘ I • * * 

, I .m 4 




WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


of the cavern to resemble a corner in a huge cathe- 
dral, with its pulpit placed a little to one side, but in 
front of the grand organ. 

About ten minutes’ walk beyond the cathedral they 
heard a noise like that of falling water. 

‘‘ That sounds like a waterfall, Uncle Arthur,” ex- 
claimed Harold. 

Yes, Harold,” was the reply, waterfalls are not 
unusual in caves of this character.” 

Walking in the direction of the sound, which took 
them a distance of one hundred yards from the stream, 
they came to a place where a stream greater in volume 
than the one they had been following, was pouring over 
the top of a cliff, probably twenty feet in height. They 
were surprised to see that this water did not empty into 
the stream they had just left, but took a different 
path running down a fairly steep incline to a much 
lower level. 

This is very interesting,” said the captain ; this 
stream belongs to a different drainage system. Sup- 
pose we follow it, but be careful you don’t slip,” he 
added. ‘‘ The rocks are smooth and the stream is deep 
enough to drown you.” 

Descending the stream, as well as they could roughly ^ 
estimate for a hundred feet, they found that it poured 
over a low bluff about two feet in height, emptying into 
a larger stream than any they had yet seen. This 
stream was flowing with a great velocity. 

Charley, who had gone ahead of the others had 
already reached the bluff over which the stream from 
123 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the waterfall flowed into the larger stream. At this 
moment, Harold, who was immediately back of 
Charley, stumbled and slipping was carried over the 
bluff into the larger stream. This was so deep that he 
completely disappeared, for the water was considerably 
over his head. Fortunately, Charley, who was stoop- 
ing down looking into the water caught him by the 
hair of his head as he came to the surface and tried to 
pull him out. But the current was so strong that he 
was unable to do so, and had it not been for Hiram, 
who was almost immediately back of Harold, both 
boys would probably have been carried away by the 
swift current. 

Fortunately, no other harm had been done to Harold 
than a thorough wetting. As soon as he recovered 
from his surprise he turned to the captain, who had by 
this time joined them, exclaiming : 

‘‘ Uncle Arthur, did you not say it was rain-water 
sinking into the ground at the surface that dissolved 
out the limestone and formed this cave? ” 

Yes, Harold, that’s right; why do you ask? ” 
Because,” said Harold, if that’s so, then it must 
rain salt water in this part of the island.” 

‘‘ How is that,” said the captain in surprise. 

“ I got a mouthful when I slipped into the big 
stream,” was the reply. “ It’s as salt as the water of 
the ocean.” 

Harold’s companions were as much surprised as he 
had been, and began immediately to taste the water of 
the stream that had come from the waterfall, and found 
124 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


it perfectly fresh. Then dipping their hands in the 
waters of the larger stream they found, as Harold 
had declared, that it was as salt as the waters of the 
ocean. 

‘‘ There is an underground connection between the 
ocean and the lagoon,'' said the captain. “ This is the 
explanation of the presence of the sharks in the 
lagoon. Do you remember, Hiram," he said, ‘‘ in 
what direction the lagoon lies from this place ? " 

‘‘ Ez fer ez I kin remember," replied Hiram, “ this 
stream is running straight toward the lagoon." 

‘‘ That," said the captain, “ is my recollection," as 
indeed it was also the recollection of the three boys 
when asked. 

“ Captain," said Charley, taking something out of 
his knapsack, here’s a piece of cork I picked up this 
morning on Boulder Beach. I brought it along think- 
ing I might use it as a float for our fishing-lines if we 
should fish in shallow waters. Suppose I throw it into 
the stream? If we find it afterward in the waters of 
the lagoon it would, of course, prove that this stream 
enters the lagoon.” 

That’s a good idea, Charley," said the captain. 

Mark your initials on it, so that there can be no doubt 
about it should we find it again." 

Marking C. Y. P. on the cork, Charley threw it in 
the water when, floating rapidly past them, it soon dis- 
appeared in the darkness. 

They had now been in the caverns under Parker 
Clififs for nearly two hours, so determining to return to 

125 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the sunlight, they retraced their steps and, since they 
had the two streams to follow, found no difficulty in 
reaching the opening through which they had entered. 

During their wanderings they had all on several 
occasions thoroughly wet their clothes by slipping into 
the stream. Besides this, both Charley and Harold had 
received several duckings. 

The warmer outside air was very pleasant when they 
finally emerged from the opening of the cave. They 
made an effort, although unsuccessfully, to find the 
place where the waters of the ocean entered the lower 
part of the limestone cliffs. Their failure to do this, 
however, was probably due to the fact that it was then 
high tide. 

“ Since we are all more or less wet,” said the cap- 
tain, ‘‘ we’ll make our way to the shore of the lagoon, 
take a bath in the shallow water near the shore, and 
spread out our clothes in the sun to dry.” 

Retracing their steps up the gorge to the top of the 
plateau they were obliged to walk nearly a mile to the 
north before they could descend to the lagoon, for this 
side of the plateau was as precipitous as it was on most 
;of the side facing the ocean. At last, however, they 
reached the lagoon and, selecting a place where the 
water was shallow and the bottom was sandy, were 
soon enjoying a pleasant bath. 

It is interesting to note that several hours afterward 
while wandering along the shores of the lagoon near 
the precipice, they found floating in the water near the 
shore of the lagoon the identical piece of cork, marked 
126 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


with Charley’s initials, that had been thrown into the 
underground stream. 

‘‘We know now to a certainty that there is an open- 
ing between the ocean and the lagoon,” said the cap- 
tain. “ But,” he added, turning to Hiram, “ I don’t 
think any of us would care to take the boat from the 
ocean through that opening into the lagoon, do you, 
Hiram? ” 

“ No,” said Hiram smiling, “ thet’d be wery dan- 
gerous.” 

As soon as their clothes were dry they dressed, ate 
dinner, and proceeded toward the west, examining the 
land between the ocean and the lagoon. They saw 
nothing new in this part of their route, but were 
pleased to find an abundance of cocoanut palms and 
other trees, an abundance of fish, both in the lagoon 
and in the ocean, as well as numerous flocks of birds, 
of the same character as those observed on the southern 
coast. In order to make up for the time spent in the 
caverns of Parker Cliffs, they walked rapidly, camp- 
ing for the night at a point on the northern part of the 
island about midway between its eastern and western 
coasts. Nor did they find during their next day’s ex- 
ploration anything new, except that the western or lee- 
ward coast of the island, probably owing to its being 
protected by the higher land, was much lower than the 
windward coast. This part of the island was covered 
with vegetation throughout its entire length, except 
for occasional patches of no very great extent. 

The western or leeward coast was comparatively free 
127 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


from heavy breakers, so that, as they had observed 
during the circumnavigation of the island, there would 
be much less difficulty in landing a boat here than else- 
where. 

In all their wanderings along the coast of the ocean 
they had found no better harbor than Jackson Har- 
bor. It is true that Hiram Harbor afforded a shelter 
and, when the boat was once safely in it, was well 
protected against the breakers. But the breakers 
here were higher and stronger than at Jackson Harbor. 
Moreover, Hiram Harbor was difficult of access, while 
Jackson Harbor could readily be entered at all tides. 

“ We will build our house at Jackson Harbor,’^ said 
the captain. “ Fortunately, it is near Landing Beach 
so that the work of transporting our goods will not be 
great.’' 

They reached Landing Beach early in the afternoon 
when they were welcomed by Rompey, who had been 
left to guard their goods. The animal had evidently 
been very lonely, and was greatly pleased to see them 
again, especially his young masters. 


128 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER X 

The Erection of Jackson House and the 
Building of a Boat 

The next few weeks were spent in erecting a living- 
house at Jackson Harbor. Here the highest point of 
land did not exceed twenty feet. As the captain re- 
marked, the small elevation was a great disadvantage. 
Although the house would be beyond ordinary waves, 
yet it might readily be reached by the waves of a very 
severe storm and, of course, should a high earthquake 
wave from the ocean strike the island, the house would 
almost certainly be completely washed away. Never- 
theless, an advantage of the site was its nearness to the 
best harbor yet discovered on the island. Then too 
it was quite near Landing Beach where they had tem- 
porarily stored the goods obtained from the wreck of 
the brig. Besides, as the captain suggested, at some 
later date they would probably erect another house on 
some part of the higher land in the neighborhood of 
Parker Cliffs. 

It would be easy to pass from one house to the 
other,” said the captain, ‘‘ since as soon as we are 
through the erection of the house at Jackson Harbor, 
we’ll begin building a boat for use on the lagoon when, 
of course, we’ll carry such things as we may need for 
I 129 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the house on Parker Cliffs directly across the lagoon in 
the boat 

The building of a house is generally an operation 
that requires considerable time, but in this case the 
difficulties were lessened by the fact that the timber 
recovered from the brig consisted for the greater part 
of different portions of good-sized portable houses in- 
tended for use, as has been said, in the towns that were 
springing up in the neighborhood of the recently dis- 
covered mines of South Africa. The timber was in the 
form of regular mill-work, such as door-frames, win- 
dow-frames, window-sash, flooring-boards, joists, 
rafters, the parts of stairways, shingles, etc., all ready 
to be put together. The work, therefore, went on 
rapidly. As they had collected material for several 
portable houses, they concluded to give themselves 
plenty of house room at Jackson Harbor, so they began 
the house by placing two portable houses end to end. 
The front of one house faced the ocean and the front 
of the other the lagoon. This possessed the advantage 
of bringing the kitchens of the two houses together. 
Hiram, who especially presided over this portion of 
the dwelling, put the two houses together so as to make 
the two kitchens into one large room. 

Each house was a two-story frame, furnished with 
a high sloping roof with eaves projecting beyond the 
walls so as to form a covering for porches at the front 
and sides. On the first floor of each house there was a 
hall or vestibule, a parlor, dining-room, and kitchen, 
while on the second floor there were four good-sized 
130 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


rooms. The two front rooms opened out on front and 
side porches, and the two back rooms on the side 
porches only. Since the two houses were placed end 
to end, and had been erected on the highest land, mid- 
way between the ocean and the lagoon, it was possible 
from the front porch of one of the houses to get a view 
of the ocean, and from the front porch of the other, 
a view of the lagoon. 

As will be seen, there were plenty of bedrooms on 
the second floor. Captain Harding and Jack were as- 
signed rooms in the front of the house facing the 
ocean, while Harold and Charley the two rooms im- 
mediately in the rear, but since Harold and Charley 
preferred sleeping together, they had fitted up the extra 
room as their sitting-room or study. 

The two front rooms of the house facing the lagoon 
were built so as to form a single room, which was 
employed as a library and reading-room. In this were 
placed the books brought from the brig. Hiram occu- 
pied one of the other rooms, while the remaining 
rooms, as well as the high attics, were used for storing 
some of their extra goods. 

The furnishing of the house, though by no means 
elaborate, was nevertheless comfortable. As already 
stated, the brig had in its cargo a fairly varied assort- 
ment of household goods, including bedsteads, mat- 
tresses, chairs, tables, bureaus, lounges, etc., while 
there was an excellent miscellaneous collection of 
small wares for the kitchen and dining-room. It is 
true that there were no carpets, but then the highly 

131 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


colored blankets, of which they possessed a compara- 
tively great store, made comfortable, if not esthetic 
floor coverings. 

As soon as they could find time, they made ham- 
mocks from the netting twine. These, when hung on 
the porches, afforded pleasant resting-places on which 
to lie and read. All things considered, their house was 
a model of comfort ; far preferable to the low-thatched 
huts employed by the inhabitants of most of the islands 
of the mid-Pacific. 

The captain paid especial attention to the drinking- 
water. Selecting a spot about five hundred feet from 
the house, a well was dug eight feet in depth that 
soon filled with splendid pure and cool drinking-water. 
While they might have placed the well nearer the 
house yet, as the captain remarked, it was worth all 
the extra trouble its location made to avoid contamina- 
tion by drainage from the house. 

When the erection of the house at Jackson Harbor 
was completed they began, under Hiram’s direction, 
the building of a boat intended for use on the lagoon. 
This took them about one week. The boat was very 
satisfactory and large enough to hold all five at one 
time. 

In order to distinguish the two boats they called 
them by numbers. No. 23 being the name originally 
given to the boat in which Charley had been picked up, 
the boat in the lagoon was called No, 13,” since, 
as Charley said in a laughing tone, they might as well 
have a Jonah name for each of the boats. Of course, 
132 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


most of my boy readers will understand the bad luck 
that is supposed by foolish people to be associated either 
with the skiddoo number 23, or with the unlucky or 
Friday number, 13. 

They now began to settle down to their island life. 
The novelty of the new conditions of living was gradu- 
ally wearing away. There was still, however, much to 
be done and each day brought its routine duties with 
it, yet they found plenty of leisure time, which they 
spent in reading as well as in talking with the captain. 

But it must not be supposed they spent the greater 
portion of their time indoors. On the contrary, either 
in company with the captain or Hiram, or sometimes 
by themselves, the boys visited different parts of the 
island, generally bringing back with them some of its 
different food products. Now that the captain was 
satisfied the island had no other inhabitants he gave 
the boys full liberty to go anywhere in the boat on the 
lagoon. They were prohibited, however, from using 
boat No. 23 unless accompanied by Hiram or the cap- 
tain, since off most parts of the coast there was danger 
from the breakers. Their experience in open boats led 
them always to keep plentiful supplies of food and fresh 
water on each of the boats. 

Charley, who was a much stronger boy intellectu- 
ally than Harold, had become greatly interested in 
the many wonderful properties possessed by the palm 
tree and its fruit, and had commenced a careful study 
of this tree. All three boys, especially Charley, had 
learned to climb the cocoanut palm, and to see the 

133 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


rapidity with which both the younger boys could shin 
up a tree, throw down the cocoanuts, and shortly after- 
ward return themselves, was a matter that never failed 
to lose its interest. Indeed, Charley soon learned to 
beat Harold at this, albeit Harold was an excellent 
climber. 

One day, when they had all been out gathering co- 
coanuts and were ready to start back to Jackson House, 
they missed Charley. The captain going back to look 
for him found the lad sitting under a cocoanut palm 
with a cocoanut in his hands. He had removed the 
husk from the nut, and was looking so intently at the 
three black scars that are always found at one end 
of the nut that he failed to notice the captain’s ap- 
proach. Evidently something about the nut troubled 
the lad, for he was earnestly looking at it. That he 
had not reached a satisfactory conclusion could be told 
from the expression of his face. The problem was evi- 
dently a more difficult one than he was able to solve. 
Seeing this, the captain approaching, said: 

‘‘ What troubles you, Charley ? Let me know ; 
probably I can help you.” 

Thank you, captain. I would like to ask you a 
question I have been trying to answer myself, but have 
found it too hard for me.” 

‘‘ Let’s hear it, Charley.” 

Well, captain,” replied Charley, “ it’s about these 
three black scars on the shell of the cocoanut. I know 
the use of the big scar; for, as you told us the other 
day, it is out of this opening a green bud or sprout 

134 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


comes when the cocoanut begins to grow or sprout. 
What I have been trying to puzzle out are the uses 
for the two other scars. I believe you were about to 
tell us the uses of these openings the other day. I 
foolishly persuaded Harold not to ask about them, so 
you see I am punished.'’ 

Then,” said the captain inquiringly, “ you think 
there must be some use for the two other scars.” 

‘‘ Why, certainly, captain,” was the reply. Natural 
objects have no useless parts, have they? ” 

No, Charley,” was the reply, “ though it must be 
confessed that the uses of all the parts of some natural 
objects have not yet been discovered.” 

'' Then, captain,” said Charley, ‘‘ can you tell me the 
use of the two extra scars on the end of the cocoanut ? ” 
Yes, Charley,” was the reply. When the cocoa- 
nut begins to grow, a sprout comes out of the larger of 
the openings, and growing upward produces the trunk 
of the cocoanut palm. At the same time two smaller 
sprouts come out of the two other scars. These, turn- 
ing downward, form the roots of the tree.” 

Thank you, captain,” said Charley. Tm glad to 
know this. There are so many things a fellow can’t 
understand that it is comfortable to get a few of them 
out of the road.” 

That night, after supper, while they were sitting 
on the porch looking toward the ocean, the captain, 
turning to Jack and Harold, told them briefly the facts 
concerning the uses of the dark scars at the end of the 
cocoanut. He then said : 


135 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Tm sure the growth of the cocoanut palm will in- 
terest you. When a ripe cocoanut is kept for a long 
time a white spongy substance forms inside the nut. 
This substance begins at the inside of the nut imme- 
diately opposite the largest of the three scars that are 
situated near the sharpest end of the shell, or the end 
where the stalk is attached to the husk. A change now 
takes place inside the nut, the fibrous spongy substance 
rapidly grows, absorbs the milky matter, and fills the 
entire inside. This change is preparatory to the germi- 
nation or sprouting of the nut. A single white-colored 
bud or shoot soon breaks its way through the largest 
of the black scars or eyes in the shell, and after rising 
some inches unfolds pale green leaves. At the same 
time a thick white fiber bursts through each of the two 
smaller eyes of the nut and, turning in the opposite 
direction, grow downward into the ground. The 
sprout from the larger of the openings produces the 
trunk of the tree while the other sprouts form roots 
that attach it to the ground.’’ 

“ What becomes of the shell, captain ? ” inquired 
Jack. 

During the changes on sprouting, the shell is sof- 
tened, and both it and the husk decaying, serve to en- 
rich the soil and thus aid the growth of the tree.” 

The three boys appeared to be so greatly interested 
in what the captain told them that he said : 

“ Suppose we agree that three days from now you 
will meet me after supper and tell me anything con- 
nected with either the fruit or any other parts of the 
136 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


cocoanut palm, you can either observe for yourselves 
or can read about in the books of the library. We will 
then see which of you can relate the most curious facts. 
There is only one thing I must ask, and that is, that you 
don’t attempt to take a short cut by getting Hiram to 
tell you anything.” 

The captain’s suggestion created a generous rivalry 
among the boys, who not only diligently searched the 
books of the library, but also spent most of their time, 
of course alone, in careful observations of all parts of 
the cocoanut palm tree. During these observations the 
boys wandered over a large part of the island. 

On the evening named by the captain, the boys came 
into the room laden with specimens from different 
parts of the tree. The specimen brought by Charley 
consisted of a large light wooden box carefully closed 
at the top. The box evidently contained something 
alive, for every now and then they could hear such 
vigorous blows struck against its sides that they con- 
fidently expected whatever it contained would soon 
break its way through. 

“ What have you there, Charley? ” asked Jack, for 
although Charley had told Harold all about the con- 
tents of the box and, indeed, Harold had helped him 
put the thing into the box, both had kept the matter 
a secret from Jack. 

‘‘ That’s one of my facts,” replied Charley. You 
had better keep your hands off, since this particular 
fact is very much alive and might surprise you.” 

The captain now called on the boys, one after 

137 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the other, to exhibit some of the specimens they had 
collected, and at the same time asked them to explain 
the peculiarities the specimens were intended to illus- 
trate. 

Jack, who was called on first, exhibited something 
that greatly surprised both Harold and Charley, and 
even to some extent, the captain. It was a small piece 
of a strong fibrous material that had been woven in a 
marvelous manner. The fabric was of a white color, 
partially transparent, and was as fine in texture as a 
sheet of thin paper. 

From what part of the tree did you get that speci- 
men, Jack?” inquired the captain. 

“ From this part,” replied Jack, showing the stalk 
of one of the large leaves of the cocoanut palm together 
with a part of the trunk to which it had been at- 
tached. He then exhibited a species of natural cloth 
formed of intertwined fibrous materials that was 
attached to the bark under the bottom of the stalk, 
and extended half-way around the trunk, reaching 
several feet up the leaf, thus bracing or strength- 
ening it, so as to prevent its being carried away by the 
wind. In the case of very young leaves this fibrous 
material is white, almost transparent, and very thin. 
As the leaf grows it becomes stronger and yellowish in 
color. 

They examined with great interest this wonderful 
piece of cloth that had been spun in nature’s loom 
by the intertwining of the delicate fibrous threads, the 
warp and weft of which consisted of fibers produced 

138 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


in place during the growth of the tree and afterward 
held together by means of a still finer adhesive fibrous 
substance. Hiram, hearing what was going on, and 
being familiar with the cocoanut, had attended the 
meeting. Therefore, when Jack exhibited this wonder- 
ful piece of cloth, he remarked : 

‘‘ Thet’s wery pretty, Mr. Jack. In the Fiji Islands 
they make bags of this stuff, and in other islands they 
use it fer making jackets, coats, and shirts.” 

‘‘ Now, Harold,” said the captain, “ what have you 
to show us ? ” 

Harold replied by handing the captain a piece of dry 
cocoanut meat he had prepared by exposing pieces of 
cocoanut meat to the sun until it had become dry and 
hard. 

What do you call it, Harold? ” inquired Jack. 

It is dried cocoanut meat,” said Harold, and is 
known as copra.” 

Oh, yes,” replied Jack. I was reading about 
copra the other day. What is it used for, Harold, do 
you know? ” 

“ Of course, I do,” was the reply, haven’t I been 
cramming up about it for the last three days from all 
the books I could find in the library ? ” 

“ Then, Harold,” said the captain, seeing that Jack’s 
remark had provoked the lad, ‘‘ tell us what you have 
read.” 

Harold began by explaining that copra was the 
dried kernel or meat of the cocoanut. It is prepared 
in several ways. The best is by carefully drying the 

139 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


entire nut, all that is necessary for this purpose being 
to build a house or shed in which to pile up the nuts. 
During this process the nuts must be kept dry and 
placed on boards, and not on the damp ground, since 
otherwise they would sprout. The husk is not re- 
moved, because in parts of Fiji and other densely popu- 
lated islands there are species of cockroaches that will 
eat through the large scar at the end of the nuts for 
the purpose of drinking the milk. The air thus getting 
into the interior would cause the decay of the kernel. 
It takes about three months’ drying in this way to con- 
vert the kernel into copra. When properly prepared, 
copra is as tough as leather, and will keep almost 
indefinitely without being affected by dampness or 
changes of climate. When the nuts are thoroughly 
dried, the husks are removed, the shell broken, and 
the kernel cut into pieces so as not to occupy too much 
bulk during transportation. 

Another method of preparing copra consists in re- 
moving the husks from the nuts, breaking them in 
halves, emptying out the milk they contain, and ex- 
posing the pieces on a coral beach where they can be 
dried by the sun. If the weather is good, copra can be 
prepared by this process in three days. But if there is 
rain or heavy dew, unless the nuts are taken in or 
covered, they become mouldy and begin to rot, thus 
acquiring a very disagreeable odor. 

This,” continued Harold, is what makes my 
specimen smell so bad, but that’s the way the book says 
copra is made, anyhow.” 

140 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ Very good, Harold,” said the captain. Of 
course,” he continued, you understand that copra is 
used for the production of cocoanut oil, so valuable 
as a lubricator of machinery. Moreover, the refuse 
left after the oil is extracted forms an excellent cattle 
food. Besides this, a high grade of copra is sometimes 
employed in the preparation of food products con- 
taining grated cocoanut. 

“ And now, Charley,” continued the captain, smiling 
and turning to the lad, let’s see the wonderful speci- 
men you have in the box. I am afraid, whatever it is, 
that it is now in a very bad humor.” 

The captain had reason for this remark, for the 
animal, or whatever else it was, had been vigorously 
pounding against the sides of the box and, indeed, in 
one place it had already partially broken through. 

Rompey, who attended the meeting — for the animal 
was always found with his young masters when not 
prohibited from doing so — evidently regarded the oc- 
cupant of Charley’s box as something to be dreaded. 
He kept up a continuous growling, and when Charley 
began to open the lid apparently prepared himself to 
protect his young masters if anything happened. 

‘‘ Hold him back, Harold,” said Charley. He’ll get 
hurt if he comes too near.” 

When Charley opened the box they saw a specimen 
of a large landcrab, of a species exceedingly fond of 
cocoanuts. It was a vigorous animal, possessing man- 
dibles or claws large enough to break a man’s arm if 
permitted to strike a full blow, and quite powerful 
141 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


enough to break open the shell of a cocoanut in order 
to get at the meat. Charley had ingeniously rendered 
the animal harmless by tying bits of thick cord around 
its body and securing the ends by nails driven into the 
’bottom of the box. 

I caught this crab,” said Charley, “ eating a cocoa- 
nut under a tree near Boulder Beach. He appeared to 
be enjoying the cocoanut very much.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said Hiram, ‘‘ thet feller eats clean food, and 
makes splendid eating hisself. Ef ye don’t wish to 
take him to bed with ye to-night, suppose ye give him 
to me and I’ll sarve him up to-morrow at the breakfast 
table.” 

You can have him, Hiram,” said Charley laughing. 

‘‘ Uncle Arthur,” said Harold, “ the books say there 
are cockroaches in the Fiji Islands. I’ve been looking 
around for a cockroach for the last two days to exhibit 
him with a piece of copra, but I’m sorry to say that I 
could not find one.” 

‘‘Sorry!” exclaimed Jack indignantly. “You 
ought to be glad.” 

“ I don’t think you will find cockroaches on Harding 
Island, Harold,” said the captain. “ They, as well as 
rats, are brought to such islands as the Fijis by the 
ships. Making their way to the land during the ship- 
ping of the cargo, the animals rapidly multiply and 
overrun the island. It is because ships do not visit 
Harding Island that we are indebted to the absence of 
these disagreeable animals.” 


142 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XI 

The Captain's Conundrum. How Coral Islands 
ARE Formed 

Ever since the captain had given Jack and Charley the 
conundrum as to how the central part of the lagoon 
of Harding Island could once have been the highest 
point of land on an ordinary island, a generous rivalry 
had existed between them. Naturally each tried his 
best to be the first to guess the conundrum, but so far 
from there being the slightest bad feeling, each was 
always ready to aid the other in his efforts to solve the 
problem. Indeed, they often freely discussed the diffi- 
culties both had experienced. 

When they learned that the mass of solid limestone 
on which the coral island rested was undoubtedly sev- 
eral thousand feet thick, and were then almost imme- 
diately afterward informed that the coral polyps 
could not live in water deeper than about a hundred 
and fifty feet, they were very greatly puzzled to un- 
derstand how such apparently contrary things could 
be possible. 

One day, while all three boys were on the Harding 
lagoon in boat No. 13, Charley, turning to Jack, said: 

‘‘ How are you getting on with the captain’s conun- 
drum, Jack ? ” 


143 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Not so well as I would like, Charley,’' was the 
reply. If I remained on the lower parts of the 
island near Jackson Harbor I might guess the conun- 
drum, but as soon as I go to the higher parts in the 
neighborhood of Parker Cliffs matters look so differ- 
ent that I am forced to believe the conclusions I have^ 
reached are wrong. How are you getting along ? ” he 
continued. 

“ I am doing splendidly, thank you,” replied 
Charley. ‘‘ You remember what I said to you the other 
day about studying the matter entirely from the grad- 
ual sinking of the island and leaving out the matter 
of elevation. In this way I think I have guessed the 
conundrum. If Harding Island was once an ordinary 
island with its highest land over the middle of what 
is now the lagoon, and the land sank no faster than the 
waves formed a reef off its shores, then I think our 
island might eventually have been formed. There are, 
however, many things about the problem that I cannot 
understand.” 

Jack was greatly surprised at Charley’s remarks. 
Grasping him by the hand he shook it heartily and 
said : 

“ Charley, I congratulate you. I am sure you have 
solved the captain’s conundrum. You have fairly 
beaten me. Suppose we go to the captain, tell him your 
answer, and ask him to explain the things you don’t 
understand.” 

“ Yes,” said Harold, “ let’s go. I would like to 
hear about this thing myself.” 

144 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Rowing the boat to its landing on the shore of the 
lagoon opposite Jackson Harbor, they went to Jackson 
House where they found the captain in the reading 
room facing the lagoon. 

The captain was surprised at their coming back so 
soon. It was yet early in the afternoon with good 
clear weather, and this almost always led the boys, 
when on the lagoon, to remain until near supper-time. 
He therefore exclaimed : 

‘‘ What's the matter, boys ? What brings you back 
so soon ? Has anything happened ? ” 

“ There’s nothing happened,” said Jack, except 
that we came to say that we think Charley has guessed 
your conundrum about the formation of a coral island, 
and wish to know whether he is right.” 

“ I’m glad to hear that, Charley,” said the captain 
smiling. “ Let me see, you were to explain how, al- 
though coral animals can only live in comparatively 
shallow water, the deepest portion of the water in 
the lagoon must have been the highest point of land 
of an ordinary island. What’s the answer, Charley? ” 

‘‘ Because,” said Charley, ‘‘ Harding Island was once 
an ordinary island with its highest points above the 
center of the present lagoon. The coral animals began 
to grow in the shallow waters at different points near 
the shores. Their dead bodies, broken into fragments 
or ground into sand, were piled up by the waves, and 
being cemented by the waters into solid limestone, 
gradually formed the reef. If the island sank no more 
rapidly than the animals furnished materials for the 

K 145 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


reef, the growth of the island could continue until the 
reef completely surrounded the island. At last, there- 
fore, the highest part of the old island was far below 
the line of the water in the lagoon.” 

“ Splendid, Charley,” said the captain. I did not 
expect either of you to solve the conundrum. The for- 
mation of a coral island is a matter that has puzzled the 
ablest scientific men. Your solution is excellent as far 
as it goes. I was quite sure when I stated the conun- 
drum that you would have difficulty in solving it in 
the case of Harding Island, since the elevation of the 
island at Parker Cliffs and its much lower height in 
the rest of the island must have given you considerable 
difficulty.” 

That is just what it did,” said Charley. “ It was 
only after talking over these difficulties with Jack that 
I determined to leave out of consideration all parts of 
the island that showed no signs of gradual sinking. 
In this manner I have reached what you tell me is the 
correct answer to the conundrum.” 

“ Captain,” said Jack, “ won’t you explain now just 
how, as you understand it, Harding Island was 
formed ? ” 

i Certainly, Jack,” was the reply. 

The boys settled themselves down comfortably 
around the captain who said : 

I think you will understand me better if you ask 
questions while I’m talking. Don’t hesitate to break in. 
I’ll try to make clear to you anything you don’t un- 
derstand.” 


146 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


We’ll ask questions all right, captain,” said the 
boys laughing. 

“ I will begin,” said the captain, by saying that 
Harding Island is a completed form of coral island, 
that as Charley correctly says, has been built by the 
waves around a slowly sinking island. This sinking 
has gone on for thousands upon thousands of years. 
Had we been able to see the island during different 
stages of its formation, we should have seen very dif- 
ferent appearances from those existing at the present 
time. After I have explained to you the manner in 
which it is now generally believed coral islands are 
formed, I intend asking you to describe to me some of 
the different appearances Harding Island would have 
presented at different stages of its formation.” 

‘‘ We’ll not forget that, captain,” said Jack. Will 
we, Charley? ” 

“ Not much,” was the reply. 

“ Why are you leaving me out ? ” inquired Harold 
indignantly. ‘‘ We’ll see whether I can’t answer the 
question as well as either of you.” 

** All right, Harold,” said the captain good- 
naturedly, ‘‘ I’ll promise to give you the first chance. 

It was the great naturalist, Charles Darwin,” con- 
tinued the captain, “ who first pointed out the manner 
in which coral islands were formed. His explanation 
is based on what he saw during a voyage around the 
world in 1832-1836, as naturalist to the exploring ex- 
pedition in the Beagle, under the command of Captain 
FitzRoy, of the English Royal Navy. 

147 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Before Darwin’s time erroneous ideas were held 
concerning the formation of coral islands. Since frag- 
ments of coral rock were brought to the surface by the 
dredges from almost all depths, it was assumed that 
the coral animals could live even in the deepest water, 
and that in the warmer parts of the ocean they were 
actively at work over the entire bed of the ocean build- 
ing coral rocks. It was then believed that the coral 
polyp actually builds the coral reef by taking limestone 
from the water and depositing it piece after piece until 
the solid limestone base on which all coral islands 
rest was produced. 

‘‘ The early navigators had observed several types 
of coral reefs in different parts of the ocean. In some 
places there was a narrow strip or reef of coral lying 
in the shape of a fringe near the shores of an ordinary 
island. This reef was separated from the island by a 
narrow channel of water and was known as a fringing 
reef. 

‘‘ Around other islands there were found broader 
coral reefs, separated from the island by a greater 
breadth of water. The channel separating the reef 
from the island almost always consisted of very deep 
water, and since it formed a barrier which protected^ 
the island from the breakers, it was known as a barrier 
reef.” 

‘‘ I have seen such reefs, captain,” said Charley, 
off the eastern shores of Australia.” 

Yes, Charley,” said the captain, there is a barrier 
reef off the eastern coast of Australia that is fully one 
148 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


thousand miles in length. As there are breaks in this 
reef, and the water between the reef and the mainland 
is quite deep, there are thus formed magnificent harbors 
large enough to shelter the combined navies of the 
world.” 

“ Does the barrier reef finally extend entirely around 
the island ? ” inquired Jack. 

Yes,” said the captain, and when it does it forms 
another variety of coral reef known as the encircling 
reef; that is, a ring-shaped mass of coral extending 
around an ordinary island which lies near its center.” 

That’s the highest point of land of the old Hard- 
ing Island before its top sank into the lagoon,” whis- 
pered Charley to Jack. 

‘‘ There is still another form of coral reef,” con- 
tinued the captain, “ consisting of a ringlike reef en- 
circling a lagoon or lake. This is known as an atoll. 

‘‘ All these different forms of coral reefs,” con- 
tinued the captain, had been observed long before it 
was discovered that the coral animals were unable to 
live in the ocean except in water not deeper than 
twenty-five fathoms, or a hundred and twenty-five 
feet.” 

As the captain was about to proceed, Harold in- 
terrupted, asking his uncle if it were known why the 
coral polyp could not live in deep water. 

‘‘ Yes, Harold,” was the reply. It is generally be- 
lieved that the animals cannot live at greater depths for 
want of sufficient light, for they need an abundance of 
light for vigorous growth. Then too, the coral polyps, 
149 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


at least such species as form reefs, cannot live in water 
whose temperature during the coldest winter months 
is lower than 68° F. 

This not only prevents coral formations from oc- 
curring except in the warmer waters of the ocean, 
but is also probably what prevents the animal from 
living in greater depths than one hundred and twenty- 
five feet, for below this depth, even in tropical waters, 
the temperature of the water is at times apt to become 
colder than 68° F. 

But,” continued the captain, there are other con- 
ditions necessary to permit the vigorous growth of 
the coral polyps from which reefs are formed. Since 
the polyps require various saline substances, especially 
salts of lime, the animals cannot live off portions of 
the shore reef that lie almost opposite the mouth of a 
large river, since here waters of the ocean are too much 
diluted with the fresh water of the river to supply the 
necessary lime. Then too, river water generally brings 
mud with it. This not only renders the water impure, 
but also deposits mud-banks or flats on which the 
animals cannot live.” 

‘‘ Is that the cause of breaks in the reef ? ” inquired 
Jack. 

Yes, Jack, that’s the general cause.” 

And is that what keeps the coral reef from grow- 
ing closer to the shore? ” asked Charley. 

‘‘ Yes,” was the reply. Now,” continued the cap- 
tain, “ when it was discovered that the coral animals 
could not begin growing where the water was over 

150 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


one hundred and twenty-five feet deep, it was, of 
course, necessary to modify the views held concerning 
the formation of coral islands. As far as the fringing 
reef was concerned there was no difficulty. Of course, 
the coral animals could begin growing on the bottom 
off the coast of any island where the necessary condi- 
tions of depth, temperature, and freedom from sedi- 
ment existed. It was not, however, so easy to ex- 
plain the formation of barrier reefs, encircling reefs, 
or atolls; for, as was then known, the bottom of the 
ocean in the neighborhood of any of these last three 
forms of coral reefs was far beyond the depth at which 
the animal could live. 

Numerous theories, some of which were very fool- 
ish, were proposed to explain the presence of shal- 
low portions of the ocean, so shaped as to permit the 
formation of barrier reefs, encircling reefs, or atolls. 
It would take me too long to describe these theories, 
nor is it worth my while to do so, since nobody to-day 
believes them. It may, however, interest you to know 
that at one time it was suggested that there exists on 
the bed of the ocean the rims or edges of the craters 
of extinct volcanoes, no farther below the surface 
than a hundred and twenty-five feet; that the coral 
animals began living on the edges of these craters, and 
being unable to extend or build over the deep waters 
of the craters or of the deep ocean beyond the craters, 
the reef at last acquired the form of the atoll. I 
need hardly tell you that such a theory would seem to 
be highly improbable, not only by reason of the im- 

151 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


mense number of coral islands that are found in dif- 
ferent parts of the waters of the tropics, but also be- 
cause of the great size such craters should possess; 
for there are many atolls in parts of the Pacific, the 
length of whose lagoons is from twenty to fifty miles 
across.’’ 

That’s so,” said Charley; in the case of Harding 
Island, the crater would have been sixteen miles across. 
That would certainly be a very big crater.” 

Captain,” said Jack, won’t you please let us 
have Darwin’s explanation of the circular shape of the 
reef of the atoll ? ” 

Yes, Jack,” replied the captain, ‘‘ I’m coming to 
Darwin’s theory now. Let us suppose an island, say 
about the same shape and form as the atoll that forms 
Harding Island, only a little smaller, was situated in a 
portion of the Pacific that was slowly sinking. Let us 
also suppose that a narrow ribbon or reef of coral, in 
other words, a fringing reef, began to be formed by the 
action of the waves a short distance off the coast. 
Now, provided the corals furnished the materials for 
the waves to build the reef upward as fast as the sink- 
ing of the island carried the reef downward, such a 
reef would continue to grow indefinitely. Of course, if 
the rate of sinking became too rapid the animals would 
die as soon as the waters became too deep, while if it 
was not sinking rapidly enough the animals would die 
on their first exposure, during low tide, to the heat of 
the tropical sun. 

But let us suppose that the upward growth of the 

152 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


reef as formed by the waves, is exactly equal to the 
downward motion caused by the sinking of the island. 
Then, of course, as the island sinks the distance be- 
tween the reef and the shore increases, the reef 
meanwhile grows slightly broader, thus forming the 
barrier reef. The barrier reef would then extend far- 
ther around the island, and at last would more or less 
completely surround it, thus forming the encircling 
reef. The island would then consist of a coral reef en- 
circling an ordinary island, for now only the highest 
points of the land of the original island would remain 
above the waters. Finally, these would disappear and 
we would have a more or less circular coral reef sur- 
rounding a clear space in the ocean. 

‘‘ Now, Harold,” continued the captain, can you 
tell me what might have been seen at different periods 
of time during the formation of Harding Island ? ” 
Yes, uncle,” was the reply. When the reefs 
first began to form there would have been seen an 
island about the size of the Harding lagoon with a 
fringing reef near parts of its shores. Then, many 
thousands of years afterward, the same island might 
have been seen with a longer and broader barrier reef. 
But it is now smaller, and the distance between the 
reef and its coast much greater. At a later period, 
perhaps many thousands of years afterward, the 
original island has almost disappeared, and can be seen 
surrounded by an encircling reef. Finally, there would 
be seen what we see now — a coral reef surrounding the 
lagoon.” 


153 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Capital, Harold,” said the captain. “ I think you 
understand that very well.” 

I believe I do, uncle,” replied Harold, much pleased 
with the captain’s praise. 

The boys were all greatly impressed with the beauty 
of Darwin’s theory. 

Then, according to Darwin, captain,” said Jack, 
instead of coral islands marking as the poets declare 
the site of so much land gained from the ocean, they 
are only the tombstones of sunken islands, on which 
one can read this inscription : 

‘‘ ‘ Here lies a sunken island. This (the shape of the 
reef) was the shape of its coast, and this (an opening 
through the reef) was the part of the coast through 
which a large river emptied.’ ” 

Hello, Jack,” said Charley, “ you’re getting quite 
poetic. Let me put it another way, captain. Suppose 
I attempt to be dramatic and describe the four different 
scenes at different times around Harding Island : 

Scene I. Harding Island. Size and shape about 
that of the present lagoon. Small fringing reefs near 
the coast. 

“ Scene II. Many thousands of years later. Hard- 
ing Island still in sight, but smaller. Barrier reef seen 
off the coast. 

'' Scene III. Another few thousand years later. A 
little bit of Harding Island visible. The higher por- 
tions seen above the middle of the lagoon as four small 
islands, each surrounded by an encircling reef. 

Scene IV. Another few thousand vears later. Or, 

154 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


perhaps, many thousands,” he said laughing, “ Hard- 
ing Island entirely gone. No land at all. Only a la- 
goon left surrounded by a coral reef and its lagoon 
islands. I say, captain,” he continued, “ is the com- 
pleted coral island called an atoll because there is no 
land, at all, left of the original island ? ” 

When Charley got off this awful joke, Jack and 
Harold began punching him good-naturedly, and the 
captain laughingly said : 

I believe, Charley, that the word atoll is used in 
the language of the Maidive Islanders. I don’t know 
just what it means.” 

The boys were greatly pleased at what they had 
learned concerning coral islands. 

It’s very strange, uncle,” said Harold, “ that I have 
been able to find no book on coral islands in the library. 
I looked several times but could not see them, although 
I think I remember several such books that were in the 
library on the brig, and I think I remember seeing them 
in our library here.” 

That’s correct, Harold,” said the captain smiling. 
“ Let me confess that I’ve hid all of these books. I 
wished Charley and Jack to try to puzzle out this mat- 
ter independently of books.” He then brought out a 
number of books on coral islands, especially Dana’s 
excellent treatise on Corals and Coral Islands.” 

‘‘ Look at this picture,” he said. It shows a sec- 
tion of a coral island through the land from the ocean 
to the lagoon. As you can see, the island consists of 
the following parts : 


155 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ I. The shore platform, from ‘ a ’ to ‘ b/ This lies 
between the lower part of the sand beach, and the 
deeper part of the ocean. It is covered, as you know, 
by fairly shallow water at high tide. The greater part 
is bare at low tide, with here and there places covered 
by a few inches, and sometimes by a foot, of water. 

2. The beach. This consists of coral pebbles, sand, 
and worn and bleached shells, the bones of fishes, etc. 

3. The emerged land. This extends beyond the 
beach, between ‘ c ’ and * d.' It consists of portions of 
the reef that have been thrown above the highest point 



Section of the Rim of an Atoll 

of the beach by the waves, and have in places been made 
still higher by sand being blown over them by the 
winds. Here, the soil is formed mainly from coral 
sand, and in it the luxuriant vegetation of the island 
grows. 

4. The shore of the lagoon. This also consists of 
a beach and submerged platform, that in the case of an 
island without any connection with the ocean remain 
covered with water, but where there is a free communi- 
cation with the ocean by breaks in the reef, is more or 
less uncovered or dry at low tide. Beyond this plat- 
form the waters of the lagoon rapidly deepen. 

“ 5. The lagoon, a clear body of water partially or 
completely surrounded by the island reef.” 

156 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ But, captain,” said Jack, how about the higher 
portion of Harding Island in the neighborhood of 
Parker Cliffs?” 

Yes, how about this part? ” repeated Charley. 

” I think this portion of the island,” said the captain, 
“ is higher than the rest because it has been suddenly 
elevated, probably by an earthquake. This is not un- 
usual in some parts of the Pacific. But what is odd 
about Harding Island is that only one portion of the 
island has been elevated. For this reason, I believe, a 
careful examination of the reef would show two places 
where the lower part of the reef has been fissured or 
broken away from the higher part during this sudden 
elevation.” 

‘‘ We must look for those cracks, boys,” said Jack, 
turning to his companions. 

Captain,” inquired Charley, I suppose, of course, 
the four islands in the lagoon of Harding Island were 
formed in the same manner?” 

“We will make an excursion to-morrow to these 
islands and see what help they will give us in an- 
swering this question.” 


157 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XII 

The Islands of the Harding Lagoon 

They were off early next morning in boat No. 13 to 
visit the islands in the lagoon. As already stated, this 
visit was to permit the boys to draw their own conclu- 
sions as to the origin of these islands. Of course, the 
captain might readily have directly explained their 
origin, but he knew by experience that information 
based on personal reasoning and observation is far 
more complete than that acquired by mere explana- 
tions. Since they expected to be absent an entire day, 
and, indeed, if necessary were ready to spend the night 
on one of the islands, they took some food and a few 
cooking utensils. Hiram accompanied them, and even 
Rompey and Satan were not left behind. 

As they intended to make soundings, Hiram had 
brought a sounding-line, and the boys had their fishing- 
lines which, indeed, were kept in the boat as a regular 
part of its equipment. 

Since the discovery of the underground connection 
or opening between the ocean outside Harding Island 
and the main lagoon, and since it was evident from the 
size and the depth of the underground passage into 
which Harold had fallen while in the limestone grotto, 
that the flow of water through it was fairly great, they 
expected to find a tide in the main lagoon. Indeed, 

158 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


on looking for such a tide they discovered that a small 
difference of level existed between the waters of Hard- 
ing Lagoon and the ocean. 

As the captain pointed out, if the underground pas- 
sage was the only connection between the ocean and 
the lagoon, with the trifling exception of the low parts 
of the reef near Jackson Harbor where, at high tide, 
the waves occasionally dashed over the beach into the 
lagoon, there was apparently no other connection, then 
the velocity with which the water must pour through 
the channel between the ocean and the lagoon must 
result in a rapid wearing away or enlargement of the 
opening. 

“ Do you think it possible,” inquired Jack of the cap- 
tain, ‘‘ that the time may come when this undermining 
of the cliffs will be followed by their caving in? ” 

“ Such a thing is not at all improbable. Jack,” re- 
plied the captain. As to just when such an event will 
occur will of course depend entirely on the size of the 
subterranean passageway as well as the extent to which 
this portion of the reef has also been honeycombed by 
the rain-water. By our exploration of the grotto and 
cave immediately above the passageway, we know the 
honeycombing of a portion of the mass of limestone 
has been considerable, so that the time of their caving 
in may not be distant.” 

But,” suggested Charley, ‘‘ suppose an earthquake, 
such as I understood you to say probably caused the 
elevation of this portion of the island, should again 
occur ? ” 


159 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ In such a case,” said the captain, “ I believe a cav- 
ing in would be almost certain.” 

“ Harding Island would then be provided with a 
magnificent harbor where large vessels could enter,” 
said Jack. This would greatly increase its value, 
would it not ? ” 

Yes,” said the captain; but it would at the same 
time probably result in the visiting of the island by the 
inhabitants of the neighboring islands of this portion 
of the Pacific, and in their eventually settling on it.” 

“ Would that be good for us. Uncle Arthur,” in- 
quired Harold, or would it be bad ? ” 

That would depend on who the visitors were,” was 
the reply. “ If cannibals, I fear it would be bad for 
you ; for, being both young and tender, I think it likely 
you would be the first one of us they would eat.” 

You needn’t try to frighten me that way, uncle,” 
exclaimed Harold indignantly, and yet at the same time 
there was some little anxiety in the tone of his voice, 
indicating that he hoped it would be a long time be- 
fore the caving-in occurred. Indeed, this was indi- 
cated by a remark he made after apparently thinking 
for a few moments of what the captain had told him, 
for he said : ‘‘ Then, uncle, I hope Parker Cliffs do not 
fall in.” 

Never mind, Harold,” said Jack in a jollying 
tone, even if they don’t fall in, some of the can- 
nibals may visit the island taking the risk of landing 
on it, breakers or no breakers, and harbor or no har- 
bor, so you have a chance of being eaten after all.” 
i6o 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


As has already been stated, the four islands of the 
Harding Lagoon extended from a point near the east- 
ern shore from the southeast to the northwest in a 
nearly straight line midway between the northern and 
southern shores. The two largest islands, the Twins, 
were nearer the east, while the smaller ones, Rompey 
and Satan, were west of them. 

Since, as the captain suggested, there would proba- 
bly be more to see on the larger islands, they directed 
the boat toward the easternmost of the Twins, or Twin 
Island No. i. 

‘‘ Captain,” said Jack, suppose we call the eastern- 
most of the Kids, Kid Island No. i, and the western- 
most, Kid Island No. 2 ” ; and then turning to the 
boys, he said in a bantering tone : ‘‘ Which of you will 
be Kid No. I, Harold or Charley?” 

‘‘ Wait until Harold and I get you alone. Jack,” 
whispered Charley good-naturedly. “ We’ll settle that 
question then.” 

As the boat proceeded slowly along the edge of the 
shore platform of the lagoon of Harding Island they 
could see here and there growths of different species 
of coral animals. These were especially interesting 
to them now they knew something about the formation 
of coral islands. In portions of the shallow waters 
near the shore where they could see that the bottom was 
covered with sand, there was an absence of these 
animals. 

While proceeding toward the Twin Islands they 
made a number of soundings, and found the bottom 

L 161 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


was not reached until the line had been run out to 
from twenty-five to thirty-five fathoms, or from one 
hundred and fifty to two hundred and ten feet. It 
did not appear from these, as well as from subsequent 
soundings, that the bottom of the lagoon was very ir- 
regular. The depth was nearly the same in all places 
at several hundred feet from the shore ; namely, thirty- 
five fathoms, or two hundred and ten feet. 

When they reached the easternmost end of Twin Is- 
land No. I, instead of landing, the captain suggested 
that they should take the boat to that part of Parker 
Cliffs near where they supposed the passageway from 
the ocean entered the lagoon. 

We are in no hurry,” he said. ‘‘ While here we 
might as well more carefully examine this part of the 
cliffs.” Then, turning to the boys, he remarked: ‘‘ If 
you are ever in this part of the lagoon without Hiram 
or myself, never go near the shore in the neighborhood 
of the opening. The current from the lagoon to the 
ocean might be sufficiently strong to suck you in. As 
the tide is now at its lowest point, I think we can safely 
take the boat along the shore. We may in this way be 
able to locate the opening, and thus know the exact 
part of the shore that must be avoided when the tide 
is flowing out.” 

They rowed the boat toward a portion of the high 
limestone rocks around Parker Cliffs, about half a mile 
northwest of Hiram Harbor. They had never before 
been in this portion of the shores of the lagoon. The 
day they had discovered the underground passage they 
162 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


had afterward descended to the shores of the lagoon at 
a point one mile farther to the north. As the boat ap- 
proached the shore they could see that, at this part of 
the coast, there were bluffs or cliffs resembling those al- 
' ready examined on the ocean side. These cliffs had 
been eaten away by the rain-water as it ran into the 
lagoon in a manner similar to the cliffs on the other 
side. Moreover, the groovings apparently extended 
several miles to the northwest. Taking the boat along 
the bluffs they at last discovered an opening through 
which the water of the lagoon was beginning slowly to 
flow through the cliffs toward the ocean. The top of 
the opening was only a few feet above the level of the 
water. 

“ I need not tell you,’’ said the captain, that it 
would be dangerous if the boat were sucked into this 
opening. Since, however, the current is now weak, we 
will take a sounding here. If, as I expect to find, the 
water is deep, it will enable us roughly to estimate the 
extent of the channel between the lagoon and the 
ocean.” 

To their great surprise the lagoon at this point 
showed a depth of one hundred fathoms or six hun- 
dred feet. Greatly surprised at the extent of the 
opening, the captain, turning to Hiram, said : 

I think we had better get quickly out of this neigh- 
borhood, Hiram.” 

'' I reckon yer right,” replied Hiram, ‘‘ onless ye 
want to take the boat into that ’ere opening.” 

‘‘ Not to-day,” replied the captain. 

163 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


So they rapidly rowed the boat away from the 
opening. 

As the boat proceeded toward the easternmost of the 
Twin Islands, or Twin Island No. i, they could see the 
waters of the Harding Lagoon, ruffled by the south- 
eastern winds, break in waves against a low piece of 
beach, the only part of the island that was not covered 
with dense vegetation. 

The high tide must flow over that part of Twin 
Island No. i, into its lagoon,” remarked the captain. 

‘‘ Boys,” he continued, when the boat reached a 
point midway between the two twin islands, and had 
landed it on the western shore of Twin Island No. i, 
“ I wish you to make it a rule never to pass the eastern 
shores of Twin Island No. i when the tide is at the 
ebb, or flowing toward the ocean. At the flood tide, 
when the water is flowing in from the ocean, there will 
be no danger.” 

Anchoring the boat on the western coast where the 
waves or breakers were almost entirely absent, they 
were soon on the island. The island had a lagoon at 
its center, and was a curious reproduction in miniature 
of Harding Island. It had a reef encircling a lagoon 
of the same general shape as the Harding Lagoon. It 
was a wooded island and, except toward the east, had 
a luxuriant vegetation of cocoanut palms as well as 
the other characteristic vegetation of the larger island. 
It even showed a miniature shore platform both on the 
outside of the reef in the main lagoon as well as inside 
it in its own lagoon. Besides this, there were beaches 
164 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


of the same white coral sand on both the outside and 
the inside of the encircling reef. Walking directly 
across the island to its lagoon, they observed that the 
waters of the lagoon closely resembled in depth of 
color those of the main lagoon. 

The lagoon of this island,’' said the captain, ‘‘ is 
connected with the waters of the main lagoon. Yes, 
it is as I thought,” he continued, after having carefully 
scanned the waters of its lagoon with his glasses. 
See,” he said to Hiram, handing him the glasses, 
there is a low part of the reef that is now quite dry. 
At high tide there should be from three to four inches 
of water flowing into the lagoon.” 

The break referred to by the captain was situated on 
the easternmost end of the island, so that the waters 
which entered its lagoon would consist for a large part 
of the waters brought by the high tide from the out- 
side ocean through the opening in Parker Cliffs into the 
Harding Lagoon. 

The saltness of the waters of this little lagoon,” 
said the captain, should closely resemble those of the 
outer ocean. I think that we shall find here a fairly 
vigorous growth of coral polyps.” 

The correctness of the captain’s opinion was shown 
by the numerous coral zoophytes they found growing 
in the waters near the shores. 

It was a warm day, and the waters were tempting to 
the boys so, obtaining permission from the captain, they 
were soon having a splendid swim. Indeed, as will be 
subsequently related, the boys found in another part 

165 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


of this lagoon a magnificent place for a swimming-pool. 

An abundance of precious coral, the name given to 
the beautiful pink variety of coral that is highly es- 
teemed for making ornaments for babies, was found 
growing in various parts of the somewhat deeper 
waters of the lagoon. In the still deeper waters, at a 
greater distance from the shore, what closely resembled 
oysters were seen growing. 

These are probably the species of oysters in which 
precious pearls are often found. We’ll come back here 
before long and try to get some of them. I am sure 
both Harold and Charley would like to take a lot of 
splendid pearls home for their mothers.” 

If we ever get home,” replied Harold sorrowfully. 

‘‘ Oh, we’ll get home somehow or other,” said 
Charley. 

Twin Island No. 2 was next visited. Here the vege- 
tation consisted of cocoanut palms and other vegeta- 
ble products like those of Harding Island and Twin 
Island No. i. Walking across the island to its lagoon, 
they at once noticed a marked difference in the appear- 
ance of its waters, which were of a blue color that was 
equal in intensity to the waters they had seen in the 
Kuro Sivo, or the Black Water of the Japan Current. 
Indeed, in places, the waters were of a reddish or cop- 
per color. 

Remembering the captain had told them, as has 
been related in ‘‘ Five Months on a Derelict,” that the 
dark blue color of the waters of the Japan Current, as 
well as that of the Gulf Stream and other deep por- 
166 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


tions of the ocean, is due to the increased saltness of 
the waters, Jack remarked: 

“ We’ll probably find no connection between the 
waters of this lagoon and those of the main lagoon. 
The color of the waters means very salt water, don’t 
it?” 

‘‘ That’s right, Jack,” said the captain, who had been 
examining the shores of the lagoon with his glasses, 
there’s no break. The waters are of a deep blue, and 
have apparently for a long time been increasing in 
density by evaporation. Indeed, were it not for the 
heavy rains that fall in this part of the world there 
would probably have been produced by this time a great 
bed of rock salt.” 

Captain,” said Charley, ‘‘ there are salt crystals on 
some portions of the shore,” pointing to white crys- 
tals that shone brightly when the sun fell on them. 

I wonder how much denser the waters of this 
lagoon are than those of the ocean,” said Jack. 

Did I not see you put several birds’ eggs in the 
boat as we were leaving this morning. Jack? ” said the 
captain. 

Yes, sir,” was the reply. “ Yesterday, before sup- 
per-time, Hiram asked me to get some eggs for our 
lunch to-day. Do you want them, captain ? ” 

Yes, go bring me one, please,” was the reply. 

Jack soon returned with one of the eggs, which he 
handed to the captain. The boys looked closely at what 
the captain would do. They knew he was clever with 
his experiments, but couldn’t imagine how he might 
167 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


answer Jack's question as to the density of the salt 
water of the lagoon by the use of a bird’s egg. 

Seeing that they were curious about the matter, the 
captain turned to Jack and said : 

“ Do you know, Jack, whether this egg would sink 
in ocean water? " 

“ I am not sure," was the reply. 

‘‘ But I am," said Charley. The other day as 
Harold and I were larking on the edge of the plateau 
facing the ocean, Harold, who had a stone in his hand, 
threw it in the ocean and, turning to me, said : 
' Charley, I don't believe you can throw that far.' I 
looked around for a stone but couldn’t find one, but I 
had an egg in my pocket, and I shied it into the water. 
I noticed it didn't sink, but floated with just a little of 
its surface above the water." 

‘‘ Thus proving," said Jack, “ what a poor throw 
you must have made, Charley, else how could you have 
seen in so far from the land." 

“ Because," said Charley laughing, the tide was 
coming in and brought the egg close to the shore from 
the mile or so to which I had thrown it." 

‘‘ I'm glad, Charley, you noticed the egg barely 
floated in the ocean water," said the captain. “ Now, 
boys," he added, ‘‘ as you all probably know, an egg 
will sink in fresh water, and Charley has told you it 
will float in the ocean with just a little of its surface 
above the water. If, then, the waters of this lagoon 
are much salter than those of the ocean, the egg will 
float with more of its surface out of the water. I’ll 

i68 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


throw the egg into the water here,” continued the cap- 
tain, and by observing how far it floats out of the 
water we can form some idea how much denser the 
water of the lagoon is than ocean water.” 

When thrown into the lagoon, the egg floated with a 
fairly large portion above the level of the water. 

Did you invent that. Uncle Arthur ? ” asked 
Harold. 

No, Harold,” was the reply, it is the principle of 
a device called the hydrometer, a well-known instru- 
ment for determining the density of liquids.” 

Captain,” inquired Charley smiling, “ is there any 
objection to Jack, Harold, and I becoming human 
hydrometers ? ” 

‘‘ Do you mean, Charley,” said the captain laughing, 
whether I object to you and Harold taking a swim in 
the salty waters of this lagoon ? ” 

Yes,” replied Charley. ‘‘ I have read that in the 
Dead Sea the water is so salt it is difficult to sink in it, 
even though one tries to do so. I understand its waters 
are eight times sal ter than the waters of the ocean.” 

The captain not objecting, the boys were soon un- 
dressed and taking a bath in the salt water. It was, 
indeed, wonderfully buoyant. The boys were quite at 
home in the water, so stretching themselves on their 
backs floated about on it like logs. They also made 
several attempts at swimming, but were surprised how 
far the head and shoulders remained above the level 
of the water, and when they tried to sink in the water 
they found it almost impossible. 

169 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Determined that he would get below the surface, 
Charley climbed on Jack’s shoulders, and making a 
splendid dive, completely disappeared, but the rapidity 
with which he was shortly afterward shot upward was 
so great that his body was nearly half out of the water. 

Pleased with his success, Charley cried out to 
Harold : 

“ Harold, it’s ” but sank again so rapidly that 

before completing the word great ” he was about to 
utter, his head was carried below the surface while his 
mouth was open. 

Charley came up spluttering and spitting the water 
out of his mouth. 

“ It’s what, Charley? ” inquired Jack laughing. 

Horribly disgusting,” was the remark. ‘‘ Try it 
for yourself, Jack,” he replied and, taking advantage 
of Jack’s mouth being wide open, while guffawing at 
the expression of Charley’s countenance, he threw a 
double handful of water squarely into it. 

Serves me right,” said Jack good-naturedly, spit- 
ting it out. “ Ugh ! what a horrible taste ! I guess 
I’ll get out. I’ve had a long-enough swim.” 

The captain and Hiram had been amused specta- 
tors of the boys’ novel swim. By the time they were 
dressed, Hiram had good-naturedly gone to the boat 
and brought fresh water, so they had an opportunity 
of rinsing out their mouths. 

“ By the way, boys,” said the captain, water as salt 
as this acts as a tonic, and is excellent in case of rheu- 
matism. If, therefore, any of you should ever be so 
170 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


unfortunate as to become rheumatic, which is not im- 
probable in the low land of a coral island, remember 
that a bath in this lagoon may be of much value.” 

There yet remained the two smaller islands, or islets, 
as they are sometimes called ; namely, '' Rompey ” and 
“ Satan,” or as Jack called them, The Kids.” “ Kid 
Island No. i,” or “ Rompey Island,” as already stated 
lay immediately west of Twin Island No. i,” and was 
very much smaller than either of the twins. 

On landing and crossing this island toward its 
center they found that its lagoon had almost completely 
disappeared by evaporation ; for the water was shallow 
and occupied only a small portion near the middle, 
while between the water and the shore the bottom was 
covered with soft mud. In the immediate neighborhood 
of the shores were collections of crystals of the salty 
substances deposited on the evaporation of the water. 

• The waters of the lagoon had completely disap- 
peared on Kid Island No. 2 or Satan Island, which they 
next visited. In other words, it was a lagoonless 
island. Here the bed of the lagoon had dried up com- 
pletely, and consisted of a mass of salty substances 
covered in places with beds of coral sand. 

Great numbers of birds had visited this island for 
the purpose of breeding, laying their eggs in the sand. 
It was breeding-time, and thousands of them had col- 
lected in separate flocks on different parts of the bed 
of the old lagoon. There were also large deposits of 
guano which, as the captain explained, was a valuable 
fertilizer. 

17 1 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Some of these days,” said the captain, “ when we 
start our vegetable and flower garden, we may find 
it worth while to enrich the soil by mixing it with 
guano, which is splendid for that purpose.”* 

It must not be forgotten that the object of their visit 
to the smaller islands was, if possible, to determine their 
origin. Now both the Twin Islands had practically 
the same formation as Harding Island. There was 
an encircling reef, a lagoon, and a shore platform in 
both lagoons. There was, moreover, a beach on both 
the outside and inside of the island. The same things 
too were found on the Kid Islands, only by reason 
of the small size of the lagoons, their waters had in 
one instance almost, and in the other completely, dis- 
appeared. It seemed, therefore, almost certain, from 
what they had seen, that the formation of each was 
similar to that of Harding Island itself. That the 
highest land in the original island, consisting of a 
range of elevations extending from the southeast to the 
northwest, had not disappeared until fringing reefs, 
barrier reefs, and encircling reefs had formed around 
them; so that when the highest tops of the old island 
disappeared, the coral reefs continuing to grow, each 
enclosed a body of water like that of the parent island. 

As the captain pointed out, these lagoon islets — a 
general name given to small islets formed inside a 
lagoon — were not uncommon in certain parts of the 
Pacific. 

They are,” said the captain, ‘‘ what Dana calls 
‘ gems within gems.’ ” 


172 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XIII 
The Swimming-pool 

The boys had so greatly enjoyed their swim in the la- 
goon of Twin Island No. i that they frequently referred 
to it both while on their way back to Jackson House 
as well as at supper. Indeed, they were so desirous of 
taking another swim at the earliest possible moment, 
that they had obtained the captain’s permission to 
spend the remainder of the next day on this island as 
soon as they had finished the day’s work. Knowing 
that people are happy only when fairly busy, the 
captain had assigned daily duties not only to Hiram 
and himself, but also to the boys. For example, it 
was the boys’ work to bring water from the spring to 
Hiram for cooking, to see that both boats were kept 
supplied with an abundance of fresh water and food. 
They were also charged with keeping the house clean ; 
making the beds; and giving Hiram such help when 
preparing food for cooking, as he might wish. Then, 
again, it was the boys who gathered the cocoanuts, col- 
lected fresh birds’ eggs, and caught fish for the table. 

“ Won’t you and Hiram go with us, captain ? ” asked 
Jack at the supper table, when the captain had given 
them permission to have the day to themselves. 

No,” was the reply, “ we both have some matters 
that must be attended to.” 


173 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“If you would like us to help you, captain?” in- 
quired Jack, “we can put the swim off for another 
day.” 

“ No,” was the reply. “ There is no reason why you 
should not spend the balance of to-morrow on Twin 
Island No. I and have a good time. If you discover 
anything new either in the way of plants or animals, 
bring specimens with you if possible.” 

It was not yet ten o’clock next day when, having 
finished their work, they pushed the boat from the 
landing and started for the island, with Jack as leader 
of the party. The captain had thoroughly instilled in 
the minds of the boys the principle that in any expedi- 
tion or excursion when either he or Hiram was not 
with them, they must select one of their number as 
leader. As he explained to them, this was always done 
among men, and there was no reason why boys should 
not adopt the same plan. That, when they had selected 
their leader, since he would be held responsible for 
the safety of the party, it was necessary that he should 
be promptly obeyed in all things. 

When the three boys were together, Jack was natu- 
rally selected as their leader. He was much older than 
either of the others and, therefore, more reliable. 
Although fond of chaffing, he was much liked by both 
the younger boys. 

Of course, there was a difference between the cap- 
tain and Jack as a leader. Although the boys promptly 
obeyed Jack in all necessary orders, yet they did not 
hesitate to jolly him and have such times with him as 

174 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


boys generally have when they are out for fun. Ta- 
king everything into consideration, therefore, they got 
along very pleasantly and agreeably with Jack as their 
leader. 

“ Boys,’^ said Jack, as they were nearing the island, 
“ I suppose we’ll get at least two good swims to-day.” 

“ And a sun-bath,” suggested Harold. 

But the sun-bath is not to count as a swim,” sug- 
gested Charley. 

‘‘ Agreed ! ” shouted the other boys in unison. 

“We had no chance of examining the part of the 
island where, during high tide, the waters pour over 
the land from the outside lagoon,” said Jack. “ If 
there is any kind of a waterfall at this place, it’ll be 
jolly fun when we go in swimming to take a shower- 
bath.” 

“ That will be splendid,” said Charley. 

“ You bet it will,” added Harold. 

“ It’ll be high tide in about two hours from now,” 
said Charley. “ There will be plenty of time to land 
and walk around the island before taking our bath. 
Where shall we land. Jack?” he continued, address- 
ing the leader. 

“We had better land on the western side of the 
island as the captain wishes us always to do, during 
the running out of the tide. We do not know how long 
we will be on the island, and don’t wish to be com- 
pelled to hurry away for fear the ebb tide is becoming 
too strong.” 

When they landed, instead of walking to the break 

175 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


in the reef where they intended having a swim — along 
the southern half of the island, in the route they had 
taken on the preceding day — they followed the north- 
ern half, since, as Jack remarked, this would give them 
the opportunity of examining the remaining portions 
of the island. ^ 

“ I say, Jack,” exclaimed Charley, as they were 
walking over a part of the island where the soil was 
unusually deep, “ this is not coral sand, is it ? It’s 
much darker in color, and instead of being white on 
die inside like all the soil we have seen, is quite black; 
at least,” he added, “ the large particles are.” 

‘‘ You’re right, Charley,” said Jack, examining the 
piece that Charley had broken in two, ‘‘ This is not 
coral sand. It is like the volcanic ashes Harold and I 
saw while on the brig off the Aleutian Islands.” 

Whatever it is,” said Charley, “ it seems to make 
a rich soil.” 

‘‘ It certainly does,” replied Jack. Indeed, the 
captain told us that some of the richest soils in the 
world consisted of weathered volcanic ashes.” 

Proceeding now toward the east they reached a por- 
tion where the depth of the soil was greater than any- 
thing they had yet seen. Here the cocoanut palms and 
other vegetation were unusually luxuriant. While 
walking through this part of the island they came to a 
place characterized by a strange absence of trees. This 
absence, however, was not due to a lack of fertility of 
the soil, as could be seen from the richness of its vege- 
tation. 


176 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ If I did not believe,” said Jack, '' that Harding 
Island is uninhabited except by our party, I would say 
this looked remarkably like a clearing.” 

‘‘ It certainly does,” said Charley. 

Look here,” cried Harold, who had gone a short 
distance ahead, and came running to them with a*^ 
plant in each hand, “ what do you think of these ? 
Onions growing on a coral island.” Holding out his 
right hand and showing a splendid specimen of that 
plant with long green stalks and a bulb fully two and a 
half inches in diameter. And also sweet potatoes ! 
What do you say to this for a sweet potato ? ” he said, 
holding out a potato that certainly weighed nearly five 
pounds. 

“ They are both beauties,” answered Jack. YouVe 
made a great discovery, Harold.” 

‘‘How did these things get here. Jack?” inquired 
Harold. 

“ I guess they grew, Harold,” said Jack laughing. 

“ Oh, come,” exclaimed Harold, “ no fooling. Jack. 
How do you suppose they got here.” 

“ Well, Harold,” said Jack more seriously, “ I sup- 
pose they were planted here.” 

“ By whom ? ” persisted Harold. 

“ By the man or men who made this clearing.” 

“ So you think it’s a clearing, do you ? ” inquired 
Harold. 

“ I think so,” replied Jack. “ What do you say, 
Charley ? ” he continued, turning to him. 

“ I know it’s a clearing,” said Charley. 

M 177 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Hello,” exclaimed Jack. ‘‘ How do you know 
that, Charley?” 

By this,” was the reply, pointing to the stump of 
a cocoanut tree that had been covered with a creeping 
vine. ‘‘ As you can see, this tree has been cut down. 
Look at the marks of the axe.” 

The evidence was indeed conclusive. Axe marks 
could be distinctly traced on the stump that was left 
standing in the ground. 

“ You’re right, Charley,” said Jack. And look 
here, this vine which covers the tree looks something 
like the sweet potato vine that I have often seen 
growing in England. Let’s dig at its roots and see 
if we can find any tubers.” 

It was not a sweet potato vine, although it somewhat 
resembled one. Uncovering its roots a number of 
tubers were seen resembling sweet potatoes, only very 
much larger. 

“ I think it looks like what in Western Australia is 
called the yam,” remarked Charley. A yam is like 
a sweet potato and can be eaten when either baked or 
boiled.” 

“ They are pretty large at any rate,” said Harold. 

I should think this fellow,” he said, raising one with 
difficulty from the ground, must weigh nearly a 
hundred pounds.” 

Let’s build a fire and cook one of them for dinner,” 
suggested Harold. 

I think we had better wait until we show it to the 
captain,” replied Jack. Some tubers are poisonous. 
178 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


I hardly think this will be, since it has evidently been 
cultivated. However, we will take no risks and will, 
therefore, show it to the captain before eating it.” 

An examination of the clearing — for it was evidently 
a clearing — showed that it had been used as a vege- 
table garden ; for, besides large-sized beets, they found, 
almost choked by a dense growth of native plants, 
specimens of aromatic garden herbs, such as thyme, 
sage, and parsley. 

Rompey, who had of course accompanied them, 
showed some excitement whenever they came near the 
eastern boundary of the clearing. Here he ran from 
place to place, growling, as if he had detected some- 
thing that did not please him. He acted, however, 
as though he was undecided about the matter and 
finally appeared to come to the conclusion that he was 
mistaken, and that everything was right. 

How about that swim. Jack,” said Harold. ‘‘ We 
have been here now for so long a time that we’ll miss 
the best of the high tide if we don’t look out.” 

I am not sure, Harold,” said Jack, but that we 
should stay here and look carefully to see what evi- 
dences there are of any one having ever lived here. 
What do you say, Charley; shall we give up the swim 
and spend the rest of the day in this part of the island, 
or shall we leave this work until the captain and Hiram 
come, as they probably will to-morrow or the next 
day.” 

‘‘ Just as you say. Jack,” replied Charley. “ But a 
swim would be nice, wouldn’t it? ” 

179 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘Very well,” said Jack laughing; “but first let’s 
collect some of the onions, sweet potatoes, yams, beets, 
and herbs, and place them so that we can get them on 
our return.” 

As soon as this was done, without examining the 
portion of the island lying between the clearing and the 
northeastern coasts, the boys made their way to the 
shores of the lagoon, and rapidly walking along it, soon 
reached the portion of the coast lying on the eastern 
side of the island opposite Parker Cliffs. 

It was high tide. They were now on that portion of 
the eastern coast that was devoid of vegetation, and 
which, as already mentioned, was lower than the re- 
mainder. Here, at the lowest part of the reef where 
the distance between the outer and inner lagoons was 
in the neighborhood of only fifty feet, a portion of the 
solid limestone had been cut or worn away, so as to 
form a channel through which the waters from the 
outer lagoon were pouring into the smaller lagoon. 
The depth of water in the channel was about three 
inches. 

They were disappointed at first in finding that, con- 
trary to Jack’s expectations, the water did not pour 
over the edge of the channel in a waterfall, but dis- 
charged immediately into the lagoon. They could 
not, therefore, enjoy the shower-bath Jack had referred 
to. But in this, as in many happenings in life, that 
which actually existed was far better than what they 
had hoped to find. 

Take a lively boy and show him something he has 
i8o 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


never seen before, that is capable of being utilized for 
his pleasure, and note in how wonderfully short a time 
he will get fun out of it If this is true of one boy, it is 
much truer where there are three boys as bright and 
jolly as the three who were standing undressed on the 
edge of the channel near its higher end. 

Charley, who was by far the quickest of the boys 
to see how things of this kind could be utilized, had 
already assured himself that the water was quite 
deep at the lower end of the channel where it emptied 
into the lagoon, and that all portions of the channel in 
the solid limestone were almost as smooth as a piece 
of polished marble, quickly made up his mind what to 
do. Sitting down in the channel with his face toward 
the lower end, he experienced the novel but delightful 
sensation of being rapidly swept over the smooth sur- 
face of the channel in which he was sitting until he was 
unceremoniously dumped into the deep waters of the 
small lagoon. 

I am sure I need not tell my boy readers, that as 
soon as Jack and Harold saw the success attending 
Charley’s utilization of the channel they followed him. 
Soon, all three boys were rapidly sliding, one after 
another, down the great natural sliding-board of their 
swimming-pool on the eastern end of Twin Island 
No. I. 

'' Talk about sliding-boards,” cried Harold. This 
beats them all ! ” 

As was natural, each boy tried to vary the method 
of sliding down the channel. Jack tried to slide down 
i8i 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


standing erect, and indeed succeeded in maintaining an 
upright position until he was midway between the 
waters of the two lagoons, when the motion of his 
feet becoming greater than that of the rest of his body 
he suddenly sat down in the water so quickly that he 
made the rest of the journey on the flat of his back, and 
was soon dumped into the smaller lagoon. 

** Try it again. Jack,” said Charley, as Jack emerged 
from the water, “ and lean backward like this,” he con- 
tinued, starting from the top and beginning to slide 
down the channel. 

Charley’s method was successful, and reaching the 
end he was able to make, as it were, a running dive into 
the water. 

After enjoying the sliding-board for nearly half an 
hour they walked along a portion of the platform at 
the edge of the smaller lagoon to a place where the 
water was quite deep, so as to permit them to dive 
directly into the lagoon. 

What a splendid place this would be for a spring- 
ing-board,” exclaimed Harold. If the captain and 
Hiram come to-morrow to loOk at the clearing, as I 
think they will, we’ll get Hiram to build us a springing- 
board here.” 

Now, let’s take a sun-bath,” said Charley. ‘‘ We 
won’t put our clothes on. There is sure to be some- 
thing in the water we’ll want to get. Besides, we have 
hardly been in longer than an hour, and if we stay out 
for a while and get warm, there will be no objection 
to our taking another swim, will there. Jack?” 

182 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ I think not/’ replied Jack. ‘‘ You know we agreed 
to take two swims.” 

Adopting Charley’s suggestion they wandered along 
the beach of the lagoon until, coming to a place where 
the sand was unusually fine and soft, the two younger 
boys, as they had agreed to do, suddenly jumped on 
Jack, and after no little struggle, for Jack was quite 
strong, threw him on his back, and sitting on him com- 
menced good-naturedly to pommel him. The boys did 
this because they wished to get even with the kidding 
Jack had given them when he wanted to know which 
of them should have the smaller of the Kid Islands 
named after him. 

Jack did his best to break away from the youngsters, 
but while he could easily have managed one of them 
alone, he was unable to cope with the two together; 
for they were both well-developed boys, and their life 
in the open air, both on the brig and since, had greatly 
strengthened them. When, therefore, Charley cried: 

** Have. you had enough, Jack? Will you take back 
what you said about our being kids ? ” 

Jack cried good-naturedly: 

Yes, I’ve had enough. I acknowledge you two are 
more than I can manage. Let me up.” 

They now crossed the channel and continued their 
walk along the shores of the lagoon in the opposite 
direction, and again entering the waters were soon 
swimming in the deep water near the shore. What 
rendered the swimming so pleasant was the wonderful 
clearness of the water; for in the waters of this por- 

183 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


tion of the lagoon there was an almost complete ab- 
sence of sediment, so that, wherever the surface was 
unruffled by the wind, they could distinctly see objects 
no larger than one of their hands in water at a depth 
of fifty or even sixty feet 

Besides the numerous species of differently colored 
coral polyps, they saw among other objects visible on 
the bottom of the lagoon a number of the oysters the 
captain had told them on the previous day were of the 
species apt to contain precious pearls. 

“ If we had a raft here,” said Jack, we could easily 
reach some of these oysters by diving.” 

“ Let’s ask Hiram to build us a raft,” said Charley. 
‘‘We can bring for this purpose some of the boards 
we got from the brig. A raft would be very convenient 
for going to different parts of the lagoon.” 

“ Especially,” said Jack, “ if at the same time he’ll 
rig up a sail with one of the blankets. We can then 
easily go from one part of the lagoon to another.” 

While swimming over one portion of the lagoon they 
came to a place where a number of pearl-oysters were 
growing in comparatively shallow water, being about 
fifteen feet in depth. 

“ Can you touch here. Jack? ” cried Charley. “ Let 
us see if we can get one of those oysters. I’m sure the 
captain would like to have it.” 

It would have been easy to reach the bottom at this 
place by diving, but it was difficult to do so from the 
surface while swimming, but after several unsuccessful 
efforts. Jack and Charley were each able to bring up a 
184 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


splendid specimen of pearl-oyster. Harold, who tried 
to do the same thing, was obliged to give up the task 
as too much for him. 

Now let’s see if these oysters contain any pearls,” 
said Jack, when the boys had reached the shore. 

“ How can we open them ? ” inquired Charley. 

We’ll loosen the shells by resting their edges 
against a fragment of limestone rock on a bare portion 
of the beach, and break it with a smaller piece of rock,” 
replied Jack. 

When this was done they opened the shells by means 
of the large blade of a penknife Jack got from his coat. 
Nothing was found in the first oyster, but in the second 
they found a fairly large pearl that was not only won- 
derfully clear and transparent, but also possessed the 
power of shining brilliantly when held in the sunlight. 
The light thus emitted was not like ordinary white 
sunlight, but displayed the rainbow colors or, as it is 
known in mineralogy, the pearl possessed iridescence. 

They took their second bath without having dressed 
after the first bath. On coming out of the water after 
this bath, they dressed and retraced their steps towards 
the boat, not forgetting to stop at the clearing for the 
vegetables and herbs they had collected, but also a 
specimen of the soil. Rompey again showed an un- 
easiness by barking when they passed the northeastern 
portion of the clearing but, as before, he soon quieted 
down, and appeared to be satisfied that he was again 
wrong in supposing there was anything objectionable 
in the neighborhood. 


185 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


When they reached the boat on Harding Lagoon on 
the western end of the island they started a fire and 
prepared and ate their dinner. Then, pushing off the 
boat, they rowed in the direction of Jackson House, 
where they arrived before supper-time, greatly pleased 
with the day and especially proud of the things they- 
were bringing back with them. 


i86 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XIV 

The Unburied Skeleton and his Buried 
Treasure 

It was, indeed, a splendid boatload of specimens they 
were bringing back with them. Naturally, therefore, 
the boys felt elated at their success. 

I wonder whether they will be more surprised or 
more pleased at what we have done, Jack?” in- 
quired Harold. 

The captain will be the more surprised when he 
hears of the clearing we have discovered, and Hiram 
will be the more pleased when he sees the cookable 
things we have brought him,” was the reply. 

You’re right there. Jack,” said Charley, “ but I 
think there is another thing that will surprise the cap- 
tain almost as much as the news of the clearing and its 
cultivation.” 

“ What’s that? ” inquired Jack. 

“ That we have failed to bring him information 
concerning the person or persons who cleared and 
planted the vegetable garden. They must surely have 
left some traces. We should at least have been able 
to find the house, if not the people themselves, pro- 
vided they are not dead or have not already left the 
island. I am sorry. Jack, that instead of encouraging 
you to look up this matter, I was so anxious to get a 

187 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


swim that I persuaded you to leave the search for 
another time.” 

'' Don’t take all the blame, Charley,” said Harold. 

It was I who first suggested taking a swim while the 
tide was high.” 

You’re right, Charley,” said Jack, ‘‘ we all acted 
boyishly in not making the search, but I am more to 
blame than either of you, since I am the leader. I 
think, however, there is no great harm done, but we 
must frankly acknowledge to the captain that we have 
acted very thoughtlessly.” 

“ Look, Jack,” said Harold, as the boat drew near 
the landing-place near the house. “ The captain and 
Hiram are both coming to meet us.” 

They anchored the boat at the landing as the two 
men reached the boat. 

“ Well, boys,” said the captain, did you have a 
good time? Have you anything of importance to 
report ? ” 

“ We have had a splendid time. Uncle Arthur,” cried 
Harold, ‘‘ and have much to tell you.” 

‘‘Look here, Hiram,” cried Charley, holding up a 
big sweet potato in one hand and a number of big 
onions in the other, “ do you think you can do any- 
thing with these ? ” 

“ Sartinly, my lad,” replied Hiram grinning. 
“ Pertaters and inyens. Whar did ye git them beau- 
ties? Hev ye been to an English market? I have 
heerd my messmates talk much about the kind of wege- 
tables wot grow in these parts, but I hain’t ever yet 
i88 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


heerd that pertaters and inyens grew so far from 
England.” 

The captain was greatly surprised at what Charley 
was holding up in his hand. 

“ Hiram,” he said, some one either still is or has 
been on Harding Island. Potatoes and onions don’t 
grow naturally so far south of the Equator, although 
they are both capable of being cultivated in these lati- 
tudes. Look at what Charley is holding up, Hiram,” 
as Charley held a huge beet whose weight was as much 
as he could manage, while Harold was exhibiting 
bunches of thyme, sage, and parsley. 

I see ’em, cap’n,” exclaimed Hiram, ‘‘ and am tar- 
nation glad ; for they’ll cook splendid. Ez to how they 
got here I kain’t say. I don’t deny, howsumever, that 
they hev been planted, as ye say.” 

Harold who had now dropped the herbs and was 
holding up one of the large yams, now cried to Hiram : 

‘‘ Do you know what this is, Hiram ? Can you roast 
it ? Is it good to eat ? ” 

Do I know a yam when I see it? ” replied Hiram. 

Many sich hev I prepared fer eatin’. I kain’t say yet 
whether I like ’em better roasted or biled; though, if 
well done, I think the fust method beats the second, 
fer a nice roasted yam is wery mealy and wery sweet.” 

‘‘ Come, Jack,” said the captain anxiously, ‘‘ tell me 
all about this wonderful discovery. Were there signs 
of a garden or clearing? Was the garden in good 
order as if it had been attended to recently? Let me 
hear about it.” 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


'‘There was a clearing,” replied Jack; "but the 
garden, for I think it was a vegetable garden, looked 
as if it had been planted long before I was born. There 
were weeds everywhere that had nearly choked the life 
out of most of the things that had been planted. This 
was especially so with the herbs. The beets, sweet 
potatoes, and what Hiram calls yams, had held their 
own, and were in a flourishing condition.” 

" That was to be expected,” said the captain, " beets, 
sweet potatoes, and yams thrive within the tropics, 
while the herbs generally prefer a cooler climate. Did 
you see anything that proved to you it was a clearing 
in which these things were growing? ” 

" There is no doubt about that, captain,” remarked 
Jack. And he then told the captain of the stumps of 
cocoanut palms and other trees still standing in the 
clearing that exhibited undoubted evidence of having 
been cut down. 

" Did you notice anything unusual about the depth 
or character of the soil ? ” 

" Yes, captain,” was the reply. " Here is a speci- 
men of the soil we brought to show you. I think it 
consists of volcanic ashes. See,” he continued, handing 
it to the captain, " it looks like the ashes that fell on 
the brig when we were off the Aleutian Islands. At 
least,” he added, correcting himself, " how I imagine 
the ashes would have looked after they had been ex- 
posed to the air and water for many years.” 

" Yes, Jack,” replied the captain, " this soil is 
formed of volcanic ashes. Was it a deep soil? ” 

190 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Deeper than any we have yet seen on the island,” 
was the reply. 

The captain was silent for a while, and at last said : 

‘‘ Of course you took pains carefully to examine the 
neighborhood of the clearing to see if there was a 
house or place of the person or persons who made the 
clearing and planted the garden. What did you 
find?” 

They were greatly mortified when the captain put 
this question. Jack, however, did not hesitate, but 
said in a manly way : 

Captain, I’m ashamed to say that we did not make 
any examination of the neighborhood. We wished 
to take a swim, so we left the place practically un- 
searched. I see now that this was a very thoughtless 
and foolish thing to do. I hope that you will forgive 
me for acting in this way.” 

“ But it was not all Jack’s fault. Uncle Arthur,” 
cried Harold. I was the first to beg Jack to go with 
us to the reef. The tide then was probably high, and 
Jack thought we could get a shower-bath where the 
tide ran over the island from the outside lagoon to the 
smaller lagoon.” 

I was to blame too,” cried Charley. “ I also 
wanted Jack to go swimming.” 

It was evident that the captain was both surprised 
and disappointed, but seeing how badly the boys felt, 
he said: 

Well, there has been no great harm done. I must 
not forget that you are only boys. Hiram,” he said, 
191 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


turning to the boatswain, we must go early to- 
morrow and make a careful search in the neighborhood 
of the clearing. I am sure we’ll find traces of the 
person or persons who made the clearing and planted 
the garden.” 

They would have cared far less if, instead of excus- 
ing them on the plea of their being only boys, he had 
soundly berated them. They especially wished the 
captain to regard them at least as being manly. When, 
therefore, he excused them because they were only 
boys, they felt the reproof keenly, especially Jack. 

Seeing this, the captain, wishing to pass the matter 
over, said: 

Tell me what else you did. Jack. Did you all have 
a good swim? Come, let me hear what you saw in 
the part of the island where the high tide washes over 
from the larger into the smaller lagoon.” 

The captain was greatly interested in what Jack - 
told him about the channel between the waters of the 
larger and the smaller lagoon, especially about the 
amount of water that passed through the channel at 
high tide. 

When they had explained to the captain the fun they 
had in sliding down the channel into the lagoon, Har- 
old, turning to Hiram, said : 

Hiram, when we go to-morrow won’t you take 
some boards and build a raft, so that we can go about 
from place to place on the lagoon ? ” 

Yes,” added Charley, and also put up a spring- 
ing-board, please, for us. The waters are so clear and 
192 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


pleasant at this part of the lagoon that they make the 
best swimming-pool Fve ever seen. The sliding-board 
is at least fifty feet long. Its bottom is almost as 
smooth as a piece of polished marble, and the way one 
can slip down in all kinds of positions from the top 
to the bottom is just splendid. If you can put up a 
springing-board on one side of this channel we can also 
have a great time diving. Moreover, captain,” he 
added, “ there are no sharks in this lagoon as there 
are in the Harding Lagoon, so the swimming is safer.” 

‘‘ Captain, I wish to say how thoroughly I am 
ashamed of myself in permitting the boys to persuade 
me to act in so childish a manner. I can assure you 
that such a thing shall never occur again when I am 
left in charge of the boys.” 

Jack,” said Charley, show the captain the pearl 
we found in an oyster we took from the lagoon by 
diving.” 

Jack handed the pearl to the captain, who told them 
that it was a splendid specimen of a form of pearl 
called an iridescent pearl, on account of the colors 
of the rainbow it displayed when held in the sunlight.” 

Hiram,” he said, turning to the boatswain, when 
we have built a raft we must try to rig up some form 
of dredge by which we can take the oysters from the 
deep water. If we can get a number of pearls like this 
they would be very valuable.” 

“ I kin easily rig up sich a thing,” said Hiram, so 
thet we kin become pearl-fishers.” 

They had reached the landing several hours before 

N 193 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


supper. There was, therefore, time to begin prepara- 
tions for leaving early the next morning. Hiram se- 
lected boards suitable for the construction of a raft, 
the boys carrying them down to the boat and placing 
them where they could be readily towed after it. They 
also placed the necessary provisions in the boat since, 
as the captain said, they might find it advantageous 
to stay overnight on the island. 

That night there were two new dishes on the table 
that all thoroughly enjoyed. These were boiled onions 
and a baked yam. 

‘‘ Why can’t we start a vegetable garden near Jack- 
son House, captain?” inquired Charley. ‘‘Things 
grow so rapidly here it would pay us to bring soil from 
other parts of the island and start both a vegetable and 
flower garden.” 

“ We’ll do so, Charley,” said the captain. Boys,” 
he added, “ whenever you get the opportunity don’t 
forget to bring good soil here for starting our 
garden.” 

They were able to make an early start next morn- 
ing, so they had landed their boat on the island, 
moored it, and reached the clearing after a brisk walk, 
only a little after nine o’clock. After making a care- 
ful examination of the place the captain said to his 
companions : 

“ There are plenty of evidences of the garden having 
been long neglected,” and he then pointed out to them 
that the stumps of the trees in the clearing showed 
signs of having been exposed to the elements for 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


many years, and that the cultivated plants had been 
choked out in most places by the native plants of the 
island. He endeavored, as far as possible, to mark out 
the limits of the cleared tract In one place he found 
the ground covered with a dense growth of a plant 
closely resembling sugar corn. This, he told them, was 
a variety of sugar-cane, and soon each of the party was 
sampling tender pieces of the stalks, sucking the sweet 
juices with which they were loaded. 

While walking over the clearing they came near its 
northeastern end, when Rompey began to manifest un- 
easiness, barking every now and then, as if he did not 
entirely like something in the neighborhood. Charley 
at once noticed this and said to the captain : 

That’s the way he acted yesterday. There is some- 
thing here that greatly excites him. Look,” he con- 
tinued, he is trying to follow a scent, but is unable 
to do so.” 

As Charley had remarked, Rompey was running to 
and fro, but was unable to find any scent on the ground. 
Just then, however, the wind began to blow from the 
northeast, when the dog, with an angry bark, ran 
rapidly in the direction from which it came. His bark- 
ing grew fainter and fainter as his distance from them 
increased. At last, however, it ceased to decrease in 
loudness, thus showing that the animal had stopped 
running and was standing and barking at something. 

He has run something down,” said the captain. 

Let us follow and see what it is.” 

When they reached Rompey they found him stand- 
195 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ing at the back of a small, low cabin built of the logs of 
trees somewhat after the fashion of the old log cabin. 
When Rompey heard them approach, he turned around 
as much as to say: 

“ I don’t altogether like this. Hadn’t you better 
look at it?” ' 

“We will hardly find any one living in that cabin 
now, boys,” said the captain. “ It appears to have 
been built from some of the trees that were cut down 
to make the clearing.” 

The captain had good reasons for his belief that 
they would find no one living in the cabin. Its roof 
that had apparently at one time been thatched, had 
completely disappeared, and from the opening there 
could be seen something they were quite unable to un- 
derstand; namely, the graceful, drooping foliage of a 
cocoanut palm that was apparently suspended above 
the top of the roof from some invisible support in the 
air. 

Walking rapidly to the front of the cabin, they saw 
both a window and a door. The window was in place 
and was shut, but the door had fallen from its support, 
thus permitting a flood of sunlight to enter and illu- 
mine a small room with an earth floor that occupied the 
whole enclosure. This light, together with that which 
poured in through the open roof, showed a rude bed- 
stead formed of logs, about two feet in height. On the 
bedstead was a skeleton of what had evidently been a 
man, for a few tattered remnants of a man’s clothing 
still covered it. The man had been dead for many, 
196 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


many years, for the skeleton had been bleached by 
long exposure to the sun and air. 

But what was still more curious, there had sprung 
up, a few feet from the foot of the bed, in the ground 
' that formed the floor, a mighty cocoanut palm tree, the 
trunk of which extended through the open roof, to a 
height of at least fifty feet. The tree, judging from its 
height and general appearance, must have been grow- 
ing many, many years, so that the man whose skeleton 
was lying on the bed, had been dead for a long time. 

Poor fellow,’' said the captain. He was probably 
alone when he died. If any one had been with him 
they would almost certainly have buried him. Let’s 
see if there are any papers that will tell us who he 
was, how long he had been on the island ; whether he 
had any companions, and about when he died.” 

Cap’n,” said Hiram, pointing to a box that was 
lying underneath the right hand of the skeleton, ‘‘ I 
reckon that ’ere box wuz the last thing the dying man 
touched.” 

‘‘ Yes,” was the reply of the captain, “ and we shall 
probably find in it some writing that will give us the 
information we desire. From the position of the box, 
I think the man was alone when he died, and that, as 
you suggest, almost his last act was to place in the box 
some information he wished to give to any who might 
chance in after years to visit the room.” 

Opening the box, the captain took from it a sheet 
of paper on one page only of which something was 
written in English. At first he had difficulty in de- 
197 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ciphering the writing, owing to the fading of ink ; but 
at last, succeeding in making it out, he read the follow- 
ing aloud to his companions : 


On a Lonely Island in the Pacific, July 17, 1783- 
(At least this is the date as nearly as I know). 

To the party or parties who first read this letter: 

I, John Maddox, of Portsmouth, England, Captain of the 
Morning Star, a brigantine equipped as a pearl fisher and 
bound from London to the South Sea Islands, was wrecked 
on this island June 6, 1733. The vessel was sunk in the deep 
waters of the ocean off the high cliffs at the northeastern 
part of the main island. All on board were drowned except 
myself. I have now been alone on this island for about 
fifty years. Feeling that my death is near at hand, and being 
unwilling that the treasures I have collected shall be lost, I 
write to say that unless the wreck has gone to pieces, my 
treasures will be found in a box placed on a table in the cabin 
of the brigantine, that lies beneath the waters of the ocean off 
the southeastern coast of the island. 

During the fifty years I have been on this island no ship 
has ever visited it. It is true that I have at rare intervals seen 
a few vessels at a great distance from the island, but all too 
far off to enable me to attract their attention. About ten years 
before my death, sometime in 1773, a war-canoe containing 
ten dark-skinned men was seen off the southeastern coast. 
They made an attempt to land, but the breakers being high, 
the canoe was nearly wrecked, so they left and have not since 
returned. As this island has no good landing-place for even 
a boat, it is unlikely a ship will ever visit it. 

I am dying and, having no one to whom I can leave my 
buried treasures, I hereby bequeath them to the person or per- 
sons who open this letter, to be shared in equal parts what- 
ever their age may be. This bequest, however, is conditional 
on their giving me Christian burial. May God have mercy on 
my soul! 


198 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Poor man,” said the captain, '' he seems to have 
lived all by himself on this lonely island during fifty 
long and weary years.” 

‘‘ I wonder, captain,” said Jack, of what these 
treasures consist ? ” ; 

Very probably,” said the captain, “ of the pearls' 
he has collected during his lifetime.” 

Are there no other papers in the box? ” inquired 
Jack. 

Yes,” said the captain looking, here is a paper 
containing a list of five or six hundred pearls with the 
weight and character marked opposite each. There is 
nothing to show that this list has any connection with 
the treasure referred to. I think, however, this is 
very probable.” 

“ Cap’n,” said Hiram anxiously, ef this here treas- 
ure consists of pearls, ez would seem probable, en the 
list yeVe read correctly describes the size and kinds 
of them pearls, I reckon they must be worth a sight 
of money, fer they’re all onusually big. Pervided, 
however,” he added anxiously, they hev been placed 
in a water-tight box.” 

‘‘ Why, Hiram,” inquired Jack, would the pearls 
be injured by exposure to water? ” 

'' I fear, Mr. Jack,” said Hiram, the water would 
spile them.” 

Yes,” said the captain, and even if the water did 
not render them dull and lusterless, we might find them 
coated with a crust of living coral. However,” he 
added, “ since the brigantine has been in the water 
199 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


since 1733, and it is now 1904, the wreck is about one 
hundred and seventy-one years old, and has probably 
gone to pieces long ago. Even if it has not, we may 
find it in water so deep that it would be impossible to 
reach it without regular diving apparatus.” 

‘‘ But we’ll take a try at it, cap’n, won’t we? ” in- 
quired Hiram. 

“ Yes,” was the reply, ‘‘ we will go there in the 
other boat early to-morrow or the day afterward.” 

'' Now, Hiram,” said the boys, ‘‘ let’s begin building 
the raft, take it to the channel opposite the swimming- 
pool, put the springing-board in place, and then we will 
have another splendid swim.” 

This was finally done, and the boys again enjoyed 
the magnificent natural sliding-board of the swimming- 
pool, as well as diving from the springing-board. 

The captain joined them in the sport. Hiram, how- 
ever, excused himself on the plea that he didn’t care 
much for swimming. 

When all had dressed after the swim the captain, 
turning to Hiram, said : 

Have you a spade in the boat, Hiram? ” 

I hev,” was the reply, “ I brung one with which to 
dig up some yams and sweet pertaters.” 

“ Then let’s dig a grave for the remains of the 
poor fellow who has so long been denied Christian 
burial.” 

Again visiting the lonely cabin, they dug a grave in 
the rich soil at the foot of a near-by cocoanut palm, 
when, after repeating portions of the beautiful Episco- 
200 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


pal burial service, they reverently committed the re- 
mains of John Maddox to the earth. 

“ The next time we come here,” said the captain, 
“ we’ll erect a headstone.” 

It may be mentioned that this was subsequently done, 
Hiram making a wooden cross, on which the captain 
carved : 

John Maddox, of Portsmouth, England, 
Died on this Island, 

July 17, 1783, 

After a Lonely Sojourn of Fifty Years. 

Buried 1904. 


201 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XV 

The Coral-encrusted Wreck ; 

Early next morning boat No. 23 might have been 
seen approaching Parker Cliffs. The captain was read- 
ing the letter that had been found in the box, on which 
had been resting the bony hand of the skeleton found 
in the rude hut not far from the clearing on Twin 
Island No. I. 

This letter,” he said to his companions, “ gives 
very vague instructions as to the exact place the brigan- 
tine was wrecked. Listen,” he continued, ‘‘ this is all 
it says as to where the wreck occurred : ‘ The vessel 
was sunk in the deep waters of the ocean off the high 
cliffs at the northeastern part of the main island.’ ” 
There be a fair stretch of high cliffs,” said Hiram 
grinning ; all of which kin be said to lie near the 
nor’eastern part of Harding Island.” 

‘‘ That’s just the trouble, Hiram,” remarked the 
captain. “ However, it’s certainly worth our while 
to carefully search all this part of the coast. We may 
be able to find the wreck if it has not been broken up 
and completely washed away by storms.” 

It was then high tide, but the waters were so clear 
that they could distinctly see the bottom at fairly con- 
siderable distances off the edge of the shore platform. 
They slowly rowed the boat over the deep water along 
202 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the entire coast opposite the cliffs, but found no traces 
whatever of the wreck. 

I fear, Hiram,” remarked the captain, the brigan- 
tine has gone to pieces. We must not forget she has 
now been in the water for over one hundred and seven- 
ty-one years, and that, during this time, many severe 
storms have occurred.” 

‘‘ Tm afeerd ye’re right,” replied Hiram in a regret- 
ful tone. I reckon none of us will get any of the 
waleable pearls the skeleton had collected when he 
warn’t a skeleton.” 

‘‘ But, captain,” remarked Jack, “ these storms may 
not have broken up the vessel. They may have only 
moved her to another place. If they have taken her 
to the deeper waters, there’s no hope of our finding her ; 
but, on the other hand, they may have washed her 
into the shallower waters nearer the edge of the plat- 
form. Now, there is a large part of these waters that 
we have not as yet examined. Suppose we take the 
boat nearer the shore where we can examine the 
shallow parts.” 

Jack’s plan was adopted ; so they began slowly pull- 
ing the boat along the shore, but this time nearer the 
edge of the shore platform. After doing this for some 
time they at last came to a place, about a quarter of a 
mile north of a place where a deep gap had been broken 
in the cliffs. This, it will be remembered, was the 
place at which they landed on their first visit to the 
cliffs, and following the gorge had reached the high- 
lands between Charles and Harold Hills. Here there 
203 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


was a change in the inclination of the shore platform. 
Instead of suddenly descending toward the ocean it 
reached it by a gradual slope. 

‘‘ Ef the wessel hez been washed by the waves to- 
ward the island,” said Hiram, here’ll be the place 
whar we orter find her. Boys, ez the cap’n and I row 
slowly, keep your eyes on the bottom.” 

As they rowed in this manner, Charley, who had 
been leaning over the bow of the boat with his face near 
the water, suddenly cried in an exultant tone: 

I see the brigantine. There she is lying with her 
stern toward the shore.” 

Instantly stopping the boat and looking down into 
the clear waters they could plainly see a wreck lying, 
as Charley had reported, on the inclined bottom, with 
her stern nearer the shore. She had evidently been 
gradually carried by the waves up the gentle incline 
and was now resting, stern-on, in about two fathoms of 
water with her bow in slightly deeper water. 

‘‘ Do you think this is the vessel we are looking for, 
captain ? ” inquired Charley. 

“ I think so,” said the captain, but of course I 
cannot say. However she’s a brigantine. Don’t you 
think so, Hiram? ” he inquired of the boatswain. 

She’s a brigantine all right,” was the reply; “ at 
least ez fer ez one kin tell in a wessel whose mast and 
rigging hev all been swept away a-many years ago. 
But I say, cap’n,” he continued, ‘‘she is sartinly the 
oddest looking wessel I’ve ever seed. She’s kivered all 
over with white stuff.” 


204 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ A growth of coral has formed a crust over the 
vessel, Hiram,” answered the captain. 

I reckon you're right, cap’n,” said Hiram, taking 
a closer look. “ I kin now see a lot of corals growing 
near the bow like the trunks of small trees, and now 
my eyes are getting more used to looking through the 
water, I kin see barnacles on the sides of the wessel.” 

‘‘ Captain,” said Jack, ‘‘ Charley, Harold, and I are 
pretty good divers; Charley especially. I think we 
might manage to reach the deck of the vessel and even 
to enter the cabin. Shall we try it ? ” 

I think so, boys,” was the reply, and Hiram and 
I will help you. Hiram, I guess you’d better wait in 
the boat. You will probably be of more help in the 
boat than in the water.” 

“ You’re right for sartin, cap’n,” said Hiram grin- 
ning. 

Anchoring the boat immediately over the wreck they 
undressed so as to try to reach the deck by diving. 
Before doing this, the captain pointed out the dangers 
they ran either by being cut, or by becoming entangled 
among the growing corals. He also cautioned them 
to avoid coming in contact with the tentacles of the 
larger growing coral polyps, since they could sting 
severely. 

It did not take the captain long to discover that 
the boys greatly surpassed him in diving, and that, 
moreover, none of the boys could equal Charley in 
this direction. While the lads had no difficulty in 
reaching the deck, yet the growing corals were pain- 
205 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ful to their feet and hands since, of course, they could 
only keep on the deck by clinging to it. 

They had anchored the boat over the vessel near an 
open companionway leading down into the cabin. 

’From this position they could see into the cabin, the 
door of which had been carried away. 

After they had all made a number of dives, Charley 
at last succeeded in reaching the companionway, and 
holding on to the door-jambs, got a momentary glance 
at a table in the middle of the room. 

On regaining the surface and climbing into the boat, 
he said : 

“ There’s a large iron box lying on the table.” 

‘‘ Thet’s the box ez hez been mentioned in the dead 
man’s letter,” cried Hiram excitedly. ‘‘ Do ye think 
ye kin git it next time ye go down ? ” 

‘‘ I am not sure,” replied Charley. “ I would not 
like to be caught in the cabin near the ceiling. If I 
should lose my hold on the door or table I would of 
course be pushed up by the water. Captain,” he said, 
“ suppose you and Hiram rig up a rope with a heavy 
weight, and lower me with it down to the bottom of 
the steps. If you landed me at the entrance of the 
cabin, and I had another weight attached to me, I am 
sure I could safely reach the table and get the box. 
Then, regaining the rope, I could count on you quickly 
raising me to the surface.” 

At first the captain was unwilling Charley should 
take this risk, but was at last persuaded that the 
dangers would not be very great. 

206 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ All right, Charley,” said the captain, “ Fm willing 
you should try this, but the tide is now beginning to 
run down. Suppose we wait until it is at its lowest. 
The water will then be only about half as deep as now. 
I think the plan you propose will then be thoroughly 
safe. Indeed,” he added, at low tide I think we 
might get along without the rope. However, we’ll 
get everything ready so that if it is necessary to use 
the anchored rope we can do so.” 

Rowing the boat to the shore, they secured a fairly 
large fragment of coral rock which they tied to the 
end of a rope, and then selected another smaller piece 
of coral rock, intended to increase Charley’s weight 
while entering the cabin. 

They remained on the shore until the tide had ceased 
running down, when they again anchored the boat im- 
mediately over the companionway. The water was 
now only about six feet above the deck at the stern 
of the boat, and therefore about twelve feet over the 
floor of the cabin. Indeed, it was so much shallower 
that Charley thought there was no necessity for the 
use of the anchored rope, but the captain, feeling that 
it would be safer, insisted on his employing it. With 
the smaller stone attached to his body so that he could 
easily loosen it, Charley took his place on the heavier 
stone at the end of the rope, and holding onto the rope 
with his hands, was rapidly lowered to the foot of the 
companionway. Entering the cabin, and keeping hold 
of the table with one hand, he approached the iron 
box. On attempting to lift it, he found it was firmly 
207 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


fixed to the table by a coating of coral. Still holding 
on firmly with one hand to the table, he separated the 
stone attached to his body, and by its aid soon loosened 
the box on the table. Finding the box heavier than the 
stone, he left the latter on the table and carrying the 
box reached the anchored stone, when he was soon^ 
raised with it to the surface and lifted by the captain 
and Hiram into the boat. 

Charley’s companions greeted him with loud hur- 
rahs. Naturally, they were greatly elated at the suc- 
cess that had so far attended their efforts to get the 
treasure that had been willed to them by the dead 
man. 

But there remained an uncertain element that les- 
sened their rejoicings. They had no doubt that this 
was the box referred to in Maddox’s letter for, so far, 
everything tallied with the information it contained. 
But was the box water-tight ? That was the important 
question. Its appearance certainly warranted the be- 
lief that they would find it water-tight. It was not 
only made of iron, but was covered with a varnish that 
had resisted the corroding action of the water; for no 
iron stains were visible. Like the top of the table, and 
indeed like everything on the vessel, it was covered by 
a coating of coral that was deposited on the joints be- 
tween its sides and the lid, though not so thick as to 
prevent them from seeing that the joints were well 
made. 

Of course they were all anxious to open the box. 

We’ll have to break it open,” said the captain. 

208 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Even if we had the key it would be useless, since the 
lid is firmly bound to the box by a coating of coral. 
Have you anything that will aid us in opening the box, 
Hiram ? ” inquired the captain. 

Hiram grinned as he took a cold chisel and hammer 
from a locker in the boat where he had placed them. 

‘‘ I reckon these’ll do, cap’n,” he remarked. ‘‘ Give 
me the box, I’ll open it.” 

“ You felt pretty sure of getting it, Hiram, didn*t 
you ? ” inquired the captain smiling. 

‘‘ Wall, I sartinly hoped we would, and thought I 
might ez well come prepared like,” was the reply. 

Under Hiram’s skilful use of the cold chisel and 
hammer the box was soon opened. The inside was as 
dry and free from water as when it had been closed by 
its owner in 1733. It was nearly filled with several 
hundred magnificent pearls, of sizes that are now sel- 
dom obtained, together with a written description of 
each of the pearls, their weight, and quality, together 
with an estimate of their probable value. Counting the 
pearls, they found that there were nearly eight hun- 
dred. 

Maddox estimates the pearls as being worth, in 
i733> something in the neighborhood of twenty thou- 
sand pounds, English money,” said the captain. 

“ Gracious,” exclaimed Harold in an astonished tone, 
“ that’s a big lot of money ! ” 

It sartinly is,” chuckled Hiram. “ It’s the same 
ez one hundred thousand dollars United States money 
and, sence the letter said this wuz to be ekally diwided 
o 209 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


among all them as found it, no matter wot their age, 
it’ll be twenty thousand dollars each. That’s not a 
small sum for each of us.” 

“ But,” said the captain smiling, that was in 1733. 
Pearls of large size are now probably worth two or 
three times more than they were then.” 

I kin stand the change in price, cap’n,” said Hiram 
grinning. 

The captain who had brought with him the papers 
found in Maddox’s box, began comparing the paper 
in the box of pearls with the paper found at the log 
cabin. The two papers closely agreed. Completing 
the examination, he said: 

“ The paper in the box of pearls is an actual de- 
scription of the pearls as they were added a few at a 
time by Maddox. You can see,” he continued, showing 
his companions the paper, the entries appear to have 
been made at different times. The other paper was 
apparently written by Maddox from memory. Both 
these papers are practically the same, thus showing that 
Maddox remembered very well the pearls he had col- 
lected during the many years he had been searching 
,for them.” 

Now they had taken from the sunken brigantine its 
buried treasure, they had plenty of time more closely 
to examine the coral that was growing on different 
parts of the vessel. In the portions near the bow that 
Hiram had described as resembling a small forest, there 
was growing a coral known as the madrepore, 
a branching form of coral polyp resembling a tree with- 
210 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


out leaves. In several places these corals had attained 
the height of nearly twelve feet. It was evident, there- 
fore since the brigantine had been sunk in 1733, assum- 
ing, as was probable, that the corals began growing 



Madrepore (from Dana) 


shortly after the vessel was wrecked, they had grown 
twelve feet in about one hundred and venty-five 
years. 

“ Captain,” inquired Jack, is that an unusually 
rapid rate of growth for this kind of polyp ? ” 

211 



WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ No, Jack,” replied the captain, I remember read- 
ing that madrepores are known to have attained the 
growth of sixteen feet in sixty-four years. But the rate 
of growth of coral polyps varies greatly, not only with 
different species, but also with the character of the 
water in which they are growing. Polyps grow more 
rapidly when directly exposed to the breakers than in 
sheltered waters. You must not suppose, however,” 
he continued, “ that all coral polyps have the same 
rate of growth as the madrepores. In many species the 
growth is much slower. See,” he said, pointing to 
the ship’s bell that had been covered by a coating of 
another species of coral, “ the growth here has been 
much slower; it has only attained the thickness of a 
few inches. 

“ Of course,” continued the captain, “ the rate of 
growth of a coral polyp is entirely different from the 
rate of growth of a coral reef. The rate of growth 
of the reef is now generally believed to be some- 
thing in the neighborhood of one foot for every two 
hundred years; a depth of five feet would, therefore, 
require something in the neighborhood of one thousand 
years.” 


212 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XVI 

The Sea-slug or Beche-de-mer 

The magnificent collection of pearls obtained from the 
iron box in the cabin of the coral-encrusted wreck, nat- 
urally led to many conversations about their peculiari- 
ties as well as about the oysters and other mollusks 
from which they are obtained. This information was 
derived in part from the captain, but was obtained 
mainly from some of the books they had brought from 
the derelict brig. 

Nor was the desire for information limited to the 
captain and the boys. Hiram, doubtless excited by 
the money interest he had in the collection, often joined 
them in the reading-room, listening attentively to the 
conversation or to the readings. Indeed, he was so 
greatly interested that he would frequently persuade 
one of the boys to read again what he had already 
heard. 

I kain't remember things I’ve heerd read as well as 
you lads kin, so please let me hear it agin.” Which, of 
course, the boys were always pleased to do. 

But their interest in pearls was by no means limited 
to what they read or heard as to the habits and pe- 
culiarities of the pearl-producing mollusks. It led them 
to make an actual study of the animals themselves. 
There were excellent opportunities for doing this, since 
213 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


both in the shallow waters of the ocean near the island, 
and especially in the quiet and clearer waters of the la- 
goon, there were several varieties of pearl-oysters, as 
well as many other pearl-producing mollusks. Among 
these was the species of giant clam called the tridacna, 
the largest of all bivalves or two-shell mollusks. Some 
of the largest shells of this clam weigh as much as five 
hundred pounds, the mollusk itself often weighs as 
much as twenty pounds. The shells are exceedingly 
hard, and are so large that the natives sometimes use 
them for bathtubs. 

While examining a huge specimen of this mollusk, 
the captain told the boys that its name tridacna was de- 
rived from two Greek roots meaning “ three bites,” in 
reference to the fact that the animal had to be eaten 
in three bites. 

“ It seems to me, captain,” said Charley laughing, 
it would be pretty hard to swallow that fellow in 
three bites. He could more easily, being so large, eat 
any of us in three bites than we could eat him.” 

With the study of the habits of the pearl-mollusk, 
they gradually became pearl-hunters. Many excur- 
sions were made both in the ocean and the lagoon, and 
a number of pearls-oysters taken from the waters. 

On one occasion the boys had taken a number of 
pearl-oysters from the lagoon at Jackson House, but 
on opening them had failed to find any containing ex- 
cellent pearls. 

Harold, who was carefully examining one of the 
oyster-shells, turning to Jack, remarked: 

214 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Nearly all these shells are coated on the inside with 
smooth, shining stuff that looks like pearls. See this,” 
he said, pointing to a smooth and glossy coating that 
gave off colored rays closely resembling those of the 
beautiful pearls they had obtained from the coral-en- 
crusted wreck. I wonder. Jack,” he continued, “ why 
it is that we find no pearls in these shells. It is certainly 
not because there is no material to form pearls. Do 
you know what pearls are made of ? ” 

Yes,” replied Jack, they consist of the same 
material as that of which the shell is formed; that is, 
of carbonate of lime or limestone.” 

But not the same kind of limestone as that of 
which the coral island is formed, is it ? ” 

‘‘ Well,” was the reply, they consist of limestone or 
carbonate of lime that the oyster takes from the water 
of the ocean while feeding. But this limestone is much 
purer than that of which the coral islands consist ; and 
besides, I think it is very differently arranged. As 
the oyster grows it builds or enlarges its shell by 
lime it takes from the water. Since it is an exceed- 
ingly soft animal it is obliged to protect its body by 
strong limestone shells. It very sensibly makes the 
outside of these shells rough and jagged, so that other 
animals w*ould not be apt to rest on it. But it covers 
the inside of the shell with the smooth stuff that, as you 
say, closely resembles the material of pearls, and which 
is, indeed, exactly the same thing. Harold,” he con- 
tinued, do you know what this material is called? ” 

‘‘ No, Jack; what is its name? ” 

215 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


It is called nacre or mother-of-pearl.” 

Then, why is it, Jack,” inquired Harold, “ that 
some of the oysters contain pearls and others do not? ” 

‘‘ I can answer that. Jack,” said Charley. ‘‘ I was 
reading yesterday in one of the books that when small 
pieces of sharp, hard substances are lodged inside the 
shells, the animals try to wash them out, and that when 
they can’t do this, in order to prevent them from ir- 
ritating their bodies, they begin to cover them with 
layer after layer of the same material that it spreads 
over the inside of the shell. It is in this way the pearls 
are formed.” 

Oh, I know, Charley,” said Harold smiling; it’s 
like when a grain of sand or a small pebble gets inside 
your shoe. It’ll soon rub a blister on the foot if you 
don’t get rid of it.” 

That’s it, Harold,” said Charley laughing. ‘‘ Well, 
that is the way pearls are formed. Is that right. 
Jack? ” he said, turning to the oldest boy. 

“ That’s the way, Charley,” replied Jack. “ These 
little particles may lodge either on the shell, or in the 
mantle at the edge of the mollusk. The mantle is the 
part of the animal that secretes limestone from the 
water. When the particles lodge on the shell they are 
fastened to it by thin layers of limestone. Pearls so 
formed, being irregular in shape, are less valuable than 
those formed in the mantle that are rounded like peas 
or shot.” 

'' Jack,” said Harold, ‘‘ if that’s the way pearls are 
formed, why can’t we force the animals to produce 
216 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


pearls by putting particles of gritty substances in their 
mantles? Do you know how long it would take an 
oyster to form a pearl in this way?” 

I asked the captain that question the other day,” 
replied Jack. ‘‘ He said it took about two years to 
form a good-sized pearl.” 

“ I wonder,” said Charley, ‘‘ how old the pearl- 
oyster is before it is able to form a pearl.” 

‘‘ I believe,” was the reply, pearl-hunters say that 
the greatest number of pearls are found in oysters 
that are about seven years old.” 

Jack,” said Harold, do you think my plan of 
growing pearls would work ? ” 

‘‘ Fm sure it would,” replied Jack laughing. “ I’m 
sorry to disappoint you, Harold, but this plan has 
been tried many years ago. From very early times the 
Chinese have forced the animals to produce pearls by 
introducing little grains of sand, or bits of other for- 
eign matters, inside the shells when, of course, the 
animal covers them for self-protection. I remember 
reading that some time ago a great excitement was 
caused by the so-called miraculous production of pearls 
inside of which could be seen the image of some one or 
other of the saints. It is now known how this fraud 
was perpetrated. It was only necessary to place small 
images in limestone or other whitish material in the 
mantles of pearl-producing mollusks, and then after- 
ward carefully protect them from their enemies. In a 
few years these would be found covered with beautiful 
transparent layers of pearly matter.” 

217 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


This ingenious fraud appeared to tickle Charley’s 
fancy no little, and caused him to laugh for some 
time. 

‘‘ Jack,” he remarked, I remember reading some 
time ago in Jules Verne’s Twenty Thousand Leagues 
Under the Sea,” how Captain Nemo kept a huge 
pearl-producing clam or tridacna at the bottom of the 
sea. In this clam a pearl of unusual size and luster 
was gradually being formed. The captain was in the 
habit of occasionally putting on his submarine cloth- 
ing and visiting the shell in order to cause the pearl to 
maintain its spherical form by occasionally moving it. 
Inserting a stick of wood in the shell when open, so as 
to prevent it closing on his hand, he would remove 
the pearl, and after carefully examining it would put 
it back again in such a position that would insure the 
keeping of its spherical form.” 

Harold,” said Jack, “ if we were regular pearl- 
hunters, we would not throw away the shells that are 
covered with the best specimens of mother-of-pearl. 
We could sell them for good prices.” 

‘^What’s done with them. Jack?” inquired Harold. 

“ Among other things,” replied Jack, ‘‘ they are used 
for making the handles of penknives, table knives, or 
other ornamental work, as well as for inlaid work for 
the tops of tables or boxes formed of ebony or other 
highly colored hard wood.” 

One can easily see by examining a pearl that it is 
built up of a great number of exceedingly thin trans- 
parent coatings of carbonate of lime. When sunlight 
218 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


falls on a pearl, instead of passing directly through 
these coatings a part of the light is reflected from both 
the upper and the lower surface. In this way the rays 
from the different surfaces passing through paths of 
different lengths, are slightly retarded, so that they en- 
ter the eye of an observer a very short time one after 
another. Without attempting to explain how, there is 
thus produced an interference of the different rays of 
light, so instead of producing ordinary white light they 
produce the different colored tints of the rainbow. 

The boys were astonished to find, by reading some 
of the books in the library, that the magnificent colors 
on many other natural objects, such as the wing-cases 
of beetles; the scales of the highly colored (and gen- 
erally poisonous) fish of the lagoon of Twin Island 
No. 2, whose waters had no connection with the ocean ; 
the feathers of the birds; the wings of butterflies; 
as well as such minerals as peacock coal were, in a 
similar manner, due to the interference of rays of light 
caused by minute irregularities of the surfaces. This 
matter bothered them so much that Jack one day in- 
quired of the captain if it was possible to so roughen 
an otherwise colorless surface as to cause it to throw 
off rainbow colors. 

Yes, Jack,” was the reply. Take, for example, 
that common transparent substance plate glass, or even 
a clear glass tumbler, or other article of glassware. 
If any of these articles are buried in moist ground a 
slight corrosion of their surfaces occurs. When washed 
and dried they are found on exposure to the sunlight to 
219 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


possess an appearance not unlike that of a highly 
colored soapbubble, or of a piece of peacock coral.” 

“ I remember, captain,” said Jack, seeing in the 
British Museum specimens of iridescent glass taken 
from the excavations of Pompeii and other parts of 
the world.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said the captain laughing, and these speci- 
mens commanded such high prices that it was not long 
before ingenious men discovered how the surfaces of 
any glass article could be artificially roughened. In- 
deed, iridescent glass articles can now be manufactured 
by a process requiring only a few hours or even less to 
bring about this change.” 

“ But, besides this,” continued the captain, “ if a 
plate of clear transparent glass has its surface rough- 
ened by ruling on it with a diamond point a great 
number of lines very close together, in some cases 
as many as forty-three thousand lines to the inch, a 
beam of light thrown off from the roughened surface 
will no longer resemble sunlight but will exhibit rain- 
bow tints.” 

Their interest in pearl-fishing continued to increase. 
Many excursions were made, both to different parts of 
the principal lagoon, as well as to the lagoon of Twin 
Island No. i, near the swimming-pool. They obtained 
in this manner a number of good-sized, well-formed 
pearls. Hiram had rigged up a form of grappling iron 
they would lower where they saw a number of pearl- 
oysters. Then by dragging it over the bottom they 
would loosen the pearls, and afterward pick them 
220 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


up by the use of another contrivance closely resembling 
the oyster-tongs employed for taking oysters from their 
breeding grounds. 

One day, after enjoying a bath in the swimming- 
pool, when the captain and Hiram were both present, 
they took a sun-bath. While wading through the 
shallow waters near the shores of the smaller lagoon, 
the captain called their attention to what at first ap- 
peared to be a species of china aster. It was, how- 
ever, as they well knew, the head of some form of 
radiate, the petals being the bright-colored tentacles of 
the animal. 

Look at that,” said the captain to Hiram and the 
boys, there is something the Chinese are so fond of as 
a food that they are willing to pay for it prices some- 
times as high as three hundred to five hundred dollars a 
ton.” 

Hiram, attracted by the statement that the animal 
was good to eat, apparently recognized it, for he at 
once began poking the sand in the neighborhood of the 
head with a stick of wood he was carrying, and at last 
held up before them, slung over a stick, an animal 
closely resembling a huge snail or slug. It was about 
four inches in diameter and a foot and a half in length, 
and was furnished with a row of small projections 
like teeth along opposite sides of a body of a slaty gray 
color. 

The animal was so jellylike in its consistency that, as 
it hung on the stick, its weight caused it to considerably 
increase in length and decrease in diameter. Its body 
221 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


was fairly transparent, so that they could see that it 
was filled with water and sand. 

Altogether it was a most repulsive-looking object as 
it hung squirming on the stick. No matter how well 
it might taste when properly prepared, it was certainly^ 
far from attractive in appearance. 

“ Do the Chinese eat that horrible-looking thing, 
Uncle Arthur ? ” cried Harold. “ Why, it looks like 
a great dirty leech.’' 

“ Yes, Harold. Not only in China, but also in some 
other parts of the world, the animal is highly prized for 
the preparation of jellylike soups. Tell the boys what 
you know about it, Hiram,” said the captain. 

“ The cap’n’s right for sartin about the Chinese 
thinking thet animal is fit to eat. Fve tasted the soup 
made from it, and I’m free to say I don’t like it at all. 
P’raps, howsumever, my taste ain’t bin cultivated 
enough.” And then he added, as an additional piece 
of information : “ This here animal is sometimes called 
a cowcumber (he meant cucumber) on account of its 
shape when dried.” ' 

“ Please tell us something about the animal, cap- 
tain?” asked Jack. 

j “ The sea-snail or slug, as the animal is called, is a 
variety of mollusk that forms one of the most impor- 
tant commercial products of this part of the world,” re- 
plied the captain. “ The animal lives on sandy bottoms 
in the shallow waters of lagoons. It possesses the 
power of crawling over the sand, but this motion is so 
slow that it can only be detected by carefully noting the 
222 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


position of the animal from time to time. It appar- 
ently spends most of its life drawing in sand and water 
at one end of its body and spurting it out at the op- 
posite end. It is called the trepang by the Chinese, but 
its common name is the sea-snail or the beche-de-mer. 
It occurs in different varieties, the gray, the red, 
the black, and the spotted. 

‘‘ The animal Hiram has just taken from the sand is 
the gray variety. The red, the smallest and least valua- 
ble, is found generally on the edge of the coral reef 
where the surf breaks over it. The spotted variety 
which attains a much greater size than the red, is some- 
times called the leopard beche-de-mer on account of its 
olive-green spots surrounded by orange-colored rings. 
The black beche-de-mer lives on shallow and clean 
sandy bottoms at depths varying from knee-deep or a 
depth of ten fathoms. The black variety is sometimes 
as thick as a man’s leg, and has a length of two and a 
half feet. Its color is a smooth jet black, not unlike 
enameled leather. The under side of the belly is of 
a bluish-slate color. 

All these varieties of sea-slugs are harmless except 
the leopard or spotted variety. If you ever meet with a 
spotted or leopard sea-slug be careful how you handle 
or go near it. When angered it possesses the power of 
vomiting or throwing out a great quantity of slender 
filaments somewhat resembling pieces of white cotton 
lamp-wick. These filaments are of a jellylike con- 
sistency, and are able to cling to the human body like 
glue. As soon as they touch the skin they begin to 
223 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


burn it like a blister, thus setting up a painful inflamma- 
tion. If one is so unfortunate as to get a drop of the 
liquid in the eye it will instantly set up so violent an 
inflammation that one might think it due to a red-hot 
coal. Indeed, there are instances where the sight has 
nearly been lost in this manner.” 

“ How is the sea-slug prepared for the market, cap- 
tain? ” inquired Jack. 

“ As soon as the animal is caught it is slit up its 
entire length on its under side by a sharp knife, the 
animal being held during this operation so that its 
intestines will fall into the sea. 

It is necessary that the animals shall be cooked 
as soon as possible after the boats reach the shore. If 
they remain piled together too long after their intes- 
tines have been removed they will lose their original 
form and cling together in a sticky glutinous mass that 
can never afterward be separated. 

‘‘ The animals are prepared for curing by cooking 
in a hot stone oven, by boiling, or by subjecting them to 
the action of steam. As soon as cooked they are ex- 
posed to smoke in a manner similar to that employed 
for preparing smoked fish or meat. 

“ In cooking by the hot stone oven, a hole is dug 
in the ground in which a fire is built of small pieces 
of wood and cocoanut husks. Stones are heaped on the 
fire, and another layer of wood, cocoanut husks, and 
stones is added. As soon as the stones are thoroughly 
heated they are spread over the bottom of the hole, 
and the sea-slugs piled on them as close as they can 
224 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


lie. They are then covered first with large green 
leaves, then with palm-leaf mattings, and finally with a 
layer of earth. After an hour’s baking they are sub- 
jected to the smoking process. The time required for 
smoking varies from two to three days. 

At the end of the smoking the animals are greatly 
altered both in size and appearance. They are then 
no longer slimy, and resemble pieces of bacon rind. It 
is necessary to turn them at least once during the 
process. 

“ In the boiling the animals are at once thrown 
into boiling salt water in which they are kept 
several times for about ten minutes, being washed 
in fresh water each time they are taken out of the 
pot. While boiling is a much quicker way of pre- 
paring them for smoking than the hot stone oven, 
yet it possesses the disadvantage of requiring the smok- 
ing to be continued for at least eight days. Moreover, 
when thus prepared the material is more apt to be 
injured by exposure to damp air than by the other 
process. 

By the third method the animals are placed in a 
hogshead or other close box and subjected to the action 
of steam introduced by a pipe connected with a steam 
boiler. This is an excellent plan and is generally 
adopted when possible. 

“ The smoke-dried animals are packed in baskets of 
palm leaves that are not stitched together because, when 
shipped to great distances, it is necessary occasionally 
to open the baskets and spread the contents out in the 
p 225 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


hot sun to dry thoroughly. This variety of food 
product is apt to spoil during a long voyage, and since 
China is the principal market, unless they have been 
carefully prepared and looked after during transit, they 
may spoil long before reaching their destination.’’ 


226 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XVII 
Stung by a Sea-nettle 

Shortly after the discovery of the vegetable garden 
at Maddox Clearing they selected a suitable location 
for a kitchen garden near Jackson House where the 
soil was fairly deep. They then began to enrich and 
deepen this soil by admixture with additional soil 
formed by the decomposition of volcanic ashes. They 
obtained this not only from Maddox Clearing, but also 
from different parts of the island where, as they after- 
ward discovered, the soil to some extent was volcanic 
in origin. 

In the Jackson garden, sweet potatoes, beets, onions, 
and such herbs as thyme, sage, and parsley were 
planted. They also sowed some of the dried peas, 
lima beans, and white beans that formed a part of the 
stores taken from the derelict brig. These readily 
sprouted, and under the influence of abundant mois- 
ture, good soil, and a tropical sun, flourished wonder- 
fully. A small part of the garden was devoted to the 
growth of sugar-cane and yams. 

But what pleased them more than anything else was 
the discovery, among the many goods brought from 
the brig, of a few packages of the seeds of common 
garden flowers of England. Planting these in beds on 
the sides of Jackson House, they soon had morning- 
227 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


glories, cypress, and clematis vines climbing to the top 
of the porches. Hollyhocks, verbenas, petunias, black- 
eyed susans, and geraniums also grew luxuriantly in 
beds near the house. 

It was not their intention to raise vegetables in the 
Jackson garden for their regular food supplies, but' 
only for occasional use. The depth and character of the 
soil at the Maddox Clearing were so much better than 
any they could readily collect at Jackson House, that 
they sensibly concluded it would be preferable to locate 
their principal vegetable garden at the Maddox Clear- 
ing. Consequently, they spent much of their time on 
Twin Island No. i. After several weeks of hard work 
they put the clearing in excellent condition, and planted 
it with crops of the vegetables they had found growing 
in it. 

Since Maddox Clearing was at some distance from 
Jackson House, they made arrangements that would 
permit them comfortably to spend the night at the 
clearing whenever they found it convenient to do so. 
They had, therefore, erected one of the portable houses 
there, similar to the house at Jackson Harbor, except 
that a single house only was built. This, which they 
agreed to call Maddox House, was comfortably fitted 
up with bedrooms, a sitting-room, and a kitchen, and 
front and side porches. 

I hardly need tell my boy readers that Maddox House 
possessed an especial attraction to the three youngest 
members of the party. It was not far from the swim- 
ming-pool, so that after a few hours of hard work, 
228 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


generally begun after breakfast during the cooler por- 
tion of the day, the boys would almost always repair 
to the swimming-pool where they soon forgot their 
fatigue, both by a good swim in the clear waters of the 
'lagoon and the use of the polished limestone sliding- 
board, whenever their swimming hour occurred at or 
near high tide. Indeed, during any tide, by thoroughly 
wetting the limestone channel they were able to slide 
down its polished surface. 

It will be remembered that shortly after the explora- 
tion of Twin Island No. i, they had built a raft in its 
lagoon for convenience in going from one part to 
another. Finding the raft clumsy they afterward built 
a boat for use on this lagoon only. This boat was not 
only employed for the carriage of articles between dif- 
ferent parts of the island, but was especially used by the 
boys, either in going to and from the swimming-pool, or 
during their excursions to different parts of the island. 
As already mentioned, the captain had appointed cer- 
tain hours for daily work, both for the boys as well as 
for himself and Hiram, and although there was plenty 
of work required for the cultivation of the vegetable 
garden at Maddox Clearing, yet he had arranged 
matters so that there were always several hours each 
day after their studies at their disposal. These they 
spent either in the swimming-pool, in the boat, ex- 
ploring different parts of either Harding Island, or in 
visiting some of the smaller islands of the lagoon. But 
it was in the boat that had been built for the lagoon of 
Twin Island No. i that the two younger boys spent 
229 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


most of their time. Indeed, Charley and Harold used 
this boat so much that it had been christened “ The 
Chums,” and when the two younger boys were missing, 
which was such a common occurrence that it ceased 
to occasion surprise, they would, when looking for 
the youngsters, first see if the boat was in its mooring- 
place, and if not, would look for them somewhere on 
the lagoon. 

One day Charley suggested to Harold that they 
should provide at the different landings a mail-box for 
holding a paper tablet and lead pencil, so that word 
could be left as to their whereabouts. 

It’s what men do in their business offices,” said 
Charley. They put signs on the door, ^ Back in five 
minutes,’ or ‘ Back in three hours,’ etc.” 

“ It’s a capital idea, Charley,” said Harold laughing. 

But we must try to make our signs more truthful. I 
have heard father and other gentlemen say that such 
signs in most cases are very unreliable.” 

That won’t do here,” said Charley. “ I wouldn’t 
like to try it twice on the captain ; would you, 
Harold?” 

You bet I wouldn’t,” was the reply ; for Harold, 
although very fond of his uncle, nevertheless stood 
somewhat in awe of him whenever he had done any- 
thing that was either thoughtless or foolish. 

* But then, Harold,” said Charley, “ we can put 
more than a few words on the cards. We can say. 
Gone to such and such a place. Back by dinner or by 
supper-time.” 


230 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


In order to be able to signal any of the boats, the 
captain had flag-poles erected at all the landings. The 
flags consisted of pieces of the colored blankets. A flag 
raised to the top of the pole meant the boat was at the 
landing, but when raised only to within ten feet of the- 
top, or when alternately raised to the top and lowered, 
meant that some one was at the landing waiting for the 
boat. 

They had now three boats in regular service on 
Harding Island; viz., Boat No. 23, in the waters of the 
ocean at Jackson Harbor. Boat No. 13, the one they 
had built on the island, for service in the waters of the 
larger lagoon; and The Chums, the boat last con- 
structed, for use in the lagoon of Twin Island No. i. 
All these boats had regular landings. For conve- 
nience, they agreed to call these landings, Landing No. 
No. I, Landing No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, and No. 5. 

Landing No. i was the landing for boat No. 23 
on the waters of the ocean at Jackson Harbor. Land- 
ing No. 2 was situated on the lagoon of Harding 
Island, opposite Landing No. i, and was employed for 
boat No. 13. Landing No. 3 was the regular landing 
for boat No. 13 at the western end of Twin Island No. 
I. Landing No. 4 was the landing for The Chums in 
the waters of the Twin Island No. i, immediately op- 
posite Landing No. 3 ; while landing No. 5 was where 
The Chums had its regular landing-place at Maddox 
Clearing. Wherever necessary they had provided the 
landings with boardwalks for convenience of access. 

Of course, there were other places where any of the 
231 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


boats could be landed, but these five landings were 
where the boats were left when not in use. The post- 
boxes at the landings were placed along with the 
signaling masts. By looking at the position of the 
flags, therefore, they could tell at a distance whether 
a particular boat was in use and could, moreover, 
signal for it when absent. 

The cultivation of Maddox garden necessitated both 
Hiram and the captain being frequently at Maddox 
House, where they often passed the night. There was 
present in the waters of the lagoon of Twin Island No. 
I a great variety of the different organisms capable of 
producing limestone. The captain took advantage of 
this to point out to the boys the principal animals and 
plants from which limestone rock is formed, and that 
would, therefore, permit the formation of coral is- 
lands. These belonged to four classes ; namely, polyps, 
hydroids, bryozoans, and algae or seaweeds. The 
first three were animals; the last plants. In this 
connection the captain gave them the following infor- 
mation : 

“ Polyps are by far the most important of the coral- 
making animals. From them nearly all the coral reefs 
of the world have been produced. Polyps (as already 
described in a preceding chapter) bear externally a 
close resemblance to such flowers as china asters or 
chrysanthemums. The flower-like appearance is limited 
to the top of an upright pedicel that is almost always 
fixed to the rocks at the bottom of the waters in which 
the animal is growing. When the animal is feeding, 
232 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


or not alarmed, its upper end has the shape of a disk 
surrounded by organs, resembling the petals of many 
flowers. These organs are called tentacles, and like 
the petals of a flower, are supported at the upper 
end of a cylinder which, unlike the slender stem of a 
flower, is often almost as broad as the disk of the 
flower-like part itself. At the center of the disk is an 
opening or mouth that leads to the stomach of the 
animal. 

But while a polyp resembles a flower externally, 
this resemblance goes no further. As far as the 
manner of its growth and its other characteristics are 
concerned, the coral polyp, as Dana observes, is no 
more like a plant than is a cat or a dog. 

“ There are a great variety of coral polyps, among 
the most important of which are the sea-anemones or 
actinoids. The sea-anemones, or as they are some- 
times called, sea-nettles, vary greatly both in color and 
size. Some are colorless, but most of the tropical 
species have their tentacles or petal-like organs, 
brightly colored. The commoner colors are red, pink, 
blue, or bluish-green. The body is also colored. In 
some cases it is red, with spots of dark green ; in others, 
is a bluish-green. Sea-anemones vary in diameter 
from an eighth of an inch or smaller to more than 
twelve inches. Dana describes a species, growing in the 
Paumotu Islands of the Pacific, that sometimes attains 
at its disk a diameter of fourteen inches. Generally 
speaking, sea-anemones are unable to move through the 
waters from place to place, the lower part of the 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


animal being attached at the bottom of the sea to 
shells or stones. There are, however, exceptions to this, 
as the following examples will show.” 

Harold had become greatly interested in coral 
polyps, especially of the actinia group, and spent much 
of his time watching them. One day, while engaged 
in this work, he called the captain who was in the 
neighborhood with Charley and Jack, exclaiming: 



Sea-anemone on Back of Crab 


Uncle Arthur, come here quickly with the boys 
and look at this odd kind of sea-anemone. It’s not 
fixed to the bottom like the others, but is walking side- 
wise in a queer crablike manner. Come quickly, be- 
fore it runs away.” 

“ Where is it, Harold ? ” said Charley. 

There,” he answered, pointing to a sea-anemone 
that appeared to possess crab-shaped feet, that were 
making off with the animal in a curious though some- 

234 



WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


what rapid side motion. ‘‘Look at that, uncle,” he 
continued ; “ don’t its feet look like the feet of a crab? ” 

“ They certainly do, Harold,” replied the captain, 
“ and, moreover, they should, for they are the feet of a 
crab.” 

“ Do you mean to tell me,” exclaimed Harold, in 
great surprise, “ that crab’s feet are actually growing 
out of the body of an anemone ! ” 

“ Not at all,” was the reply. “ We are looking at 
two separate animals. The anemone has attached 
itself to the back of a crab and is being carried about 
by it as it moves through the water.” 

“ Is the anemone eating the crab, captain ? ” in- 
quired Jack. 

“ No,” was the reply, “ the animals appear to be 
quite friendly. This anemone, while quite young, at- 
taches itself to a small shell that this species of crab is 
in the habit of holding over its back by means of its 
two hind legs. It remains on the back of the crab and, 
growing, gradually spreads itself over the crab’s back, 
thus taking the place of the shell.” 

By watching this curious specimen, they could see 
that both crab and anemone appeared to be in vigorous 
health. 

“ Is it unusual, captain,” Jack inquired, “ for 
anemones to grow on the backs of animals like the 
crab?” 

“ I believe not,” was the reply. “ I understand that 
this species of anemone and crab generally live together 
in their strange partnership, and are never seen apart. 

235 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


I understand too, that there are other species of 
anemones that acquire a similar power of moving from 
place to place by attaching themselves to the shells of 
mollusks that have since been inhabited by soldier or 
hermit crabs.” 

I have seen hermit crabs, captain,” said Charley. 

They are funny animals. Instead of making shells 
for themselves, they hunt up an empty shell and live 
in it until, growing too large, they again go house- 
hunting until they can find a larger empty shell which 
they enter after throwing away their old house.” 

“ Do they move often, Charley? ” inquired Harold. 

I suppose they must, Harold,” was the reply. 

You see, if they grow very fast the old shell would 
soon become too small for them.” 

What would happen to such a crab if it got too 
large for his old house and was unable to find another 
big enough for him, Uncle Arthur? ” inquired Harold. 

‘‘ It would soon wretchedly die, Harold,” said the 
captain ; “ for, having failed to form or build its shell 
as nature intended it should, it has lazily protected it- 
self with the shell of a dead mollusk. When, therefore, 
forced by increased growth to leave this shell, it fails 
to find another it is unprotected and becomes an easy 
prey to its enemies.” 

Captain,” inquired Jack, ‘‘ are not all of us apt to 
lose the use of portions of our bodies if we fail to use 
them ? ” 

“Yes, Jack,” was the reply. “Do you remember 
the selection from the Bible we were reading last week 
236 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


before retiring?” (For the captain always read a 
chapter from the Bible to the boys before going to bed. ) 

For whosoever hath, to him shall be given, and he 
shall have more abundantly; but whosoever hath not, 
from him shall be taken away, even that he hath.’ This 
means that God will permit us to continue to use only 
such parts of the body as we keep in use. If we fail 
to use an arm or a leg that has been injured it will 
gradually become so atrophied or withered that it can 
never be used again.” 

“ Look out, Harold,” said Charley, if you don’t 
use your tongue more frequently by asking qustions 
it may become dried up or may waste away so that you 
can never talk again. What’s the word, captain, 
please ? ” 

Atrophied,” was the reply, but I don’t think there 
is much danger of Harold’s tongue becoming atro- 
phied. Do you, Harold? ” he asked in a jollying tone. 
For Harold, like many young boys, kept his tongue in 
almost constant use when he was awake; and indeed 
even when asleep, as Charley, who slept with him, de- 
clared, he was not entirely quiet, but often talked. 

‘‘ I guess not,” replied Harold laughing. 

It would be interesting, if time permitted, to give 
in full the descriptions the captain gave of the other 
forms of coral-making animals. Briefly, however, they 
were as follows : 

The hydroids are a form of animal related to the 
hydra of fresh water. Hydroids possess the form of 
polyps, but are provided with much longer tentacles. 

237 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


These animals receive the name of hydra from the 
fabled Hydra of mythology — an animal, it was claimed, 
that grew two heads for every head that was cut off, 
a property that rendered the killing of the animal per- 
'plexing to its enemies, since the more they attempted 
to kill it by cutting off its heads, the more alive it 
became. So it is with the hydroids. If these animals 
are chopped into small pieces the separate pieces grow, 
and in a short time develop a perfect animal, head, 
body, tail, etc., complete. The hydra were at one time 
believed to be polyps, but are now known to be em- 
bryonic forms of jellyfish before they attain their adult 
or full growth. 

That’s a funny kind of animal. Uncle Arthur,” ex- 
claimed Harold; “it seems hard to kill.” 

“ Oh, I don’t know,” said Charley laughing, “ if you 
can’t kill it by chopping it into pieces, turn it inside 
out, so as to bring its stomach on the outside. I guess 
that would fix it; wouldn’t it, captain? ” 

“ No, Charley,” replied the captain, “ such an ex- 
periment has actually been tried, but so far from kill- 
ing the animal the old stomach becomes an outside, 
and the old outside becomes a stomach.” 

Continuing his description of other forms of organ- 
isms capable of producing materials for beds of lime- 
stone, the captain told them about the bryozoans, a 
species of animal that took this name from their 
branching mosslike forms. 

The bryozoans are the lowest of the mollusks. Ex- 
ternally, they resemble a polyp, in having a circle of 
238 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


slender tentacles around the mouth. The internal 
structure, however, below the head is that of a mollusk. 
The bryozoans generally form thin crusts of lime on 
seaweeds, rocks, or other supports, or they produce 
slender mosslike tufts of thin curved plates resembling 
filaments of moss. Sometimes, however, they accu- 
mulate large masses of limestone formed by growing 
plates over plates. 

The fourth class of coral-making organisms, the 
algae or seaweeds, are plants. They are sometimes 
called nullipores. Although true algae or seaweeds, yet 
they produce stony encrustations that cover the sur- 
faces of dead coral or coral rock in forms resembling 
lichens. These encrustations closely resemble some 
forms of coral but differ from them in the absence of 
cells or pin punctures in their masses. 

While talking about the sea-anemones, one of the 
boys inquired of the captain whether any of these ani- 
mals were able to protect themselves from their ene- 
mies. The captain informed them that the anemones 
possessed both a defensive as well as an offensive means 
for protection; that when alarmed they would some- 
times expel large quantities of water from the mouth, 
draw in their tentacles, causing them to disappear, and 
at the same time contract or shrink into a much smaller 
space. That they possessed offensive means for pro- 
tection, Harold learned shortly afterward by painful 
experience. 

One day while, with the exception of Hiram, they 
were all in the swimming-pool, Harold and Charley 

239 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


had left them for a while and, without dressing, had 
waded along the bank of the smaller lagoon. On leav- 
ing the water, Harold had taken a penknife out of the 
pocket of his jacket, from where it was lying in the 
sand, and was cutting a boat from a piece of cork. 
They stopped for a moment to examine two large sea- - 
anemones with deep red tentacles. The anemones 
were in a portion of the lagoon where there were no 
other animals, and were fixed to the bottom close to 
each other. While examining them, Harold’s knife 
fell out of his hand into the water directly between the 
two animals. Unwilling to lose it, Harold started 
to dive into the water. Seeing what he was about 
to do, Charley cried excitedly: 

Don’t dive in there, Harold ! Should you touch 
the sea-anemones you will almost certainly get stung 
by them, and as they are large you might be greatly 
injured.” 

“ But, Charley,” was the reply, I can’t afford to 
lose that penknife. I guess I’ll risk being stung.” He 
then very foolishly dove into the deep water, planning 
to reach the knife by afterward cautiously approaching 
the place it had fallen. Slowly creeping along the 
bottom until he got near the sea-nettles, he thrust one 
arm between them and held on to the bottom with the 
other hand. Suddenly losing his hold on the bottom, 
he was thrust upward by the buoyancy of the water, so 
that his arm brushed the tentacles of the two sea- 
nettles. The frightened animals instantly wrapped 
their tentacles around a portion of his arm between the 
240 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


wrist and the elbow, and stinging him, produced such 
intense pain that he was rendered unconscious and fell 
into the deep water, fortunately away from the ani- 
mals. Indeed, had not Charley beei> present, he would 
probably have been drowned ; for he remained uncon-; 
scious for some time. Charley instantly diving into 
the deep water picked him up from the bottom and soon 
had him lying on the sand. Leaving him here, Charley 
ran rapidly toward the captain and Jack, who had come 
out of the water and had just finished dressing them- 
selves. 

Help ! Help ! ” cried Charley. Harold has been 
stung by two big sea-anemones and is lying uncon- 
scious on the beach.’’ 

Running to Harold they were pleased to find he had 
regained consciousness. As soon as he saw the cap- 
tain, he cried, pointing to his arm: 

‘‘ Uncle Arthur, I have been stung by two sea-nettles. 
The pain is something awful. Can you do anything to 
take it away ? ” 

‘‘ Let me see your arm, Harold,” was the reply. 

More than three-fourths of the arm between the 
wrist and the elbow, that had come in contact with the 
angry sea-nettles, showed an intense inflammation, and 
had already commenced to swell. 

How did it happen, Charley ? ” the captain asked. 

Harold’s penknife fell in the water between the two 
large sea-nettles. I tried to keep him from diving in 
to get it, but could not do so. While trying to pick 
the knife up he lost his hold on the bottom. As he 
Q 241 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


was pushed up by the water his arm brushed past the 
animals, when they stung him as you see.” 

The pain was so great that Harold, though a brave 
little fellow, could hardly keep from crying. Turning 
to Jack and Charley, the captain said : 

“ Run to the boat both of you. Charley, bring me 
some of the birds’ eggs we collected this morning. 
Jack, row the boat here as quickly as you can.” 

Charley soon returned with the eggs. The captain 
rapidly covered the inflamed part with the whites of 
the eggs, which appeared to give Harold considerable 
relief. 

Jack soon arrived with the boat, when Harold at- 
tempted to rise and get into it, but the shock had been 
so great that he was too weak to walk, so they carried 
him to the boat, and rowing rapidly to Maddox House 
put him in bed, where, carefully washing the eggs off 
the wounded part, covered it with sweet oil. This ap- 
peared to greatly relieve him, when, the captain giving 
him a sedative from the medicine chest, he soon fell 
into a troubled sleep. 

The inflammation caused by the stings of the sea- 
nettles was so severe that Harold was obliged to re- 
main in bed for several days. When he became con- 
valescent, he was naturally desirous of learning more 
as to how these animals are able to protect themselves 
from any enemy that might attack them. 

“ Uncle Arthur,” he inquired, “ when the tentacles 
of the nettles closed on my arm, I felt as though it was 
grasped by red-hot fingers. Immediately afterward 
242 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


I felt a burning pain as though the animals were 
squirting poison. Can the animals do this ? ” 

“ Yes, Harold,” was the reply. ‘‘ They are provided 
for their protection with dangerous concealed weapons 
like little darts or spears, which they threw out from 
their bodies with such force that they entered the flesh 
of your arm. These darts are called by Agassiz, ‘ lasso- 
cells,’ from the small cell-shaped sheaths in which they 
are coiled, and from which they are shot out, as he 
says, ‘ with lightning-like rapidity.’ As soon as the 
cells enter the body they are followed by an injection 
of poison, probably like the highly acid material that is 
secreted by hornets, wasps, bees, etc.” 

‘‘ Then, uncle, these darts or lasso-cells are still stick- 
ing in my arm, are they? ” 

‘‘ Yes, Harold,” was the reply. 

How long are they ? ” inquired Harold, who was 
naturally very much interested in them. 

“ Oh, quite short,” replied the captain, “ so short, 
indeed, that you could put two hundred of them end to 
end in the space of an inch.” 

“ I don’t care, they can sting all right,” replied 
Harold. Or, at least, the cells can together with the 
acid substance afterward squirted into the wounds. 
They knocked me senseless, and if Charley had not 
been on hand I might have been drowned.” 

'' Then, Harold,” said the captain, ‘‘ you can under- 
stand that if a sea-anemone or other polyp should give 
a small animal a full stroke it would almost instantly 
kill it.” 


243 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XVIII 

The Sea Grotto at Parker Cliffs 

Although Harold’s arm was so badly stung by the 
sea-nettles that he was obliged to remain in bed for 
several days, yet the inflammation disappeared more 
rapidly than it would have done had not the lad 
been in such a general healthy condition. Indeed, 
he was soon up, around, and as active as usual, and 
this is saying no little; for the lad was so brimful of 
physical energy that while awake he was scarcely ever 
at rest. 

After several weeks of hard work, the vegetable 
garden at Maddox Clearing had been placed in good 
condition. During most of this time they all slept at 
Maddox House. But now that the work at the clear- 
ing had progressed so far they again settled down at 
Jackson House, which was not only larger and more 
convenient than the house at the clearing, but also gave 
them a view of the ocean. Should, therefore, a pass- 
ing ship be seen they could set fire to a pile of wood,- 
cocoanut husks, and other inflammable materials they 
had piled together for a signal when needed. Be- 
sides this, they had also rigged up a mast and rope 
on the top of the tallest palm tree on Parker Cliffs with 
a flag for a signal by day and an arrangement for hoist- 
ing a bengola light for a signal by night. Moreover, 
244 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Hiram had mounted the bronze cannon in front of the 
porch at Jackson House so as to be able to fire minute 
guns should a ship approach the island. 

They had now plenty of spare time. This was 
especially the case with the boys; for their regular 
duties did not generally require more than an hour or 
two at the most, and with the exception of those days 
when there was work to do in the kitchen garden at 
Jackson House, or in the garden at Maddox Clearing, 
they had plenty of time for exploring the different 
parts of the large lagoon, as well as its four islands. 

It must not be supposed that the captain permitted 
the boys to spend all their time in this manner. A 
portion of each day, excepting when the captain had 
given them a whole holiday, was devoted to reading 
or keeping up their school studies. The captain was 
an admirable teacher, and was too sensible to permit 
the boys to give up their studies entirely. 

The boys generally enjoyed these whole or nearly 
whole holidays in boat No. 13 on the Harding Lagoon, 
or in The Chums, on the lagoon of Twin Island No. i. 
Jack sometimes accompanied them in these excursions, 
though frequently he spent the day with the captain, 
for whom he was acting as an amanuensis; for the 
captain was editing, as well as adding to, the manu- 
script of '' The Physical Geography of the Sea,” before 
referred to. Jack was happy to do this work, not only 
because he was becoming more and more attached 
to the captain, but also because the work gave him an 
opportunity for becoming better acquainted with the 

245 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


animals, plants, and natural phenomena of the oceanic 
islands of the Pacific, as well as of the ocean itself. 

One morning, after the boys had completed their 
work, on an occasion when the entire balance of the 
day was to be their own, they had planned to spend 
the time on the large lagoon in boat No. 13. When 
about ready to leave, they turned to Jack and said : 

“ Won’t you come with us. Jack? We’re going to 
have a splendid time fishing, swimming, and explor- 
ing.” 

I think not,” said Jack. '' I promised to help the 
captain in his work on the book.” 

'' Boys,” said the captain, as they were getting 
ready to leave, don’t forget you are to weed the 
onion bed at Maddox Clearing to-morrow. As it 
is very hot in the middle of the day, you had better 
get to work early in the morning. It will pay you to 
get your work done early to-morrow, so you can start 
soon after breakfast.” 

** Boys,” said Jack, I’ll do all your work around 
the house to-morrow morning, so you can take an early 
breakfast and reach the clearing in the cool of the 
morning.” 

‘‘ That’s jolly good of you. Jack,” said the boys. 

Then,” said the captain, ‘‘ if that’s so, how would 
you like to spend the night at Maddox House, get your 
work done, and so have all the rest of to-morrow to 
vourselves ? ” 

That would be great, Harold, wouldn’t it? ” cried 
Charley. “We’ll stay all night, won’t we, Harold?” 

246 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ Are you sure you’re not afraid, Harold ? ” in- 
quired the captain in a joking tone. 

“ Why, of course. I’m not afraid. Uncle Arthur,” 
replied the lad in a reproachful tone. 

“ Captain,” said Charley, ** you don’t care when 
we do the weeding, do you? We might arrange to 
do it to-day in the cool part of the evening, and this 
would give us all to-morrow to ourselves.” 

I don’t care when you do it, boys,” said the captain. 
'' If I think you manly enough to remain at the clear- 
ing all night I can surely trust you to do your work 
intelligently. Of course, you won’t work during the 
greatest heat of the day. But,” he continued, “ if you 
are going to stay over night you had better take some 
extra food with you. Jack,” he continued, ** tell Hiram 
the boys are going to stay all night at Maddox Clear- 
ing and would like some extra food put in the boat.” 

In a short time Hiram and Jack returned with the 
food supplies. In addition to these, however, Hiram 
was carrying in one hand a new spade that he had ob- 
tained from among the stores of the wrecked brig. 

“ Take this spade to the clearing, my lads. I’ll need 
it next week for digging a bed for beets. Look out it 
don’t cut ye. I hev ground the edge a’most ez sharp ez 
a cutlass. I’ll store it for’d where it’ll be out of the 
way. I say, my lads,” he continued in a surprised tone, 
wot’s this here contrivance,” pointing to a formid- 
able looking weapon consisting of a large bayonet- 
knife fixed firmly but ingeniously at the end of one 
of the hickory hoe-handles that had been shipped with 
247 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


agricultural hardware as part of the ^argo of the 
derelict brig. 

Harold and I rigged it up. We are going to spear 
fish in the lagoon with it,” replied Charley. 

Both the captain and Hiram smiled at Charley’s re- 
marks. Hiram picked up the weapon and, handing it 
to the captain, said : 

'' It’s a good piece of work fer lads ez young ez 
these. Thet thar bayonet’ll hold to the end of the 
handle all right. I don’t think I could hev fixed it 
tighter myself. If ye strike any animal with thet 
my lads, ye kin make up yer minds it’ll hold all right.” 

Yes,” said the captain laughing, if they strike 
anything.” 

Well, good-bye, boys,” he continued, as they now 
pulled off, “ we won’t look for you until to-morrow, 
late in the afternoon. Have a good time, and don’t 
forget I am trusting you to take care of yourselves.” 

The boat moved rapidly across the lagoon toward 
Twin Island No. i. They were soon busy in planning 
how to spend the unexpected extra holiday they were to 
have on the morrow, as soon as they finished their 
work at the clearing. 

“ Harold,” said Charley, ‘‘ I’ve been thinking of that 
stone oven the captain told us about that is employed 
for cooking sea-slugs before they are smoked. Let’s 
go straight to Maddox Clearing, build a stone oven 
and, after getting the stones hot, put in a yam. It’ll 
taste bully when roasted. When we get the yam in 
the oven and the oven shut, we’ll let it take care of itself 
248 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


and have a good swim in the pool and a walk on the 
beach. When we return to Maddox House we ought 
to find the yam roasted just right for eating.” 

“ That’ll be fun,” cried Harold, '' and what will we 
do then. Can’t we arrange our work so as to get all 
to-morrow to ourselves ? ” 

That’s just what I’ve been thinking about,” ex- 
claimed Charley. We’ll get an early supper and 
work on the onion bed in the cool of the evening. Then 
we can spend all to-morrow in boat No. 13 on the 
Harding Lagoon. We have never thoroughly ex- 
amined the lagoon side of Parker Cliffs.” 

Charley’s proposal met with Harold’s entire ap- 
proval, not only because it came from Charley to 
whom Harold was greatly attached, but especially be- 
cause there was something so attractive in the idea not 
only of building the stone oven, but also of carefully 
examining part of the island that none of their 
party had so far thoroughly explored. Therefore, 
as soon as they reached Maddox House they dug a 
hole for the oven, started a fire with wood and small 
pieces of cocoanut husks, and making alternate layers 
of hard bits of limestone, wood, and cocoanut husks 
soon had the stones quite hot. Then wrapping a good- 
sized yam in several layers of cocoanut leaves, and 
covering it with a layer of leaves, they covered the 
leaves with a layer of soil and left the heat in the 
stones to do the rest. 

'' Now,” said Charley, if everything goes right, 
that yam will be baked all right when we come back. I 
249 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


say, Harold,” he continued, '' people don’t have to 
starve on an island like this, do they? ” 

'' No,” said Harold, I guess, Charley, you and I 
could manage to get along even if we were here on the 
island all by ourselves. Of course,” he continued, 
“ I wouldn’t like to be alone. I’m glad enough to 
have Captain Harding, Hiram, and Jack with us.” 

After a pleasant swim they rowed the boat over the 
lagoon looking through the clear waters at such por- 
tions of the bottom as were in sight. On several oc- 
casions they saw large fish resting almost motionless 
on the bottom of the lagoon, and tried several times to 
strike them with the bayonet-pointed spear. It would 
have worked all right, as Charley explained, if it 
had only been long enough. But the end of the spear 
did not reach the fish below by ten feet or more. The 
clear waters caused the lagoon to appear much shal- 
lower than it actually was, so they put the harpoon in 
the bottom of the boat, remarking philosophically : 

We’ll use it in shallower water and may then 
have better luck.” 

On their return to the stone oven they found the 
yam splendidly baked, and greatly enjoyed eating the 
sweet, mealy substance. Of course they had other 
things for supper, but this tasted best because they 
had prepared it. I have seen boys camping out, smack- 
ing their lips over the burnt and almost raw white 
potatoes they had cooked in a fire, and were so horribly 
prepared that had they been brought to their tables 
at home they would have turned up their noses in 
250 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


disgust. But then they had cooked them, and that in 
their estimation made things all right. 

I don’t wish it to be understood that the yam was 
badly cooked. Indeed, it had been cooked splendidly. 
They had prepared the stone oven in accordance with 
the captain’s directions, so that when they covered it up 
and left it alone, it had to cook all right, since they 
were not present to take it out of the fire every now and 
then and otherwise prevent its proper cooking. 

Rompey, who was of course with the boys, not only 
greatly enjoyed the swim and the excursion in the boat, 
but especially expressed his entire approval of the 
yam and the manner in which it had been prepared. 
Indeed, the roasted yam was so great a success that 
they placed another yam in the boat, determining to 
build another oven sometime early next day, when they 
would start a fire so as to have it properly cooked on 
their return. 

You may possibly ask whether such young boys as 
Charley and Harold would not be timid about spend- 
ing the night alone in a house so far from their com- 
panions. But I am glad to say that both of them were 
sensible, manly boys, who were abundantly able to 
take care of themselves and, therefore, never thought 
of such a thing as being afraid of spending the night 
alone. 

Shortly after supper they began the weeding of the 
onion bed, and completed it in about two hours. 

As they sat talking before bedtime on the porch of 
the Maddox House, with Rompey lying at their feet, 

251 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Charley read aloud a chapter from the Bible. Shortly 
after this they went to sleep and did not awake until 
early next morning. Indeed, they were so little afraid 
that they never even thought of keeping watch. 

As planned, they started early next morning for the 
large lagoon. Leaving The Chums at the No. 4 land- 
ing, they ran the flag to the top of the mast, thus 
showing that the boat was at this landing, and going 
to boat No. 13, on the lagoon, they pulled down the 
signal, thus indicating that the boat was out, and be- 
gan rowing to the northwest shore of Parker Cliffs. 
The tide had been running out, and was then near its 
lowest point, so that there was no danger in making an 
examination of this part of the coast. 

“ By the time we reach the shore,” said Charley, 
‘‘ the tide should be running in, so that we can safely 
examine the shore of the cliffs, even if we might chance 
to get near the opening through which the ocean com- 
municates with the lagoon.” 

“ Charley,” said Harold, I hope we’ll discover 
what will interest the captain, Hiram, and Jack.” 

So do I,” said Charley; and, somehow or other, 
I think we shall.” 

The boat was now several miles northeast from 
Twin Island No. i, when Charley cried to Harold: 

“ See here, Harold, how stupid we’ve been. We’ve 
forgotten to leave the spade at Maddox Clearing. Shall 
we go back? ” 

Oh, no,” said Harold, we can leave it there on 
our return. It’s not in the way here.” 

252 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


As before stated, on the shores of the lagoon, im- 
mediately opposite the southern part of Parker Cliffs, 
the land ran in a steep incline down to the waters of 
the lagoon, but as they proceeded further to the south- 
east, it rose in the precipitous cliffs they had already 
visited with their other companions. 

There ought to be caves and grottoes here as on the 
other side, Charley,” said Harold. 

‘‘ We’re almost certain to find them,” replied 
Charley. Don’t you remember the captain saying that 
all the limestone in this part of the island was more or 
less eaten away either by the rain-water or by the ocean 
water ? ” 

As the boat moved through the deep waters near the 
cliffs they saw the same deep flutings, or furrowings, 
in the vertical walls where the water had poured down 
them, as well as places where the waves had burrowed 
deeply into their base. 

‘‘ I say, Charley,” remarked Harold, wouldn’t it 
be jolly if we could find a cave or grotto in the face of 
the cliffs large enough for the boat to enter? ” 

“ It would be great,” replied Charley, “ for then we 
could hide the boat.” 

‘‘ Why should we want to hide the boat? ” inquired 
Harold. ‘‘ There’s no one on the island to hide it 
from.” 

I was thinking,” was the reply, that we might 
hide it should another war-canoe visit Harding Island 
as was told about in the letter we found in the box 
alongside the skeleton.” 


253 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Oh, I forgot all about that;” replied Harold. “ But 
we haven’t found the grotto yet.” 

‘‘I’m not sure. What do you call that ! ” cried 
Charley, pointing to an opening in the side of the cliff 
wide enough to permit the boat to enter provided they 
bent their heads low in the boat. 

“ Shall we go in, Charley? ” inquired Harold. 

“ I’d like to,” was the reply. “ But let’s first see in 
what direction the water is running. This place is not 
much more than half a mile from the underground pas- 
sage connecting the waters of the ocean with those of 
the lagoon. If the water is running into that opening 
it would probably be easier to get in than to get out.” 

“ It’s not running either way, Charley,” replied Har- 
old. “ See that chip of wood there,” pointing to a 
piece of wood that was floating in the water at the 
opening. 

“That’s so,” replied Charley. “Let’s go in; it’ll 
be safe; it’s slack water now.” 

The water at the opening was very deep. The width 
of the opening was fully thirty feet. Rowing the boat 
directly toward it and bending their heads, so as not 
[to touch the top, they soon had the boat inside a cavern 
|or grotto, the height of the roof of which so rapidly in- 
creased that it rose fully fifty feet above their heads, 
and even then they could see in the dim light that it was 
apparently much higher in parts farther from the en- 
trance. 

“ Shall we take the boat farther in? ” asked Harold. 

“ Yes, let’s go in a little farther,” was the reply. 

254 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


They found the water deep for a distance of thirty 
feet from the entrance of the grotto. From this point 
it rapidly shallowed, so that the boat soon grated on the 
banks of a fine white coral sand and stopped on the 
right-hand side of the entrance. The water extended 
fully sixty feet inside the cavern. It did not, however, 
by any means reach the walls of the precipice at this 
point, for the grotto was apparently of great dimen- 
sions, and extended an unknown distance in the direc- 
tion opposite to the opening. All they could see in 
this direction, however, was a blackness almost as 
great as that of a starless night. 

‘‘We have made a great discovery,’’ exclaimed 
Charley. “ Let’s moor the boat here and explore the 
grotto.” 

“ All right, Charley,” said Harold. “ This is a big 
cavern, and we ought to be able to tell the others all 
about it when we return. Suppose we get the candles 
and some other things from the boat and climb the path 
here that leads upward.” 

While they were doing this, Rompey, who had run 
along the side of the water toward the entrance began 
to show great uneasiness, every now and then barking 
and growling, as if he had seen something he did not 
like. 

Knowing the intelligence of the dog the boys turned 
toward the entrance, waiting to see what conclusion 
Rompey came to. 

“ We don’t know what it may be,” said Charley. 
“ Take this, Harold,” handing him the bayonet-spear, 
255 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


and ril take this,” he said, seizing the sharpened 
spade. 

But it was evidently a false alarm, for Rompey, after 
continuing to growl for a few moments, came back 
shaking his tail as much as to say : 
i “ I guess I was wrong. I thought there was some- 
thing in the deep water there, but I’ve changed my 
mind,” so the boys stood looking at the opening. 

‘‘ Is it not beautiful ! ” said Harold. “ We might 
almost think we have discovered the palace of one of 
the genii of the ocean.” 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XIX 

Cut off by the Tide. Battle with a Giant Squid 

It was, indeed, a beautiful sight the boys saw as they 
stood facing the entrance to the grotto, on a gently 
sloping bank a few hundred feet from the boat. Out- 
side they could see the deep blue waters of the lagoon 
sparkling in the sunlight, while inside, near the en- 
trance, the nearer waters partially flooded that portion 
of the grotto with a pale, bluish light. Stalactites of 
pure white limestone hung in graceful pendants from 
the roof. Those nearest the opening were illumined by 
the pure white light of the sun, while those back of 
them, lighted only by the blue light emitted by the 
deep waters, flung back a light resembling in color 
that of a clear sky. Near their feet lay the boat, gently 
rocking from side to side over what, in the full light of 
day would have been a snow-white beach of coral sand, 
but in the dim light of that portion of the grotto was of 
a wonderful blue. 

As their eyes became accustomed to the faint light, 
they could see that the grotto was larger than they had 
at first supposed. The roof increased rapidly in height 
from the immediate neighborhood of the entrance, and 
was decorated with magnificent pendants, or stalactites, 
of white limestone, that in all parts, except immediately 
over the water, had either formed stalagmites below 

R 257 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


them or, in places, had joined the stalagmites and 
reared up pillars which supported the roof of the cave 
above. 

Near the entrance the nearly vertical walls were 
covered with stalactitic columns that, like those seen 
in the grotto on the opposite side of the cliffs, closely 
resembled the pipes of a huge organ. Here, however, 
instead of a single organ only, there was a series 
of grand organs arranged one after another on the 
walls. The ceiling in front of the organs was orna- 
mented by stalactites, while immediately below were 
stalagmites of fantastic shapes that required no flight 
of the imagination to cause them closely to resemble 
pulpits, reading desks, or seats for the vested choirs 
of some huge cathedral. Indeed, the play of colors 
on these masses of limestone varying, as it did, from 
a pure white in the immediate neighborhood of the 
entrance to blues that varied from pale tints near the 
entrance to nearly indigoes in the dim distance, might 
have made them think that the entrance was a huge 
stained-glass window composed of both transparent 
and blue glasses of different shades. 

What do you think of this for a sea grotto, Har- 
old ? ” exclaimed Charley. 

It’s all right,” was the reply. Wouldn’t this be 
a bully place to hide in if the island is ever visited by 
savages. We could run the boat in here and hide in 
parts of this big cave where they could never begin to 
find us.” 

It’s a splendid place, Harold,” said Charley, ‘‘ but 
258 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


one can only get in here at low tide. We must be sure 
to get out before the tide rises, or we mightn’t be able 
to escape.” 

‘‘ Do you think the tide rises high enough to cover 
the entrance, Charley ? ” inquired Harold. 

‘‘ I’m sure of it,” was the reply. ‘‘ I noticed, when 
we came in, that the water-mark on the sides of the 
cliff reached some little distance above the top of the 
opening.” 

But there’ll be time enough to make an examina- 
tion, won’t there ? ” exclaimed Harold. 

‘‘ Oh, yes,” replied Charley, there will be nearly six 
hours before the high tide closes the entrance. We 
can easily get out of the grotto if we reach the entrance 
three hours from now ; but, to be sure, suppose we call 
it two hours. If we are back in two hours, we’ll be all 
right.” 

“ Then let’s start,” said Harold. “ In two hours we 
ought to be able to find out much about the grotto.” 

Very well,” replied Charley; but wait a moment 
until I go down to the boat. Come with me.” 

What do you want to get? ” inquired Harold. 

‘‘A box of matches and a half-dozen candles for 
each of us. There are lots of both in the boat. Then 
we want to put on our heads the contrivances we 
rigged up the other day to hold the lighted candles, just 
as the miners do in the coal mines.” So they placed 
the contrivances on their heads and lighted the candles. 

Now, let’s get off,” said Harold, anxious to see the 
grotto. 


259 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Wait a moment/’ said Charley, going back to the 
boat. 

‘‘ What are you getting now? ” inquired Harold. 

Something to eat,” was the reply; “ we may be 
hungry before we get back.” 

“ What, hungry in two hours ! ” exclaimed Harold. 
“ Are you not forgetting that we expect to get back in 
about two hours from now ? ” 

It won’t hurt to have the food,” replied Charley; 
we might be longer than we expect, and then you’ll 
be glad I brought it.” 

While this was going on, Rompey, who had wan- 
dered down to the shore of the water nearest the en- 
trance again began to growl, as though he smelled 
or saw something he did not like. 

I wonder what worries Rompey, Harold ? ” in- 
quired Charley. 

Oh, I guess it’s nothing,” exclaimed Harold, anx- 
ious to get off. 

Come, let’s go then ; we’re losing time.” 

Rompey had again apparently come to the conclu- 
sion that there was nothing in the deep water worth 
worrying about. He had come up with the boys, so 
they started off along a slope that led gently upward. 
Soon the steepness of the slope increased, but their 
candles lighted the slope ahead so well that they had 
no trouble in following it. 

There was one circumstance that gave Charley no 
little anxiety, though Harold, less careful, apparently 
never thought about it. The grotto was so large that 
260 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


they might have some difficulty in retracing their foot- 
steps. Of course, there was no regular path, and the 
only way they had for distinguishing one part of the 
grotto from another was the peculiarities of the stalac- 
tites, the stalagmites, or the huge pillars that reached 
continuously from the ceiling to the floor. But there 
were so many of these that looked so wonderfully alike, 
that they could not rely on them as safe guide-posts. 

‘‘ We must be careful not to lose our way,’’ said 
Charley. I wish I had brought my little pocket 
compass. There’s no stream of water here as there was 
in the other cave to lead us back.” 

Oh, I guess we can find our way back,” said Har- 
old, anxious to get on. 

As they continued walking upward, they noticed that 
the darkness gradually decreased. 

‘‘ We’re coming toward another opening into the 
grotto,” said Harold. See, there’s a spot of light 
directly ahead of us.” 

Yes,” said Charley, and there’s still another,” 
pointing to a place where a few straggling rays of light 
entered through the roof. Walking rapidly toward 
the place where the light appeared immediately ahead, 
they were soon at a portion of the cave where, by 
crawling on their hands and knees, they were able 
to reach the outside at a portion of Parker Cliffs not 
far from the edge of a high precipice facing the la- 
goon. This place was so hidden by growing plants 
that it was almost impossible to see it from the outside. 
Fearing they might have some difficulty in finding 
261 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


it again on their return, they took the precaution of 
not only carefully noting the appearance of the neigh- 
borhood, but also of raising a small monument of 
stones to mark the position of the entrance. 

From this part of the cliffs they could get an excel- 
lent view of the greater part of Harding Island. Twin 
Island No. I could be distinctly seen a short distance 
on their left. 

And now let’s try to find the opening in the roof 
of the grotto,” suggested Charley. ‘‘ We’ll have to 
be careful we don’t fall into it. The roof over that 
point seems to be so far from the bottom that I don’t 
think a fellow would care much for anything after he 
had reached the cave from that opening. 

After wandering around on top of the cliffs for some 
distance, both on the ocean and on the lagoon side, they 
at last found the opening, and after noting its exact 
location they returned to the point where they had left 
the cave. Sitting down here they took a few moments’ 
rest. 

Although there is plenty of time, I think we had 
now better be getting back to the boat,” said Charley. 

We were only about half an hour reaching this open- 
ing, and we ought to be able to get back in less time ; 
for, as you will remember, it’s practically down hill all 
the way.” 

So, lighting their candles, they passed through the 
entrance and began to retrace their steps toward the 
boat. 

Charley’s estimate as to the time it would take to 
262 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


regain the boat would have been all right had they 
been able to return there directly, but they found it 
very difficult to retrace their footsteps. Indeed, after 
walking for more than half an hour, they began to fear 
they had taken the wrong route. At last, when they' 
reached a place where the path inclined upward, they 
felt sure that a mistake had been made. 

“ Harold, there’s something wrong here,” said 
Charley. We’re now walking upward, and we 
should still be walking downward. Don’t you remem- 
ber we climbed nearly all the way up from the opening 
to the top of the cliffs ? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply; but I think we’re going in 
the right general direction, don’t you ? ” 

I’m not certain,” said Charley, “ but I think so 
too.” 

The light of the candles was sufficient before long 
to show that the surroundings were entirely different 
from anything they remembered having seen. Still 
under the belief that they were going toward the boat, 
they kept on until at last they reached a portion of the 
grotto where the roof was so low that they were 
obliged to stoop in order to pass through it, and 
suddenly reaching the opening at the far end, they both 
began to slide down a steep incline so rapidly that 
they were thrown off their feet. Fortunately, the 
length of the slope was short, and neither of them was 
injured. 

It was now quite evident that they had lost their 
way and they began to worry, but not for fear they 
263 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


could not locate their boat. This they firmly believed 
they would have no trouble in being able to do eventu- 
ally. It was the thought of the coming high tide that 
worried them. Unless they soon reached the boat the 
rising tide would close the entrance. Therefore, they 
hurried along at a rapid rate, the path continuing to 
take them through portions of the grotto they were 
sure they had never seen before. 

They kept this up for fully two hours from the 
place they had slid down the inclined portion of the 
roof. Feeling hungry they rested a while and began 
eating a part of the food Charley had brought with him 
from the boat, not forgetting to give Rompey his share. 

“ I’m glad you brought this food with you, Charley,” 
replied Harold. ‘‘ You’ve more sense about such 
things than I have. I can only see a little distance 
ahead, while you can see much farther.” 

While Harold was talking he was looking carefully 
around him. 

Charley,” he said, do you know I think I re- 
member being in this part of the cave before. I’m cer- 
tain I have seen that funny-shaped pillar before. I 
remember thinking how odd it looked, black at the top 
and bottom and snow-white in the middle.” 

“ I’m afraid you’re right, Harold,” said Charley, 
“ I think I remember seeing it myself. And now,” he 
said, stooping to pick something up, “ I know you’re 
right. See what I found on the ground,” pointing to a 
number of candles and a box of matches. “ Look in 
your pockets and see if you have any there? ” 

264 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ No,” was the reply, after a short search, “ they 
must have fallen out of my pocket when I slid down the 
path nearly two hours ago.” 

On looking around, they discovered that the place at 
which they had rested was at the foot of the very in- 
cline down which they slipped. It was evident, there- 
fore, that during the last two hours they had wandered 
in a more or less circular path, so they were no nearer 
the boat than they had been two hours before. 

What shall we do, Charley? We’re lost for sure, 
aren’t we? It’s no joke being lost in a place like this.*” 
We’re lost all right,” replied Charley. There’s 
no doubt about that, but don’t get rattled. We’ll be able 
to reach the boat ; although, of course, we’ll have to re- 
main until the next low tide, for the entrance will be 
shut by the high water. But this need not worry us. 
There’s plenty of air to breathe, and we have food 
enough to last for a day or more.” 

In what direction shall we go, Charley?” 

I don’t know,” was the reply. Look at Rompey, 
H-arold, see how queerly he is acting.” 

The dog had been running restlessly about from 
place to place as if he was endeavoring to follow some 
scent. He had now come to his young masters and, 
looking into their faces, commenced shaking his tail 
and whining as if he saw they were in trouble. 

“ Let’s get Rompey to lead us to the boat,” said 
Charley. He should be able to find our old tracks 
by his power of scent. Let’s show him something from 
the boat and get him to lead us to it.” 

265 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ That’s a good idea, Charley,” was the reply. We 
ought to have done this long ago. Here is something 
I think Rompey will associate with the boat,” saying 
this, he picked up a drinking-cup that was always kept 
in the boat, that they had taken along with them. Call- 
ing the dog to them and showing him the cup, Charley 
exclaimed : 

‘‘ The boat, Rompey ! The boat ! Find the boat ! ” 
The dog looked at them intently for a few moments, as 
if in doubt as to what they wished him to do, but when 
they both repeated : 

Find the boat, Rompey! Find the boat!” he 
began to shake his tail in a way that showed that he 
understood, and after making wide circles all around 
them, at last ran in a direction almost directly opposite 
to that they had taken, stopping every now and then 
to look back and bark, as if to say : 

Follow me. This is the right way. I’ll find the 
boat for you.” 

The boys followed him, for they felt sure he had 
scented their footsteps on leaving the boat. Indeed, 
in about half an hour, he led them to the boat. 

Hurrah, there’s the boat! ” cried Charley. Good 
dog, Rompey, you found it all right, didn’t you ? ” he 
said, and both boys began petting the animal. 

Rompey was greatly pleased by the petting. On 
looking toward the entrance they found, as they ex- 
pected, that the tide had risen. They were therefore 
shut in the grotto until the next low tide. 

Well,” said Charley, we can’t get out, so let’s 
266 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


make the best of a bad bargain. Let’s light up the 
grotto with the rest of the candles we have with us. 
There are more in the boat.” 

Placing eight candles in different parts of the grotto 
near the boat they lighted them. 

The air was so still that the candles burned steadily, 
and gave a fairly good general illumination consider- 
ing the comparatively small amount of light each 
emitted. 

Now let’s go to the boat and get something to 
eat,” said Harold. 

As they walked toward the boat, Rompey ran ahead, 
but stopped when near the boat and began barking 
in a loud, angry manner. 

“ Look out, Charley,” cried Harold. I am sure 
Rompey sees something. Don’t go near the boat until 
I bring you one of these things we left outside the 
boat when we came into the grotto.” 

So saying, Harold ran toward Charley with the 
spade in one hand and the bayonet-spear in the other. 

‘‘ Take whichever of these you prefer,” he continued. 

All right,” said Charley ; “ I’ll take the spade. If 
I strike anything with this it’ll be no joke. Hiram has 
put an edge on it almost as sharp as a sword.” 

Then I’ll keep the bayonet-spear,” said Harold. 

I wonder what Rompey sees, Charley ? Do you sup- 
pose there are any wild animals in the cave ? ” 

I don’t know,” replied Charley, ‘‘ but I shall be- 
fore long.” 

As the boys continued to approach the boat, Rom- 
267 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


pey’s barks became fiercer and fiercer. The intelligent 
animal seemed to be trying to tell them not to come 
nearer. Charley, however, continued to approach with 
Harold close after him. When they got nearer they 
could see a hideous-looking object, with a great 
rounded head nearly two feet in diameter, that 
reached above the top of the boat. It had two big 
eyes that were glaring at them in an angry manner. 

When they first saw the animal it seemed as though 
it had more than a dozen arms, although, as they after- 
ward discovered, there were only ten. It was waving 
these arms so rapidly that they seemed to be more nu- 
merous than they were. 

It’s a devil-fish or squid,” exclaimed Charley; at 
least it looks like one, except that it has more arms than 
I thought such animals generally have. What horrible- 
looking eyes it has and how angrily it glares at us ! ” 
Look out, Charley, that it don’t catch you with one 
of its arms. I remember Uncle Arthur telling me that 
the squid had things like suckers on the ends of its arms 
with which it can hold on to a man with a great force 
and, indeed, squeeze him so tightly as to kill him.” 

‘‘ I guess I’m safe off here,” exclaimed Charley. 
“ The arms are not long enough to reach me. Besides, 
as you can see, the animal has stopped waving its arms, 
and holding on to the side of the boat, is helping him- 
self to the fish we put in the boat for bait. Look, 
Harold,” he exclaimed excitedly, for the animal was 
using its arms or feet to rapidly pick up one fish after 
another, putting them into its mouth. 

268 


■'i-, 

» - - sii- iw‘; 















W r 



4i ; iHi ■* “■n-.'^k ; 


/ 


• t 


-• « 


> J 



■f:m 


-■* V 


4 s. , 


,. 7 i ViX i 



V 


vi 


- 


* > . > 


» I I 

^ % 1 I , 1 , 




• ^ A- ’ ■ 


.w* 



>'■ I’h. 


4 r 


_ 6 ! 


■J». •.l‘'****J 


v> 



‘*^ 'i. I. 

■* -^- •-•.• '** 4 . r ’’ 




u 


fr- 






h 







. i 



C* 



.ft i 


.'•1 





4 .' .. 



,.f 


: J * 


* • I 





/ ^ . 


. ->? :‘V' •^ 

l•.■' Je'.i ■ 


4 ft . % 


• ' '- , f 'v 'v - 


. StV -‘1 , J > # 


■'- ./ L 

3c . 

• T-t 



- nr .^‘ , 

*" * 

* ♦ vf* f* 

c iw jrj 



r^MK 


,■*4 




. ^ .» <■ L 





/ 






1 V 



Boldly facing the huge monster, he jabbed 
the spade in one of its eyes!’ 

Page 26^ 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ It must have been attracted to the boat by the smell 
of the fish/’ exclaimed Harold. I guess it lives some- 
where in the deep water near the entrance. It was this 
animal that made Rompey bark whenever he came near 
the mouth of the grotto.” 

But Charley’s estimate as to the length of the ani- 
mal’s arms was proved to be inaccurate. Suddenly 
reaching out one arm, the animal seized Charley by his 
left arm, and at once began rapidly to draw him to- 
ward its mouth, with the evident intention of swallow- 
ing him alive. 

It is fortunate that Charley did not lose his presence 
of mind. Although the grip on his arm began to 
increase so that he thought his arm was going to 
break, yet boldly facing the huge monster, he jabbed 
the spade in one of its eyes. The sharp weapon cut 
through the eye and entered the head a distance of 
several inches. When Charley drew out the spade, 
bloody matter, or something that passes for bloody 
matter, followed it. That the animal was weakened 
by the wound was evident from the grip on Charley’s 
arm growing weaker; for, while when first caught he 
could only move his left arm to steady the spade, he 
was now able to use it more freely. Although greatly 
hampered, and still tightly grasped by the animal, he 
gave a number of jabs at the head; the animal, al- 
though greatly weakened, glared angrily at Charley 
with his remaining eye, and turning his head around 
so that he could see him better, suddenly grasped his 
right arm with another tentacle. 

269 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Anger seemed to give the animal fresh strength, 
for he again endeavored to draw Charley toward its 
mouth. As soon as Harold saw Charley’s left arm 
caught by the tentacle of the fierce animal, without any 
hesitation, he boldly advanced striking it repeatedly in 
the head, and especially in the remaining eye. 

The blood, or other liquid, was now flowing freely 
from the wounds in the animal, and it commenced 
threshing its free arms in the air as if endeavoring 
to touch what it could not see. At last, two of the 
arms caught Harold by the feet, and making ap- 
parently a supreme effort, again endeavored to draw 
both boys toward its mouth. 

When Rompey saw the danger to which his two 
young masters were subjected, he sprang boldly at the 
animal, and began tearing it with his teeth, as well as 
with his claws. As the boys afterward remarked, they 
had always known that Rompey was a fighter, but the 
fierce manner in which he now bit with his teeth and 
clawed with his feet was something they would hardly 
have believed possible. But even Rompey’s help would 
have been insufficient, for the boys were being drawn 
nearer and nearer to the mouth of the animal, though 
with less and less strength, for it was nearing its 
end. When Harold was near the animal, having his 
hands at liberty, he thrust his spear in the animal, run- 
ning it through a part of its body with such force that 
it stuck into something that prevented him from draw- 
ing it out. Charley, who still managed to keep hold of 
the spade, crying to Harold, said : 

270 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Take hold of the spade, Harold, and jab him with 
it.” 

Harold, securing the spade, succeeded in repeatedly 
striking the animal with it, until its huge head, severed 
from the body, fell over the side of the boat into the 
water. The animal was now in its death-throes. The 
arms attached to the boys relaxed and gave Harold the 
opportunity of cutting off by the spade the arms that 
were attached to Charley and himself. They did not 
however, fall off when the animal died; for, as they 
afterward saw, the arms were provided with sucker-like 
disks, capable of producing a partial vacuum beneath 
them, so that they were driven on them with the force 
of the atmospheric pressure, and therefore continued 
clinging to them after the animal was dead. Indeed, it 
was not until Harold had taken his penknife from his 
pocket and cut off the disks, one by one, that they were 
freed from the horrid arms that had been endeavoring 
to draw them to an awful death. 

Now the animal was dead, they could see that it had 
only eight arms, or feet, together with two additional 
longer arms. 

I wonder if there are any more animals like this 
about here,” exclaimed Harold. 

“ I shouldn’t wonder if there were,” replied Charley, 
so don’t get too near the water. There might be 
another one there ready to catch you, and I don’t care 
to have another fight to-day; I’ve had as much as I 
want.” 

‘‘ Look at that, Charley,” exclaimed Harold ex- 
271 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


citedly. See how the head of the monster that fell 
into the water is moving around. Is it possible we 
have not killed it? ” 

‘‘ We’ve killed it all right,” replied Charley. ‘‘ Look 
closer, Harold, and you will see there are five or six big 
sharks fighting for the head of the animal, as well as' 
for the pieces of its arms or feet that have fallen in 
the water.” 

The sharks had come in through the entrance from 
the waters of the lagoon, and were feeding voraciously 
on the remains of the squid. 

Seeing that there was no other squid near, and 
feeling sure that if there had been another it would 
have made its escape on the approach of the sharks, the 
boys got into the boat and threw the remaining parts 
of the animal into the water. They kept one of the 
longer arms, however, that was fully five feet in 
length, so as to be able to show it to the captain and 
the others on their return. 

Althought it was now late in the afternoon, and they 
ought to have been quite hungry, yet they had no appe- 
tite. The disgusting odor that filled the close air of 
the grotto was enough in itself to deprive them of an 
appetite, even if their hands and bodies had not been 
covered by the material ejected by the dying squid. 

Let’s get out of the boat, Harold,” said Charley, 
and sit on the beach above the water and wait until 
the tide runs down.” 

Leaving the boat, they sat patiently waiting for the 
ebbing of the tide, noting with delight the gradual fall 
272 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


of the water from the time when a small beam of light 
came through the entrance until the opening was suf- 
ficient to permit them safely to take the boat out of the 
grotto. 

“ Come, Harold,'' cried Charley, “ we can go now." 
And rowing the boat toward the opening they were 
soon in the waters of the outer lagoon. 


S 


273 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XX 

The Foundations of Parker Cliffs 

The boat glided out of the grotto into the pure air and 
bright sunlight of the afternoon. They had been in- 
side the greater part of the day and, therefore, greatly 
rejoiced at seeing the familiar objects around them. 
There was the entrance into the sea grotto. Near 
them too were the Twin Islands, and beyond them 
the smaller Kid Islands. The blue waters of the 
lagoon seemed clearer and more beautiful than ever 
before. There was too, a freshness about the air they 
never before remembered to have noticed. Nor was 
it difficult to find the reason; the chill, gloomy air of 
the grotto, although ordinarily pure and sweet, had 
become so contaminated with the matter given off by 
the dying squid that the outer air was sweet, bright, 
and warm by contrast. Then too, they had just 
passed through very great danger, for both knew that 
.they had come very near being devoured by the animal. 

‘‘Ain’t it pleasant to be outside again, Charley?” 
exclaimed Harold. 

“ You bet it is,” was the reply. “ The air is so clean 
and warm, and the light is so bright that it beats the 
grotto all hollow. And yet, Harold,” he continued, 
“ I am glad we found the grotto and have examined 
it, and have met with the squid and killed it.” 

274 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ So am I,” said Harold. “ I understand that the 
squid is sometimes called the devil-fish, although Uncle 
Arthur told me that the devil-fish is really another 
animal. I think, however, we can say from experience 
that the name devil-fish would not be a bad one. Do 
you remember the awful eyes it had, and how terrible 
it looked when suddenly reaching out it grabbed you 
by the arms and me by the legs ? ” 

‘‘ Yes,” answered Charley, “ and wasn’t it dread- 
ful when the animal drew us toward its huge mouth 
and tried to eat us alive ? I imagine I see it now when, 
although we fought all we could, it kept drawing us 
nearer and nearer that awful opening.” 

“ Yes,” added Harold, ‘‘ and had he not been 
seriously injured, it would have been impossible 
to prevent him eating us. And did not Rompey 
fight savagely for us. Had it not been for him I 
think it would have been all up with us. Good dog, 
Rompey,” he added, petting the dog to his great de- 
light. “ How do your arms feel, Charley ? ” contin- 
ued Harold. 

“ They feel as if they might be black and blue all 
over. I’m sure the awful creature squeezed them tight 
enough.” 

“ That’s the way my legs feel,” said Harold. 

I’d like to take a swim and wash off ; I feel awfully 
dirty, but the captain told us never to go in swimming 
in this part of the lagoon where there are sharks. In- 
deed, since sharks have been attracted here by the 
flesh of the squid, it would be both dangerous and 

275 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


foolish to go in now. It is too late to go to the swim- 
ming-pool. Let’s get back to Jackson House as soon 
as we can; it is getting late, and they will be anxious 
about us. But before we go we’d better take another 
look at the entrance. The captain will be sure to ques- 
tion us about it” 

After a brief examination of the opening, they con- 
tinued rowing the boat for half an hour, when Charley 
exclaimed : 

Suppose we rest a little, Harold. My arms hurt 
me so it is hard to continue rowing. I say, Harold, is 
there anything in the boat I can rub them with to take 
away some of the pain ? ” 

There’s a bottle of witchhazel Hiram put in the 
boat to use for his rheumatism,” said Harold. ‘‘ I 
guess it would help you. Let me rub your arms with 
it.” 

Charley rolled up his shirt-sleeves. His arms — es- 
pecially the left arm, which was first seized — were black 
and blue wherever the animal had gripped him, but 
after Harold rubbed him for eight or ten minutes he 
felt greatly relieved. 

Let me do the same for you,” said Charley. 

‘‘ I wish you would,” said Harold, for my legs hurt 
very much. 

An application of the witchhazel so greatly relieved 
him that the boys, continuing to row, resting every now 
and then, reached the landing at Jackson House long 
after sunset. Here they found the captain, Hiram, and 
Jack anxiously waiting for them. 

276 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Has anything happened, boys ? ” asked the captain. 
‘‘We have all been greatly worried about you. We 
felt sure that unless something had happened you 
would not have remained away so long.” 

“We rowed the boat along the shore of the lagoon 
side of Parker Cliffs, not far from where the waters 
of the ocean communicate with those of the lagoon,” 
said Charley. 

“ Yes,” said Harold, “ and we discovered a big cave 
in the cliff that I think is nearly opposite the cave we 
all examined on the side of the ocean.” 

“We wouldn’t have gone on this side if it hadn't 
been low tide,” added Charley. “We discovered an 
entrance to a sea grotto wide enough for several boats 
to get in, but so low that we had to bend our heads 
to enter.” 

In this way, one speaking after the other, the boys 
told the captain all that occurred, beginning, of course, 
with the discovery of the cave, its size, its connection 
with the cliffs above, as well as its openings in the 
roof. 

When they came to tell about their return, about 
being lost, and rambling at a fairly rapid pace for two 
hours when they finally crossed their tracks, the cap- 
tain was much surprised, and began asking questions 
concerning the appearance of the inside, the height of 
the roof, and other points, exclaiming: 

“If you are right in thinking that this cave lies im- 
mediately opposite the one we explored, then this part 
of Parker Cliffs must be fairly honeycombed. Did you 
277 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


notice, boys,” he added, how deep the water was at 
the entrance?” 

Charley, who looked at Harold as if to say : I told 
you the captain would ask this question,” replied : 

“ The water is very deep there. We could look 
down and see the entrance of huge caverns in water so 
deep as to be almost inky black.” 

‘‘ Then,” said the captain, this part of the island is 
not only thoroughly honeycombed by the action of the 
rain-water as it slowly trickles through the limestone, 
but the sea at the base of the cliffs has been eating its 
way underneath the mass.” 

If that is so, captain,” said Jack, it wouldn’t take 
much of an earthquake shock to throw this part of the 
island into the sea, would it.” 

‘‘ It would not. Jack,” was the reply; ‘‘but I must 
try to learn more about the character of the cliffs at 
this point. We will all go soon and carefully examine 
them.” 

“ I imagine,” continued the captain, “ from what 
you tell me, that after Rompey showed you the 
way to the boat you found yourselves shut in the 
grotto by the rising tide. You had no trouble, had you, 
in breathing, for I do not doubt that the two openings 
gave plenty of fresh air. Indeed, I have no doubt that 
on both sides of the cliffs there are a number of places 
where entrances might be found to the grottoes.” 

The boys now explained how they had lighted the 
cave with candles, and of their battle with the giant 
squid. 


278 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ I wonder,” he exclaimed, “ if you know what a 
narrow escape you have had from an awful death. It 
very seldoms happens, when a squid grabs persons, 
as it did you, that they are able to get away; for it 
holds with a very tight grip. I imagine the animal was 
not very large.’’ 

When the boys said that its head was nearly two feet 
in diameter, and that it had ten arms, some of which 
were over five feet in length, the captain smiled, re- 
marking : 

‘‘ You were naturally greatly alarmed at the hid- 
eous appearance of the animal, and have, without in- 
tending to do so, exaggerated the size of the animal.” 

Well, captain,” said Charley laughing, and holding 
up a part of the foot or tentacle of the animal that they 
had put in the boat, ‘Mook at this. Here is a sub- 
stantial exaggeration fully five feet long. Is it not ? ” 

The captain was greatly astonished when he saw this 
proof of the animal’s immense size, and when they told 
him of the awful fight they had, even after they had 
been seized by the tentacles of the animal, and how they 
had continued jabbing it with the spade and bayonet- 
spear, and how Rompey had aided them, he exclaimed : 

‘‘ You would have been drawn almost instantly into 
the mouth of the monster had not its strength been so 
greatly decreased by the many wounds it received. But 
come up to the house and get something to eat and 
wash up.” 

When the boys attempted to leave the boat they 
found they had grown so stiff while talking to the 
279 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


captain, that Harold was almost unable to walk or 
Charley to use his arms. 

'' Hello, boys,’’ exclaimed the captain. ‘‘ I guess the 
animal gripped you pretty tight.” 

‘‘ You’ll think so. Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold, 
when you see how black and blue we are in all places 
where the animal grabbed us.” 

If that’s so,” said the captain, ‘‘ the sooner you 
get to the house and let me look you over the better 
it will be.” 

The condition of the two lads was such that the 
captain insisted on their going to bed when he bathed 
the injured parts in a stronger liniment than that they 
had used in the boat. They had been injured more 
than they had imagined. Indeed, it was necessary for 
them to remain in bed all the next day. They were 
able, however, to leave the bed on the day following 
and move around the house and near it for short dis- 
tances and, on the day afterward, they had practically 
recovered. 

Naturally, while kept in the house, the captain gave 
them much interesting information concerning the 
habits of a number of animals allied to, or closely 
resembling, the huge squid that had so nearly killed 
them, pointing out the difference between the octopus 
and the squid, telling them a number of interesting 
stories about the huge sea-animal known to the an- 
cients as the kraken. 

As soon as the boys were able to go with them, the 
captain and Hiram made a careful examination of the 
280 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


sea-grotto, timing their visit so as to reach the entrance 
at low tide. They thoroughly explored not only the 
portions over which the boys had wandered, but pushed 
their examination much farther, thus showing that the 
entire mass of limestone of this part of the island was 
thoroughly honeycombed. They discovered, moreover, 
that not only had the sea undermined the cliffs at the 
entrance to the grotto, but that other portions, es- 
pecially those extending toward the underground pas- 
sage between the ocean and the lagoon, had also been 
eaten away by the waves. Indeed, the entire mass ap- 
peared to be resting on comparatively frail support 
over parts of the ocean that were shown by a sounding- 
line to be in some places of a depth greater than six 
hundred feet. 

When they reached the upper opening of the cave 
that led to the top of the cliffs, the captain made a care- 
ful examination, and came to the conclusion that the 
sea-grotto was situated in the limestone directly oppo- 
site the cave on the side of the ocean they had already 
explored. But not being quite sure of this, they de- 
termined to make a more complete examination of this 
cave on the next day, when they planned to take boat 
No. 23 to the ocean side of Parker Cliffs. Next day 
the examination of the ocean side of the cliffs satisfied 
the captain that the caves on each side were in the 
same portion of the limestone and probably communi- 
cated with each other. 

It would need but a very slight earthquake shock,” 
said the captain, to cause this portion of the island 
281 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


to be swallowed up by the ocean. Indeed, it is a 
wonder to me that it has not disappeared long ago 
even without an earthquake shock. It has, of course, 
been greatly strengthened by the stalactite columns that 
reach from the roof to the floor of the cave.’’ 

As will be remembered, when they erected the house 
at Jackson Harbor and at Maddox Clearing, they 
had contemplated putting up an additional house at 
Parker Cliffs, but what the captain had seen from the 
examination of the last two days clearly showed him 
the danger that might result if they selected a site 
for a house in this part of the island. 

We will certainly never build a house here,” he 
said ; for at any moment the ground may be swal- 
lowed up by the ocean.” 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXI 

Everyday Life on Harding Island ^ 

They had now been on Harding Island for nearly half 
a year, and since they were wearing practically the 
same clothes they had on when they hurriedly left 
the sinking Ketrel and took to the open boats, they 
were, indeed, in a sorry plight. This was especially 
so with the younger boys; for, as every one knows, 
active boys are especially hard on clothing. It is true 
that Hiram had mended their clothes time and time 
again, but since there was none of the original material 
left, whenever their garments needed patching he had 
been obliged to employ pieces of the colored blankets, 
so that the clothing had assumed an appearance that 
was far from beautiful. 

This lack of proper dress had given the captain much 
worriment. Although the goods rescued from the 
wrecked brig were both abundant and varied as far as 
food products, groceries, household goods, and hard- 
ware were concerned, yet there was practically noth-^ 
ing in the way of clothing or drygoods, except the 
blankets and some highly colored calico prints. 

‘‘ Hiram,” said the captain one day, ‘‘ what can we 
do for new clothing ? Look at the boys. Their clothes 
are scarcely decent. Can you suggest anything? ” 
Wall,” said Hiram, we might make clothes out 
283 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


of the warigated blankets, just as we made overcoats 
when we were off the Aleutian Islands, but I reckon 
they’d be a bit too hot so near the Equator.” 

Much too hot, indeed,” said the captain. Is there 
nothing else we can use ? ” 

“ Thar’s them printed calicoes,” was the reply. 

But while they’ll make fust-class underclothes. I’m 
thinking they wouldn’t be much for outside clothes. 
They’d tear so tarnation easy. But, I say, cap’n,” he 
continued, I reckon we kin manage if ye aren’t too 
partikler as to looks.” 

Never mind the looks, Hiram,” was the reply. 

There are no strangers here to see us, so let’s hear 
your plan, Hiram.” 

Wall,” was the reply, we hev several dozen mat- 
tresses kivered with good, strong cotton ticking. Ef ye 
take the ticking off them we could use it fer making 
clothes.” 

The captain smiled when he heard Hiram’s propo- 
sition. Evidently something ludicrous suggested itself 
to him, but since the boys were present he controlled 
his features, and remarked: 

'‘Very well, Hiram; we’ll begin to-morrow after 
breakfast making suits of ticking clothes, as well as 
underwear from the calico prints. You’ll cut out and 
fit and we’ll sew.” 

The experience all, excepting Charley, had with 
the blanket overcoats enabled them to do the making 
part in a manner highly creditable to amateurs. 
Charley too, rapidly learned how to sew. Hiram did 
284 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


his part admirably. He not only made good fits, but 
made them in what might be called good style. But 
unfortunately there was a marked incongruity between 
the stylish articles of clothing and the character of the 
goods out of which they were made. The ticking 
mattresses were of that very common pattern, consist- 
ing of alternate stripes of white and a blue so deep 
in color as to appear almost black. Indeed, when they 
wore these clothes for the first time. Jack remarked to 
the captain : 

‘‘We certainly ought to save enough of our old 
clothes to cover one of us. Should a vessel ever come 
to take us off the island, we might then have enough 
decent clothes left to cover the one who talks with the 
rescuers while the others hide.^’ 

“Why should we hide. Jack?” inquired Harold. 
“ Our clothes fit all right, don’t they ? I’m sure they 
are much better than the rags we’ve been wearing.” 

“ That’s all right, Harold,” said Jack; “ but any one 
seeing us might take us for convicts who had been 
sent away from their own country as being unfit to 
associate with decent people.” 

“ That’s so,” said Charley laughing. “ Our clothes 
are striped like those I’ve seen in pictures of convicts 
in Botany Bay, Australia.” 

“ I was thinking of that, Charley,” said the captain, 
“ when Hiram first proposed to make the clothing out 
of the bed-ticking. But it’s the best we can do, and 
since the stuff is strong and covers us, I guess we need 
not care.” 


285 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


But if the outer clothing was objectionable on ac- 
count of its pattern, the calico prints employed for 
underwear were even more so. The calico itself was 
nice and soft, and answered its purpose admirably so 
far as mere material was concerned, but the style was 
something awful. The colors, if anything, were gau- 
dier than those of the highly colored blankets and, like 
them, violated every rule of good taste, there being 
impossible combinations of bright blues, greens, reds, 
and yellows, contrasted in a ludicrous manner. What 
made the pattern the more remarkable was that it did 
not consist of stripes or bands as in the case of the 
blankets, but of combinations of stars, half-moons, 
circles, triangles, squares, etc. Indeed, these patterns 
appeared to have been first efforts of young designers 
that were afterward sent to the nursery for coloring. 
Since the underclothes were covered by their outer 
garments, this fantastic combination of rearranged 
rainbow colors might have been less objectionable had 
the colors been fast, but beginning to run as soon as 
their wearers’ bodies became partially moist by perspi- 
ration, the designs were transferred to the skin in an 
exceedingly odd manner. 

The first day after donning their new underwear 
the boys had gone to Maddox Clearing and, after com- 
pleting their work, had taken the boat over to the swim- 
ming-pool. As soon as they had undressed, an invol- 
untary roar followed their appearance. 

‘‘ We look like living Easter eggs,” cried Charley. 

Or like necromancers,” said Jack. “ Our bodies 
286 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


are covered with these highly colored moons, stars, 
squares, circles, triangles, and other hieroglyphics.’’ 

They, indeed, presented a wonderful appearance. 
The colors had been transferred in such a manner as 
to cover them with sharply marked pictures of the 
designs. It is true that here and there the forms had 
wrinkled on their bodies, but they were nevertheless 
sufficiently distinct to show the shapes of the heavenly 
bodies or of other odd figures. 

‘‘ If there were any people here to see us,” said 
Harold, we might make money exhibiting ourselves 
as the Tattooed Men of the Pacific.’ ” 

‘‘ You mean the tattooed kids,” said Jack. 

‘‘ Tattooed kids and a giraffe,” was the reply. For 
Jack was at the time of life when boys begin to grow 
tall and awkward. 

'' Let’s wash the stuff off,” remarked Jack. ‘‘ I’ve 
heard that some of these coloring matters are very 
poisonous.” 

But it was easier to suggest washing the designs off 
than actually to do so. “ Like Aunt Jemima’s famous 
plaster, the more they tried to wash them off the more 
they stuck the faster.” Nor, strange to say, did the 
figures run to any great extent, but preserved their out- 
lines. The aniline dye stuffs employed in the prints, 
as L well known, are very strong dyes, especially for 
such surfaces as the human skin. Sinking in through 
the pores the designs positively refused to be removed 
by water, especially by salt water, so that the scrubbing 
only served to bring them out more distinctly. 

287 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Jack’s failure to remove the colors from his body 
greatly pleased the younger boys. 

“ I guess you’ll have to keep them, Jack. But don’t 
worry, they’ll probably wear off in two or three 
weeks,” said Charley. 

Since the exploration of the sea-grotto at Parker 
Cliffs, and their battle with the giant squid, matters had 
been running on smoothly. The kitchen garden at 
Jackson House was in a highly satisfactory condition. 
This was due not only to the wonderful fertility of its 
soil, but also to the care given to it. The sweet pota- 
toes, beets, and the onions were acquiring better quali- 
ties than those they had found in almost a wild state 
at the Maddox Clearing. As the captain informed 
them the tendency of most cultivated plants, when left 
to nature, was to revert to their original wild condition, 
and so regain less desirable properties. Maddox prob- 
ably obtained from the clearing much better vegetables 
than those found by the boys. 

Observing that some of the cans of tomatoes had 
not apparently been subjected to a very high tempera- 
ture before being sealed, the captain sowed some of the 
seeds, and was greatly surprised and rejoiced to find 
that many of them germinated. In this manner they 
raised both in the vegetable garden at Maddox Clear- 
ing, as well as in the kitchen garden at Jackson House, 
large, juicy, and finely flavored tomatoes, that formed 
a pleasant addition to their daily food. Indeed, the 
requisites for luxuriant growth of vegetation of all 
288 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


kinds existed on Harding Island to a marked extent. 
Even the comparatively thin soil that covered the hard 
limestone rock to a depth of only a few inches, was 
capable of producing a magnificent growth. It was 
natural, therefore, when to the increase both in depth 
and richness of the soil, there was added the intelli- 
gent care given to the crops that a much better quality 
was produced than any they had ever before seen. 
Moreover, the comparatively equable climate of the 
island rendered a constant succession of crops pos- 
sible. Their gardens were practically never free from 
growing plants, as they would have been in the tem- 
perate zones during the colder parts of the year. 

Since they had been able to add to the morning 
glories, cypress and clematis vines, planted in beds at 
the sides of the house, a number of vines found grow- 
ing in different parts of the island, the porches both 
at the front, back, and sides, were soon covered with 
flowering vines that made them pleasant places for 
resting and reading during the hotter hours of the 
day. 

Both the captain and Jack frequently took advantage 
of this graceful shade while carrying on the literary 
work in which they were engaged. Although the 
younger boys spent some of their time on the porch 
in studying or reciting their lessons to the captain, yet 
nearly all their spare time was spent either in boat No. 
13, or in The Chums. The latter boat was, perhaps, 
the more frequently employed on account of the added 
attraction of the swimming-pool. 

T 289 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


But it must not be supposed they never visited Twin 
Island No. 2, or the two smaller islands known as the 
Kids. There were so many interesting things on these 
islands that they went there frequently, and seldom 
returned without bringing back various mineral or 
vegetable specimens. They knew that as a rule these 
specimens would form the subject of interesting talks. 
When, as was of course sometimes the case, neither the 
captain nor Hiram had ever seen the kind of specimens 
before, to their great delight, an excursion was made 
for the purpose of studying their peculiarities in the 
places from which they had been obtained. 

Jack had been studying various scientific branches 
with the captain. Among these was mineralogy, and 
at the captain’s advice he had commenced making a 
collection of the minerals found on the island. 

There is a great fascination in collecting such 
natural objects as minerals, leaves, flowers, insects, etc., 
that extends to the young as well as to adults. Indeed, 
the collecting mania is frequently highly developed in 
the young, especially in the case of bright boys like 
Harold and Charley, so that besides assisting Jack in 
his collection of minerals the younger lads began col- 
lections of their own. 

But making a collection of minerals on a coral 
island is very different from making one in almost 
any other part of the world ; as, for example, in Eng- 
land or Australia. In these countries, by reason of the 
extent and diversity of their surfaces, it is possible 
to obtain a great number of different species as well as 
290 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


varieties of minerals. On a coral island, on the con- 
trary, where almost the entire land consists of but a 
single mineral, limestone or carbonate of lime, it is 
very difficult greatly to multiply the number of speci- 
mens. 

One day Jack was bemoaning to the captain the fact 
that although he had now been hard at work with 
his collection for several months, yet the number of 
mineral species obtained was exceedingly small, and 
consisted almost entirely of carbonate of lime. 

“ That must necessarily be so,” replied the captain, 
since, as of course you know, almost the entire island 
is formed of limestone taken from the waters of the 
ocean. Of course, there are some minerals that have 
been deposited by the evaporation of ocean water. 
Some too have been formed by subsequent chemical 
combinations between the limestone and the materials 
obtained from the bodies of animals, or from the excre- 
ments of birds and fishes, and some have been brought 
to the island in the form of volcanic products, such as 
pumice or ashes. Let me see what you have collected.” 

“ Well,” replied Jack, to begin with, I have 

But,” stopping a moment, he added, “ let me show you 
what I have in a box of drawers Hiram made for me. 
Come along, boys,” he added to Harold and Charley, 
if you care to see them.” 

Going to a compact chest of shallow drawers, and 
pulling out one of the drawers, he picked up a specimen 
and remarked : 

‘‘ This is the commonest form of limestone on the 
291 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


island. It has been formed by the grinding of the 
bodies of corals, shells of mollusks, and the bones of 
fishes into a fine powder or sand. These particles have 
afterward been cemented together by water containing 
lime in solution. While I understand that most of 
this lime has been derived from the hard portions of 
coral polyps, yet the different ingredients have been 
ground so fine and have been so thoroughly mixed to- 
gether that it is impossible to tell whether they con- 
sist of corals, mollusks, or fishes, even when examined 
by a strong magnifying-glass. As you see, there has 
been formed a compact, structureless mass of lime- 
stone.” 

Charley, who had closely followed what Jack had 
said, turned to the captain and asked why it was that 
the smaller specimens of limestone in Jack’s cabinet 
possessed the same general angular shapes as did the 
larger fragments from which they had been broken. 

That,” said the captain, “ is due to a peculiarity of 
mineral substances called fracture or cleavage. The 
way in which minerals break often greatly aids one 
in recognizing them. Now, some minerals always 
break in thin sheets.” 

Jack,” interrupted Charley, ‘‘ that’s just how the 
white stuff Harold and I brought you the other day 
from the dry lagoon in Kid Island No. 2 does. Let’s 
see that specimen, please.” 

Jack then took from another drawer a specimen 
marked selenite — gypsum or sulphate of lime. It was a 
white, shiny mineral that, as Charley had remarked, 
292 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


could be split by the penknife into thin sheets somewhat 
like the mica they had often seen while in England or 
Australia in the doors of stoves, except that these sheets 
were somewhat thicker. Like most other lime minerals 
it could easily be scratched by a penknife. 

“ Now,” said Jack, turning to another drawer, 
“ here is a kind of limestone the separate particles of 
which are so much larger that one can easily tell 
whether they are fragments of corals, shells, or the 
bones of fishes. As in the case of the other limestone, 
the particles have been cemented together by water 
containing lime in solution.” 

The same drawer contained specimens that differed 
from one another only in the size of the separate 
fragments. In some the fragments had been rounded 
by the water, just as the pebbles of a brook that have 
been rubbed against one another until all the rough 
edges have been worn off. In some the fragments 
were rounded like minute eggs, and when cemented 
together by lime formed a variety of limestone known 
as oolitic, or egg-shaped limestone. In others, angular 
fragments of different sizes had been cemented together 
with their rough edges unchanged, forming what are 
called conglomerate limestones. Besides these were 
another class in which the fragments were only par- 
tially rounded and were of varying sizes. 

Another drawer contained specimens of a beach lime- 
stone rock formed by the sand washed up on the 
beaches by the waves, and afterward cemented together 
by dissolved lime. Different specimens of the beach 
293 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


limestones varied greatly in the force with which the 
particles were held together. Some were strong enough 
to form good building material, while in others the 
particles were held so feebly that the rock could be 
easily powdered by merely squeezing it firmly in the 
hand. A number of similar specimens consisted of 
particles of sand heaped up by the winds, and afterward 
cemented together by water containing lime in solution. 

Still another drawer contained specimens resembling 
chalk. These consisted of finely divided limestone, the 
separate particles of which were so feebly cemented 
together that they could be easily torn apart. Indeed, 
it is this fact that renders chalk so useful in marking; 
for, when drawn over a blackboard, or other surface, 
some of its particles are torn off and left clinging to 
the surface. 

Another set of specimens, marked magnesian lime- 
stones or dolomites, somewhat resembled a white 
marble. As the captain informed them these contained 
besides carbonate of lime, a certain quantity of car- 
bonate of magnesia. 

Besides the above there were many other specimens 
of limestones that we will not take the time to describe. 

I had no idea, Jack,” said the captain, “ that your 
collection was so large. I do not think you have any 
reason whatever to complain considering the time you 
have been at work and the place from which your 
specimens have been taken. Although the number of 
species in your collection is small, yet it is already 
nearly completed as regards the species that actually 
294 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


exist on the island. Indeed, from this standpoint, I 
think your cabinet of the native minerals of Harding 
Island is more nearly complete than many cabinets I 
have examined in England that aim at containing all 
native English species.’’ 

But 'we have not the space to follow Jack, as, pulling- 
out drawer after drawer, he exhibited some of the 
other minerals found on the island. Among these were 
specimens of rock-salt obtained from the lagoon of some 
of the islands by evaporation of the ocean water, es- 
pecially from the dried-up lagoon of the smaller of 
the Twin Islands. There were also various other 
minerals obtained from the ocean water by evapora- 
tion, and consisting of iodides, bromides, chlorides, of 
sodium, potassium, magnesium, etc., together with 
crystals of phosphate of lime obtained by the combina- 
tion of lime with phosphorus from the guano beds. 

Besides the above there were collections of different 
specimens of loose finely divided materials, such as 
washed beach sand, and blown sand of varying sizes, 
together with various kinds of volcanic ashes that had 
not yet been cemented together. 

To the above Jack might have added the minerals 
brought to the island entangled in the roots of float- 
ing trees, carried there by the ocean currents. Since, 
however, he was only collecting native species, at the 
captain’s advice, he did not place any of these minerals 
in his cabinet. 

Another collection made, not only by Jack and the 
boys, but also by the captain and Hiram, was of speci- 

295 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


mens of the hard portions of the coral polyps, or what 
might be styled the coral skeletons. Different species 
of coral polyps produce characteristic skeletons, most 
of which are very beautiful, especially when all the 
dead polyps have been removed by thorough washing, 
and the mass bleached by exposure to the sun. They 
had obtained a magnificent collection of these skele- 
tons which they had arranged in one of the spare 
rooms forming what they called the Harding Museum. 
In the same room they had placed numerous stalactites 
and stalagmites that greatly added to the beauty of the 
collection. 

Before closing this description of the Harding 
Museum we must not forget to mention what was, 
perhaps, the most beautiful forms in which carbonate 
of lime occurs; this was a magnificent collection of 
the shells of different mollusks. 

When the examination of Jack’s cabinet was com- 
pleted, Charley, who, as has been seen, was somewhat 
of a wag, turning to Jack exclaimed in assumed as- 
tonishment : 

Jack, I’m surprised you have no specimen of the 
commonest mineral on the island — a mineral, so to 
speak, from which all your specimens as well as all 
those in the museum have been obtained.” 

The captain smiled when he heard Charley’s re- 
marks, since he saw at once to what the lad was refer- 
ring. Jack, however, failed to understand him and 
exclaimed : 

“ What are you talking about, Charley? I know of 
296 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


no such mineral. Indeed, unless you can show me a 
specimen of it, I shall feel that you are mistaken.” 

“ I have a specimen, all right. Jack,” was the reply. 
'' I collected it this morning. Wait a moment and I’ll 
bring it here. I left it in our room.” 

Charley returned in a few moments bringing a large, 
clear, glass bottle filled with ocean water. He had 
pasted a sheet of paper on the side of the bottle on 
which he had written : All the minerals in this room 
came out of me.” 

I thought, captain,” he said, “ we would place 
this in the museum surrounded by the coral skeletons 
and the stalactites and stalagmites, shells, etc.” 

That’s not a bad idea, Charley,” said Jack laugh- 
ing. Water is a mineral. Moreover, all my minerals 
as well as all the specimens in the museum were once 
dissolved in the waters of the ocean. I will add some- 
thing to the label on the bottle.” He then wrote the 
following, which he copied from one of the books of 
the library: 

Composition of Ocean Water. (Bischof.) 

Of the 3.527 pounds by weight of dissolved saline sub- 
stance found in every 100 pounds of ocean water there are: 

Chloride of Sodium 75-79 pounds 

Chloride of Magnesium 9.16 

Chloride of Potassium 3.16 “ 

Bromide of Sodium 1.18 

Sulphate of Lime 5-6o “ 

Sulphate of Magnesia and traces of many other 

minerals 5-ii 


297 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Is it correct to call water a mineral, Uncle 
Arthur?” inquired Harold. 

It certainly is, Harold,” replied the captain. A 
mineral is an organic substance occurring as a definite 
chemical compound, and capable of assuming a definite 
crystalline form. Water is, therefore, as much a min- 
eral as is limestone. It does not make any difference 
that because its fusing point is so low it generally 
occurs in a liquid condition. It is capable of assuming 
a crystalline form, as can be seen both in the snowflake 
as well as in some form of hailstones.” 


298 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXII 
The Earthquake 

Although Harding Island lay within the limits of the 
Southeast Trade Winds, yet the characteristic south- 
east winds were almost entirely absent during the 
hottest part of the day. This was because at this time 
the ascending current from the heated land lifted the 
Trade Winds as they approached the island and thus 
prevented them from reaching the surface. The winds 
of the island as a rule were, therefore, light and, in- 
deed, at times were almost absent. There were, never- 
theless, severe storms that crossed the island, but these 
were fortunately rare. 

During certain seasons of the year rains were es- 
pecially heavy and frequent on Harding Island, nor 
was there dry weather during any protracted time. 
Consequently, there was never any difficulty in obtain- 
ing an abundant supply of fresh drinking water. 

One afternoon, while the boys were standing with 
the captain on the porch of Jackson House facing the 
ocean, a heavy squall of rain was seen approaching the 
island. Instead of reaching them, however, it separated 
as it passed over the shore platform into two distinct 
portions that blew over the ocean off the eastern and 
western sides of the island, respectively. 

299 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


How strange, captain,” said Jack. Can that 
movement of the storm be explained? ” 

It’s very simple, Jack,” was the reply, when you 
understand it. You know how hot the air over the 
sand grows toward the middle of the day when the 
sky is clear. This heated air column, rising, pushes 
aside the approaching rain-storm as we have seen.” 

Since the exploration of the grotto at Parker Cliffs, 
there had been much discussion as to the nature of 
the force that had raised this part of the island so 
much above the general level. They knew that ac- 
cording to Darwin the island had been gradually sink- 
ing, so that the part near Parker Cliffs must have had 
a local elevation. The question arose as to whether 
this elevation had been gradual or sudden. One day 
a discovery was made that enabled the captain to reach 
a definite conclusion concerning the matter. They had 
been walking over the beach immediately south of 
Parker Cliffs. An unusual tide and wind, washing 
away the sand, had laid bare the limestone rock be- 
neath. A narrow fissure could be seen extending 
nearly east and west across the island from the ocean 
to the lagoon. Although originally at the same level, 
the rock on the northern side of the fissure was several 
feet higher than on the opposite side, so that a wall, a 
few feet in height, marked the parts that had been 
fissured. The island had evidently been split or fissured 
at this part by some force that had suddenly raised it 
north of the line. 


300 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


It is certain/' said the captain, that Parker Cliffs 
owe their elevation to a sudden upward movement." 

“ Do you mean a movement like an earthquake ? " 
inquired Jack. 

“ Yes," was the reply. Harding Island has evi- 
dently been visited by severe earthquakes in the past, 
and may again be so visited at almost any time in the 
future." 

‘‘ Then, captain," said Jack, ‘‘ from what we know 
as to the condition of a part of Parker Cliffs, if Hard- 
ing Island is again visited by an earthquake this portion 
might cave in, might it not? " 

“ Yes," was the reply; “ and if it did, a deep channel 
connnecting the lagoon and the ocean would probably 
be formed." 

‘‘ Do you think such an earthquake would damage 
the other parts of the island? " asked Jack. 

Not so far as the shock itself is concerned," re- 
plied the captain. Harding Island rests on so solid 
a foundation, possibly on a mass of limestone several 
thousand feet in thickness, that it ought to be able to 
withstand extremely severe shocks. Great damage 
might, however, be caused by the waves that generally 
follow earthquakes at sea. I need not tell you that if 
a wave thirty or forty feet high should sweep over our 
island it would probably leave very little standing." 

Let's look for the other fissure," continued the cap- 
tain, after they had examined the one just referred to. 
'' Of course, you understand," he said to the boys, 
that if this break was caused by a portion of the 
301 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


reef being pushed up at this part of the island, another 
crack or fissure must have formed somewhere on the 
north.” 

They had much trouble in finding the other fissure, 
’ but after a persistent examination of many hours they 
found it, extending between the ocean and the lagoon 
on that part of the island immediately north of the 
elevated lands of Parker Cliffs. 

One day, while the captain was walking with the 
two younger boys along the edge of the shore platform, 
he pointed to a brownish object nearly globular in 
shape that had been washed up from the deeper waters, 
and was lying on the nearly dry surface of the shore 
platform, for it was then low tide. 

Would any of you like a good bath sponge, boys? ” 
he inquired. “ I noticed the other day at the swim- 
ming-pool, when you were washing, you had no wash- 
rag other than your hands.” 

I’d like it very much. Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed 
Harold ; but the trouble is there were no sponges on 
the brig, so we can’t get one.” 

Why, Harold,” said his uncle, ‘‘ there is a sponge 
lying right in front of you.” 

What! ” exclaimed Harold, picking it up. ‘‘ This 
dirty-looking thing a sponge ! Why, uncle, it’s full of 
sticky stuff like glue, and has sharp needle-shaped 
things in it. If a fellow should use that as a sponge he 
wouldn’t get much help toward being made cleaner, 
for he would only smear his body with this dirty, bad- 
smelling glue, but would also scratch it with these 
302 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


stickers. Honest, Uncle Arthur, is that a sponge, or 
are you only joking?” 

No, Harold,” was the reply, “ that is a sponge. 
See here,” he said, taking it in his hand and pointing 
to the part by which it had been attached to the bottom 
of the ocean, ‘‘ here is where the animal, for a sponge 
is a sea-animal, attached itself to the rocky bottom. 
Something, I do not know what, has torn it from its 
support. 

It is true,” continued the captain, we could not 
use the sponge in its present condition. We must first 
get rid of the animal. To do this, we’ll place it on the 
dry beach in the position it had when growing in the 
water. Most of the jellylike body will then decompose 
and run off. Then we’ll put it again in the water until 
softened when, by squeezing and washing, the remain- 
ing portions of the dead animal as well as the sharp 
spiny skeleton can be removed. Again putting the 
body in the sun to bleach and again washing in the 
water, we’ll obtain a nice, soft, large sponge as good as 
any of this kind of sponge you could buy in England or 
elsewhere.” 

Following the directions of the captain they suc- 
ceeded in transforming the repulsive-looking globular 
ball or mass into a splendid bath-sponge. Now that 
they knew that sponges were growing in the waters 
near the shores, they became sponge-fishers. Tearing 
the animals from the rocks on which they were grow- 
ing by the use of the tongs Hiram had made for them 
for getting pearl-oysters, they obtained a species of 

303 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


sponges varying in shape and differing greatly in fine- 
ness or softness. After cleansing and drying, they not 
only had sponges for use but were able to add a fine 
collection to the museum. From the books in the li- 
brary they learned that the sponge they thought to be 
a single animal consisted in reality of a great number' 
of animals, bound together by a network of elastic 
fibers. 

Perhaps one of the most marked characteristics of 
life on a coral island is the wonderful quiet, especially 
near the middle of the day. As a rule, there is then no 
wind, and in places too far from the coast to permit 
the sounds of the breakers to reach the ear, there is an 
almost complete silence. Thus it was one day, while 
working in the vegetable garden at Maddox Clearing, 
they were surprised by hearing a moajiing sound that 
seemed to come from the ground beneath them. 
Rompey, who was lying near his young masters, ap- 
peared to be greatly frightened, and creeping close to 
them, as if claiming their protection, began to utter 
low moaning sounds. 

What’s the matter with Rompey? ” said Charley. 
“ See how frightened he looks.” 

The animal on hearing Charley speak his name en- 
deavored by wagging his tail and low moaning to say : 

I am, indeed, very much frightened, and I’m sur- 
prised you are not also frightened.” 

Of course they all stopped work on hearing the 
first moaning sounds from below and intently listened. 
The sounds continued. At first they were faint and 

304 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


seemed to consist of a great variety of distant noises 
that were quite feeble when they reached them. But 
they gradually grew louder and soon became low mur- 
murings, followed occasionally by stronger sounds, 
somewhat reminding them of the noises heard in the 
streets of a crowded city. 

I think,’' said the captain, these sounds are the 
forerunner of an earthquake.” 

Shall we stay here,” inquired Jack, ‘‘ or will it be 
safer in some other part of the island ? ” 

“We are safe enough here as far as the shocks are 
concerned, but the earthquake may be accompanied 
by an earthquake wave that would sweep over the 
island.” 

“ Of course,” said Jack, “ it wouldn’t be safe to 
seek the highlands at Parker Cliffs.” 

“ No,” said the captain, “ at least not anywhere in 
the neighborhood of the southern part of the cliffs, 
which we know are honeycombed and may fall in at 
any time. It might be safe on the northern portions of 
the cliffs. I think, however, we had better hurry to 
boat No. 23 and try to reach the waters of the ocean a 
few miles from the island before a severe shock. Of 
course, we will be in danger on the ocean, but I think 
the danger there will be less than in any place on the 
island.” 

Entering The Chums they rowed rapidly to Land- 
ing No. 2, and running to boat No. 23 were soon in 
the deep waters of the ocean, pulling rapidly toward the 
southwest. 


u 


305 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


In the meanwhile the subterranean noises grew 
louder and more frequent. Rumblings were heard re- 
sembling distant thunder. At first they were only 
heard occasionally ; that is, a rumbling sound would be 
followed by comparative silence, although the whisper- 
ings and murmurings were practically continuous. ' 
The rumblings, increasing in intensity, soon ap- 
proached in loudness to peals of thunder or the dis- 
charge of large siege guns. 

Every now and then sounds were heard immediately 
under the boat as if the keel had struck against a 
rock. Having already experienced this in the earth- 
quake during the volcanic eruption off the Aleutian 
Islands, they properly attributed it to the earthquake 
shock, and continued rowing toward the southwest. 

When they had reached a distance of between four 
and five miles from the island, the successive shocks 
followed one another so rapidly as to produce an 
almost continuous roar. Finally, an awful explosion 
occurred that appeared to come from a point in the 
ocean off the southeastern shore of Parker Cliffs. 
While they were looking in this direction they dis- 
^tinctly saw the southern portion of the cliffs suddenly 
fall in as if swallowed up by the earth, while a shower 
of spray was dashed up into the air to the height 
of at least a hundred feet. 

There goes the grotto,” said Charley. 

Yes,” said the captain, who had been examining 
this part of the island through his glasses, “ and, as I 
expected, there has been left in its place a channel of 
306 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


water. A great channel too,” he continued. “ I should 
say at least two miles wide. If it is deep enough, Hard- 
ing Lagoon will offer a splendid harbor for vessels.” 

While watching the opening thus formed, a wave 
about one foot in height was seen rapidly approaching 
from the southwest. It soon reached the boat, but 
being in deep water instead of being carried toward 
the island, the boat simply rose and sank on the crest 
of this wave. The wave continued moving toward the 
island, and when it reached the shallow water in- 
creased in height. It attained a height of over ten 
feet, striking the remaining portions of Parker Cliffs 
with so furious a blow that they could feel the island 
tremble underneath them. 

“ If the cliffs can stand that,” said the captain, they 
are strong enough to continue standing.” 

A wave many feet high rushed through Harding 
Lagoon and, reaching the eastern coast of Twin Island 
No. I, poured over its edge into the lagoon. Fortu- 
nately it rapidly decreased in height, so that by the 
time it reached the western side of the island it was 
only a few feet above the ordinary level of the water. 

The portion of the main wave, however, that passed 
to the north and south of Twin Island No. i, sped 
rapidly across the deep waters of the Harding Lagoon 
and broke against the western shore with a decreased 
height when it struck the beach. 

Unless there are other waves from the ocean,” said 
the captain, “ I do not think that any great damage will 
be done to our houses or crops.” 

307 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


No other waves came. The disturbance appeared to 
limit itself to the wave that first reached the island. 

Hiram, who had been examining the new channel, 
which they agreed to call the Harding Channel, 
through the glasses, remarked : 

Thet’s a nice piece of water atween the Harding 
Lagoon and the ocean. I reckon it’s full two miles 
across, en I kain’t see enything like land a-sticking up 
above the top. Ef it’s good deep water, ez it looks, 
Harding Channel will connect the ocean with a harbor 
in the lagoon big enough to take a-wery many wessels. 
Take another look, cap’n,” he continued, handing the 
glasses to him. 

A careful examination by the captain seemed to show 
that, as Hiram had said, Harding Channel was free 
from shallow water, for the waters were now pouring 
through it with a considerable velocity toward the 
ocean. 

“ Hiram,” said the captain, do you think we can 
now safely take the boat nearer to the lagoon where 
we can see better what has happened ? ” 

I bean’t as much up on earthquakes as ye, cap’n,” 
was the reply. 

'' Well,” said the captain, ‘‘ let us take the boat a 
mile nearer and wait an hour. Then, if the earthquake 
appears to be over, we’ll take the boat through the new 
channel into the lagoon.” 

Waiting, as suggested, and nothing occurring, the 
boat was soon at the mouth of the channel. There 
were no signs of shallow water so, without any hesita- 
308 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


tion, they entered the channel directing the boat to- 
ward the lagoon. Thinking it would be more prudent 
to defer the examination of the land at this part of the 
island to another day, and feeling anxious to see if the 
waves had destroyed their vegetable garden, they 
rowed the boat directly to Landing No. 3 when, cross- 
ing the reef to Landing No. 4, they entered The 
Chums. The waves had washed away portions of the 
clearing nearest the lagoon but, on the whole, the dam- 
age was much less than they had feared. Maddox 
House had not been injured, except that a pile of sand 
and mud had been deposited by the waters in the flower- 
beds placed along the sides of the house. 

After satisfying themselves that no other damage 
had been done they entered boat No. 23 and, proceed- 
ing to Jackson House, made an examination that 
showed them the damage had been even less than at 
Maddox House. Part of the kitchen garden had been 
washed out, but the house was untouched. On the 
whole, therefore, the damage had been comparatively 
insignificant. 

“ Had the earthquake wave come from the south- 
east,” said the captain, the ruin would probably have 
been complete; but coming as it did from the south- 
west, it spent the greater part of its energy on the cliffs 
at that part of the island.” 


309 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXIII 
After the Earthquake 

It was late at night when they reached Jackson House 
after the great earthquake. As was natural, they con- 
tinued talking after supper until near midnight. 

‘‘ Let’s turn in,” at last said the captain. “ There is 
much to be done to-morrow. We have only a general 
idea as to how the earthquake has left Harding Island. 

I think we had better spend the next four or five days 
in a careful examination of the different parts of the 
island, as well as to make soundings in the channel and 
in the ocean at least a mile or so off Parker Cliffs. Of 
course, I wish you all to accompany me.” 

That’ll be jolly,” cried Charley. 

What boat will you take, captain ? ” inquired 
Jack. 

We’ll take boats No. 23 and 13.” 

It was now possible to take both boats from Landing 
No. 2, since they had taken boat No. 23 on the ocean 
from Landing No. i when they fled from the island^ 
to the waters of the ocean, and had afterward brought 
it into the Harding Lagoon through the Harding 
Channel. 

‘‘ Will you have Jack in boat No. 23, and I and the 
two youngsters in boat No. 13, cap’n?” inquired 
Hiram. 


310 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ No, Hiram ; you and I will take boat No. 23, and 
Jack and the boys boat No. 13.” 

“ ril git up early, cap’n,” said Hiram, “ and load 
the boats. What do ye want put in ’em? ” 

We’ll all do our share of work, Hiram,’' said the 
captain. While you are getting breakfast and cook- 
ing the food for use while we are away, the boys and I 
will get the boats ready. After breakfast you can help 
us, for there is much that we must take with us.” 

The desire to examine the portions of the island 
that had been left standing in the neighborhood of 
Parker Cliffs, as well as to visit other places, was so 
great that they were all up at an early hour, at least 
early when the hour at which they retired is taken into 
consideration. 

Since, during much of their absence they would be 
on the ocean, the captain directed the boys to fill the 
water-butts in the boats with fresh water, and to place 
an additional butt in each boat. He also gave them 
instructions as to the quantity of food to be placed in 
each of the boats. The amount both of water and food 
was so great that Harold was greatly surprised. 

Why, Uncle Arthur,” he said, there will be 
enough food to last several weeks. What’s the use of 
taking so much ? ” 

The lad had reason not long afterward to remember 
the answer the captain made to his question. 

“We expect to spend many hours on the ocean. 
Should a storm arise we might be compelled to remain 
in the boats for a whole day, or even many days. It 

311 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


would be foolish, therefore, not to place an abundance 
of fresh water and food in each of the boats, now that 
we can easily do so.” 

I suppose some of my young readers may wish to 
know why the captain had planned an excursion on the 
ocean a mile or so from Harding Island. In the first 
place, it was necessary that they should know, at least 
approximately, the depth of water in the new channel. 
The captain had, therefore, planned to take soundings 
of the channel. But, besides this, he wished to know 
whether any marked changes of level had occurred in 
the shore platform of Harding Island, especially in the 
deeper waters on the edge of the shore platform. It 
will be remembered that the captain had become greatly 
interested in the revision of the manuscript of the 

Physical Geography of the Sea,” found among other 
things in the cabin of the derelict brig. Now, one of 
the chapters of this book requiring the greatest amount 
of additional information, was that referring to the 
changes produced by earthquakes in the depths of the 
water around islands situated at great distances from 
the continents. Consequently, the captain determined 
to make soundings in the waters several miles off the 
coast in order to determine whether any marked shoal- 
ing had occurred. Therefore, when the boats were 
packed and the provisions and water stowed out of 
the way, sounding-lines were carefully coiled in each 
boat where they could be used either separately for 
the shallower waters, or connected together as a sin- 
gle line for the deeper waters. Since the boat con- 
312 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


taining Jack and the boys was only to make shallow 
soundings a single coil of line sufficed, but for the 
captain’s boat there were three separate lines, each of 
considerable length. When the boats were ready to 
leave, the question arose as to whether or not Rompey 
should accompany the boys. Rompey apparently was 
of the opinion that he would of course be taken, and 
had settled himself in the bottom of the boat at Char- 
ley’s feet, and was showing that he expected to have a 
great time by the little joyous barkings in which he was 
indulging. 

Is there any objection to Rompey going with us, 
captain? ” inquired Jack. 

Oh, please let him go. Uncle Arthur ! ” pleaded 
Harold. 

‘‘ There is no objection to your taking Rompey,” 
was the reply. I guess he’ll behave himself. You 
don’t object to your having him in your boat, do you, 
Jack? ” inquired the captain. 

“ Not at all, captain,” was the reply. If the dog 
behaves himself he will not be in the way.” 

Do you hear that, Rompey ? ” said Charley, talking 
to the dog as if he understood him. 

Rompey’s reply was very much to the point. It con- 
sisted of a complicated series of tail waggings as well 
as of barkings extending for a considerable length 
through the dog’s gamut. Charley thoroughly under- 
stood Rompey’s remarks, or at least he thought he did ; 
and for my part, I thoroughly believe the dog also 
understood generally what his young master said. 

313 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Now I do not doubt that many of my older readers 
will not hesitate to express their belief that what I 
have so frequently said concerning Rompey’s ability 
to understand conversation is highly imaginary, or at 
least much overdrawn. I need not repeat here the 
opinion I have several times expressed as to the rea-- 
soning powers of animals. I feel that I can confidently 
appeal to my young readers when I ask them if they do 
not remember, when talking to a dog or some other pet 
animal, that the animal has acted as though it under- 
stood just what was said. Rompey certainly did on 
this particular occasion to such an extent as to leave 
in the minds of all of the five a thorough belief as to 
his ability to understand English. 

Pushing off from the shore the two boats started 
in a direct course toward Twin Island No. i and the 
new channel at Parker Cliffs, the captain’s boat leading 
and Jack’s boat following near enough to permit con- 
versation to be carried on between the boats when 
speaking in a fairly loud tone. Since neither of the 
boats was provided with more than four oars, in the 
boys’ boat Jack pulled stroke with two oars, while 
Harold and Charley sitting on the same seat pulled each 
a single oar. 

When they were within a few miles of Harding 
Channel, Harold, who had turned around so as to see 
the island near Parker Cliffs, suddenly cried : 

Look over your shoulder. Jack,” and then calling 
aloud to the boat ahead : “ Uncle Arthur, what are all 
those birds doing near the new channel ? ” 

314 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


It is no wonder that Harold was amazed ; for, look- 
ing in the direction indicated, they saw thousands upon 
thousands of birds that had collected on the beach of 
the lagoon on each side of the channel. 

‘‘ What are they doing! ” replied Charley before the 
captain could answer. “ Can’t you see, Harold, what 
they’re doing ? they’re fishing. Look,” he cried, ‘‘ every 
now and then a bird leaves the beach carrying off a 
good-sized fish in his talons. I should think you could 
see that,” he said laughing. 

Oh, you understand me all right,” said Harold 
good-naturedly. ‘‘ What I meant to say was what has 
brought the birds there,” and then seeing that Charley 
was going to add, “ the fish,” he again corrected him- 
self and said : “ What’s up there, anyhow ? ” 

“ Now you’re talking,” said Charley. 

The captain, who had overheard the conversation 
between the boys and had enjoyed the good-natured 
chaffing, replied : 

I do not doubt, Harold, the fish have been killed 
in great numbers by the shock of the earthquake. I 
don’t so much mean the fish in the lagoon as those in 
the ocean near the place where the shock first occurred. 
They have been either killed outright or, having been* 
rendered insensible by the shock, have been carried by 
the waves through the channel and thrown on the 
nearer coasts of the lagoon. I think we shall probably 
find still greater numbers on the beach facing the 
ocean.” 

Shall we hurry to the island and drive the birds 

315 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


away so as to get the fish ourselves, uncle ? ” inquired 
Harold. 

“ By no means,” was the reply. On the contrary, 
let the birds take all they can. They are only doing 
work we would otherwise be obliged to do ourselves. 
I do not doubt the number of fish killed is so great that 
unless we find means for burying or getting rid of them 
they will soon putrefy and poison the air over the is- 
land with the diagreeable gases they give off.” 

Do you notice, captain,” said Jack, ‘‘ that most of 
the birds have collected in the neighborhood of the 
beach near the new channel ? ” 

Yes, Jack,” was the reply, and I am glad to see 
it. I think it shows that the dead fish have come mainly 
from the ocean.” 

‘‘ Cap’n,” said Hiram, let’s find a landing-place, 
and take a look at them fish. At the same time we kin 
see what the shaking hez done to what’s left of Parker 
Cliffs.” 

As they approached the northern shores of the 
channel, they were fortunate in finding a landing-place 
at its mouth near the Harding Lagoon. Here, as they 
could see at a glance, a great change of level had oc- 
curred not only in the site occupied by the new channel, 
but also as to the southern ends of what had been left 
standing. Adjoining the channel a portion had been 
broken into fragments that had slid toward the water, 
forming a steep incline. 

The greater part of what had been left standing north 
of the channel had nearly retained its original height. 

316 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


In the place where they had landed the boat there was 
still a precipitous cliff left about fifty feet high, on 
one of the faces of which there was an entrance to a 
sea-grotto that appeared to extend only a short dis- 
tance into the cliff itself. 

Leaving the boat they made an examination of the 
coast of the lagoon toward the north when, taking the 
boat through the channel, they anchored it near its 
mouth at the ocean and proceeded to examine the coast 
by walking along the beach toward the north. 

Here, as the captain had predicted, the number of 
fish brought in from the ocean was enormously greater 
than on the opposite side. They had not only been 
piled up along the beach and on the shore platform, 
for it was then low tide, where they were being 
eagerly devoured by even greater numbers of birds than 
they had seen on the opposite shore, but had also been 
washed in still greater numbers into the waters on the 
edge of the shore platform. Here they were floating in 
such quantities as fairly to cover the surface of the 
water. Huge sharks and other large fish, that had been 
attracted from portions of the ocean that had not been 
affected by the shock, were eagerly devouring them. 

‘‘ Here is another welcome help for burying the dead 
fish,’’ said the captain. 

Walking farther along the coast toward the north 
they observed an unusual commotion in the water, and 
on approaching saw that it was due to a battle between 
a giant squid and a shark. The squid was even larger 
than the one that had attacked the boys in the grotto. 

317 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


It was probably one of the many that had been deprived 
of shelter by the sudden caving in of the sea-grottoes. 
The shark was biting furiously at such of the tentacles 
of the animal as it could reach, but the squid, appar- 
ently conscious of the fact that it was mainly the mouth 
of the shark it need fear, had fastened itself on 
its back, midway between the head and the tail, and 
was apparently endeavoring to choke it by wrapping 
some of its huge tentacles around the animal near 
its throat. But besides this, in order to protect itself 
from the fearful lashings of the shark’s tail, the squid 
was vainly endeavoring to hold this portion of its 
enemy still by coiling its remaining tentacles around it. 
The huge head of the animal with its awful-looking 
eyes was held high above the shark’s body. But it 
was an unequal fight, and was soon decided in favor 
of the shark; for, finally succeeding in freeing its tail, 
it began a series of thrashings that rapidly weakened 
the animal’s hold. 

It is true that the squid endeavored to meet this 
change of its enemy’s tactics by slipping its body into a 
new position. At last, however, when changing the 
position of its tentacles for this purpose, its head was 
brought near the huge mouth of the shark, which at 
once began rapidly to cut and tear it. 

The water of the ocean was soon stained, not only 
by the inky matter thrown out by the animal, but also 
by the blood that came pouring out of its body, and in 
a short time the battle was over. The shark, though 
considerably blown, after a few moments’ rest began 

318 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


greedily eating such portions of the giant squid that 
had been left by the many additional sharks that had 
arrived just as the battle had ended. 

The balance of the day was spent in the boat making 
soundings of the new channel in the portion of its 
waters near its northern shores. The two boats were 
about ten feet apart, the nearer boat being about the 
same distance from the northern shores of the channel. 

How much do you make it, Hiram? ” inquired the 
captain, as his companion pulled up the sounding-line. 

‘‘ A slack fifteen fathoms, sir,” was the reply. 

“ And what do you make it. Jack? ” 

Full fifteen fathoms, captain.” 

In this manner the two boats proceeded along the 
northern shores of the channel, and when the depth of 
the water had been ascertained in this manner they 
again made soundings at distances of thirty and forty 
feet along the shore, and afterward at distances of 
fifty and sixty feet. In this manner, they found that 
the depth of the water varied from fifteen to twenty- 
five fathoms near the shore, while farther out it was 
much deeper, being from thirty to forty fathoms. It 
was evident, therefore, that the largest ships could 
safely pass, at any tide, through this part of the Hard- 
ing Channel into the waters of the lagoon, which were 
likewise deep enough to float them. 

“ Let’s see whether the earthquake wave has moved 
the coral-encrusted wreck, uncle,” cried Harold. 

“An excellent suggestion,” remarked the captain. 
“If any change of level has taken place in this place 

319 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


we can see it at once, since we know the depth from the 
position of the vessel.” 

An examination showed that the vessel was missing. 
A further examination disclosed it as having been 
thrown high and dry on the coast close to a portion of 
the cliff. They could now have easily examined all 
parts of the wreck and its wonderful incrustations of 
coral, but there were so many other more important 
things to do that they put it off for a more convenient 
time. 


320 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXIV 

The Captain and Hiram Blown Out to Sea. 

Captain Jack 

Early next morning they began sounding the ocean, 
both near the shore as well as at a considerable dis- 
tance therefrom. While this work was going on a 
serious disaster occurred. At a. time when Hiram and 
the captain were making soundings at a distance of 
four miles from the island, and Jack's boat was sound- 
ing in the shallower waters near the shore platform, a 
storm overtook them so suddenly that they had hardly 
commenced to notice it before it was on them. 

The storm was accompanied by a strong wind blow- 
ing toward the northwest. The wind increased rapidly 
in force and was accompanied for most of the time by 
a deluge of rain, that together with dense clouds com- 
pletely shut off their view both from the island and 
from each other’s boats. The rain fell in such torrents 
that it was necessary for one in each crew constantly to 
bail the water out in order to prevent the boat from 
sinking. 

We will limit our description for the present to the 
boys. At first they endeavored to row their boat in the 
direction of the island, but the force of the wind 
was too great to render this safe; so they found it 
necessary to permit the boat to be carried along with 

V 321 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the wind, keeping it, of course, so that the wind was 
received not broadside but directly against the stern. 

The storm continued for between seven and eight 
hours, and during all this time they were unable to see 
the other boat. At last the storm ceased, and the wind 
died down almost as quickly as it had begun. The 
clouds disappeared, and a flood of sunshine fell upon 
the waters, but neither the island nor the other boat 
was in sight. Above was the blue arch of heaven ex- 
tending in the shape of a huge dome within which 
nothing, except their own boat, was to be seen at the 
center of the great waste of waters. 

‘‘What shall we do. Jack?” inquired Charley. 
“ Try to find the captain or put back to the island? ” 

“ We will by all means return to the island,” replied 
Jack. “ I am sure this is what the captain will do. 
He’ll know the general direction in which our boat has 
been carried by the wind, and will keep on the lookout 
for us while trying to reach the island.” 

“ And, of course,” cried Charley, “ we’ll do the same 
thing for the captain’s boat.” 

“ Charley,” inquired Jack, “ according to my recol- 
lection, the island lies in that direction,” pointing to the 
southeast. “ What do you think? ” 

“ I don’t think anything about it,” was the reply. 
“ I know it lies in that direction. See here,” he said, 
showing Jack a pocket compass. “ I have been keeping 
track of the direction of the island since the storm be- 
gan. Since Harold and I were lost in the sea-grotto, 
when I had carelessly left my pocket compass at Jack- 
322 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


son House, I have been especially careful to see that 
I have it with me.’' 

‘‘ I’m glad you have a compass, Charley,” said Jack; 

it will be a great aid to us.” 

“ Jack,” inquired Harold, how far from the island 
do you think we are ? ” 

I’m not sure,” was the reply; ‘‘but for the last 
seven hours or more the wind has been blowing us 
away from Harding Island at perhaps twenty miles 
an hour. We are, perhaps, something in the neighbor- 
hood of a hundred and fifty miles from the island.” 

A big distance to cover in a rowboat. Jack,” said 
Charley. Don’t you think we had better start? ” 

The storm had set in about ten o’clock, and since it 
had continued for about eight hours, it was now near 
six o’clock, so they stopped rowing a while and made 
some simple preparations for supper. 

“Ain’t the captain a level-headed man. Jack?” re- 
marked Charley. “ Do you remember what he said 
about putting so much food and water in the 
boats ? ” 

“ Yes, Charley,” replied Jack; “ I think I remember 
what he said, word for word. It was this : ‘ We expect 
to spend many hours on the ocean. Should a storm 
arise we might be compelled to remain in the boats for 
a whole day, or even for many days. It would be 
foolish, therefore, if we did not place an abundance of 
fresh water and food in the boats now we can so easily 
do so.’ ” 

“ I declare. Jack,” said Harold, “ that’s just what 

323 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Uncle Arthur said, word for word. I wonder whether 
he and Hiram are safe. What do you think?” he 
added anxiously. 

I see no reason why they should not be. They are 
better able to take care of themselves than we are, and 
since we outlived the storm they should be able to do 
so. They were only a few miles farther out to sea than 
we were when the storm broke.” 

Tm glad there’s plenty of food and water in their 
boat as well as in ours,” said Charley ; “ for, with 
enough to eat and drink, and a good tight boat, such 
men as the captain and Hiram certainly ought to be 
able to take care of themselves.” 

Harold was greatly encouraged by what he heard, so 
he comforted himself still more by adding : 

‘‘ Yes, and their boat had a mast and sail, and they 
know how to use them.” 

After eating they continued steadily rowing the boat 
until the stars came out one after another. The sky 
being quite clear, they saw the beautiful constellation 
of the Southern Cross which, as is well known, con- 
tains four bright stars, one of which may be regarded 
as the Pole Star of the Southern Hemisphere. 

They concluded to stop rowing and rest for the 
night, dividing their number into three watches. Jack 
insisted on taking the first watch, promising to call 
Charley when the time for his watch arrived. 

At least,” he added, if I don’t conclude to keep 
watch a little longer.” For he was Captain Jack now, 
and would remain so until Captain Harding and Hiram 

324 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


returned. He, therefore, felt responsible for the safety 
of his companions. 

As the younger boys were getting ready to lie down 
in the boat, Harold lost his cap overboard and tried to 
recover it, but was unable to do so for the want of 
light.” 

I guess you’ll have to do without it, Harold,” said 
Jack. 

The next morning broke bright and clear. Still 
there was nothing in sight except the same big dome 
of the horizon and their little boat at the center of the 
mighty ocean. After a hurried breakfast they con- 
tinued rowing in the supposed direction of the island, 
and toward eleven o’clock were delighted to see a faint 
streak on the southwestern horizon. 

‘‘ Hurrah ! ” cried Charley. That’s Harding 
Island. Don’t you think so. Jack? Or,” he added 
smiling, ‘‘ excuse me, don’t you think so, captain ? for, 
of course. Jack, you are Captain Jack now, and I will 
mind you just as I minded Captain Harding.” 

“ Thank you, Charley,” said Jack; I shall expect 
obedience. Indeed,” he added, I must ; for, should 
anything happen, I will be held responsible for it.” 

And I’ll mind you. Jack,” said Harold, '' just as I 
would Uncle Arthur.” 

Captain,” said Charley. 

Oh,” said Jack, when we’re together call me 
Jack.” 

‘‘ Well then. Jack,” continued Charley, “ aren’t you 
surprised that we have not seen the captain or Hiram 

325 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


yet? They are men; they could row longer and 
stronger than we and, moreover, they had a sail.” 

I am surprised at not seeing them, Charley,” Jack 
added in a low tone, so as not to let Harold hear him ; 
for Harold was in the stern looking in the direction in 
which it was evident he hoped he would see the miss- 
ing boat. 

“ Now we can see the direction of Harding Island,” 
said Jack; I think it best that two of us only row, 
while the other keeps a watch on the ocean to catch the 
first sight of the other boat if it comes in view. Har- 
old, you’ll attend to this for the first few hours.” 

As they proceeded in this way with Harold in the 
stern on the lookout, their lookout announced : 

I see my cap floating in the ocean over the star- 
board bow.” 

This announcement greatly surprised them. They 
couldn’t understand how the cap could be so far ahead 
of the boat, for they had now been rowing for many 
hours. 

I don’t understand this, Charley,” Jack said, as 
they stopped to pick up the cap. 

I guess,” said Charley, ‘‘ there’s a strong ocean 
current in this part of the ocean that has carried the 
cap during the night from where it fell in the water.” 

There must, indeed, be such a current,” replied 
Jack; for, see, the wind is still blowing toward the 
northwest in the same direction as the wind that ac- 
companied the storm, and directly opposite to that of 
the ordinary Southeast Trades. I suppose that’s the 
326 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


reason the boat has not drifted as rapidly as the cap/' 
Their anxiety as to the fate of their companions’ 
boat naturally led them to speak frequently of the 
absent ones. 

‘‘ Captain Jack,” said Charley, who seemed to takef 
a satisfaction in having a captain to talk to, and had 
unconsciously made a compromise which permitted 
him to use both the captain’s and his companion’s name, 
do you know whether the captain or Hiram had a 
compass? ” 

I know the captain always carries a pocket com- 
pass with him,” was the reply; “and I’m glad of it 
too,” he continued, “ for they will be much safer with a 
compass than without one.” 

Rompey, who, it will be remembered, accompanied 
the boys, had behaved himself in a most exemplary 
manner. He appeared to know that matters were not 
exactly right, and scanned the faces of his young 
masters as if desirous of finding out what it was that 
worried them the most. He apparently came to the 
conclusion they were looking for something in the 
water toward which they were rowing the boat, and 
appointed himself as number two of the watch. There 
was no little advantage in this for Rompey’s ability to 
see distant objects distinctly very greatly exceeded that 
of any of the boys. 

At last something came within the range of Rom- 
pey’s sharp vision, so as a good and faithful watch he 
promptly reported the same, first apparently to his 
young masters, which was quite wrong from the stand- 

327 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


point of discipline on a vessel on the sea, and after- 
ward to Jack. While none of them understood just 
what Rompey said, they knew at once he was report- 
ing something in sight. 

“ I wonder what Rompey sees in the water over 
the bow of the boat? ” inquired Charley. 

Can he have seen the missing boat? ” said Jack. 

As he was about to turn around and see for himself, 
he detected an expression of anxiety on Harold’s face. 

What is it Rompey has reported, Harold? ” he in- 
quired. 

I am not sure,” said Harold, but I fear it is an 
oar.” 

I hope not,” said Jack, turning around, “ but I’m 
afraid you’re right. However,” he said bravely, there 
is no use staying here guessing at it, is there?” 

‘‘ No,” was the reply, I can now distinctly see an 
oar, and recognize it as one of the oars from the 
captain’s boat.” 

Taking their seats, the boys rowed rapidly in the 
direction of the floating object, and even before they 
had brought the boat within reach of it and picked 
it out of the water, all their doubts had vanished. It 
was one of the oars of the missing boat. 

What had become of the boat? Had it been de- 
stroyed by the storm ? Was it now lying on the bottom 
of the ocean near the bodies of the two men they all so 
dearly loved and had hoped to see? Time alone could 
tell. They sat silently in the boat with the exception of 
Harold, who commenced crying bitterly at what he 
328 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


believed was almost positive proof of the drowning of 
his uncle and Hiram. 

Don’t give up too soon,” replied Captain Jack to 
Harold. Keep on the outlook.” 

So they continued rowing toward the island, which 
had now risen higher above the horizon, and was stand- 
ing up with fair distinctness, although still very many 
miles distant. They had not proceeded for more than 
half an hour longer when Rompey’s bark again an- 
nounced the presence of a floating object in the water 
beyond them, and when they came up to it they picked 
from the water another oar which they also recognized 
as one from the boat. As it was placed in the boat 
alongside the oar first taken out of the water, none of 
them said anything. Each felt that the others were 
carefully watching his face to read on it if possible 
what he thought of the fate of their friends. 

Continuing to row toward the island for another 
hour Rompey again announced an object floating in 
sight in the water off the bow and, when coming up to 
it, they saw that it was the broken mast of the boat 
with its many-colored blanket for a sail, they all broke 
down and began to bewail the fate of their companions. 

The storm has struck the boat suddenly and 
broken the mast off near its support,” replied Jack, 
pointing to the splintered end of the mast. “ Whether 
or not it has wrecked and upset the boat, or whether the 
mast in falling has carried the captain and Hiram with 
it, we cannot tell.” 

'' But, Jack,” said Charley, “ you surely don’t think 

329 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


that two good sailors like the captain and Hiram would 
fail to keep out of the way of the falling mast? ” 

That don’t worry me at all. If the boat hasn’t been 
upset or injured when the mast fell against it, and the 
captain and Hiram have one pair of oars left, they may 
yet return in safety to the island. But, if they have 
neither oars nor sail, they could do nothing. This is 
probably the reason we have not yet seen them.” 

Captain Jack,” said Harold, what you say is pos- 
sible; and, although it does look bad for the captain 
and Hiram, yet they may be alive. Let’s hurry to the 
island, climb the hills on Parker Cliffs where we can 
see the ocean for a considerable distance. Perhaps 
we can see them coming toward us.” 

Jack had intended to do this as soon as Charley had 
finished speaking. He said, however: 

That’s good advice, Harold. We’ll follow it.” 

So they pulled the boat steadily toward the island. 
At Harold’s earnest request Jack permitted him to 
sit alongside of Charley and row one of the oars ; for, 
as Harold suggested, there was not so much need now 
for looking for the missing boat. If it came in sight 
at all it would probably be over their stern. 

They continued rowing not only until the sun set, but 
even far into the night. Indeed, it was near eleven 
o’clock when, tired and downhearted, they landed on 
the island at a point on the northern shores of the 
Harding Channel near the lagoon. 

Of course no one was waiting to receive them. They 
had given up all hopes of that ever since the broken 

330 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


mast with the blanket sail had been taken into the 
boat. 

Climbing to the top of the cliffs they built a fire and 
prepared supper in a heartless manner, spending the 
night in the open air huddling around the fire to keep 
warm. 

Early next morning, half an hour before sunrise, 
they climbed to the top of Harold Hill. The leaden 
dull-gray color of the sky and ocean was in keeping 
with their feelings. Never before had things seemed so 
dreary and unpromising. They sadly missed the 
strong, kindly, thoughtful presence of the captain. 

But suddenly a faint streak of light was seen on the 
eastern horizon, and the clouds began to take on the 
beautiful sunrise colors of crimson and gold. The 
colors grew stronger, and soon flung their warm tints 
over the surface of the waters, while the higher clouds 
began to take on the other tints of the sunrise. 

The glories of the rising sun put new courage into 
the hearts of the boys. 

Look at that, Harold,” said Jack, the God who 
made the heavens and the earth will look after our 
dear ones.” 

They stood watching the sunrise for a few moments. 

Come, boys,” said Jack, there is much to do. It 
may be that our friends have been wrecked on some 
lonely island, and are ignorant of the exact location of 
Harding Island. Let’s pile wood on the fire on the 
cliffs and keep a column of smoke by day and a pillar 
of fire by night, so as to show them our direction.” 

331 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


But, as they afterward discovered, their companions 
had been carried so far away that their signals could 
not be seen by them. 

They began to cut down cocoanut trees and to collect 
the husks of the cocoanuts in a huge pile which, for 
the whole of that day, they kept burning, throwing on 
water occasionally during the daytime and keeping it 
burning brightly during the night. 


332 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXV 

More Trouble at Jackson House. Harold's 
Dream 

As the captain had predicted, the putrefying fish made 
the air in the neighborhood of the new channel so ex- 
tremely unpleasant, that when not obliged to remain at 
the lower level they gladly sought the higher land of 
Parker Cliffs. Remembering what the captain had said 
as to the probability of their being obliged to bury the 
fish to prevent an epidemic, by the use of hoes they dug 
trenches in the sand at the upper edge of the beach, and 
then with rakes drew the fish into the trenches and 
covered them with loose sand. Two days at this work 
in the immediate neighborhood of Harding Inlet suf- 
ficed to clear up things fairly well, while an additional 
day sufficed for this work on the northern coast. They 
had not failed, however, during these three days to 
keep a bonfire burning at the highest part of the cliffs, 
occasionally wetting it during the daytime to raise 
columns of smoke, and keeping it burning brightly at 
night, so that it might serve as a beacon to their friends 
if, perchance, they had been cast on some lonely island. 

They had now reluctantly almost given up all hopes 
of ever again seeing the absent ones. They feared that 
both the captain and Hiram had perished in the great 
storm, and that they must, therefore, continue their life 
333 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


on the island without them. They had now lived to- 
gether for so long a time, a happy family of five, that 
the absence of the two men made a great gap in their 
little community. As Charley remarked, it was not 
only that two were absent, but such a two ! 
i It frequently happens in life that we fail properly to 
appreciate our blessings until we lose them. This had 
certainly been the case with the three boys. It had 
seemed so natural for Hiram to look after their comfort, 
prepare their food, clean and mend their clothes, make 
for them with his carpenter or cabinet-maker’s tools the 
things they needed from time to time, as well as cheer- 
fully to perform the many services called for, that 
they had failed properly to appreciate how much he 
was doing. But now he was absent, they began every 
day to realize more and more the gap his absence had 
made in their little community. 

But it was the captain whose absence they felt the 
most keenly. It was the captain to whom they had car- 
ried all their difficulties. It was the captain who re- 
moved their doubts and gave them advice concerning 
the many things that were constantly happening. What 
a wonderful man he appeared to his young friends to 
be ! Much better he was than a walking encyclopedia ; 
for, while an encyclopedia answers one’s questions, its 
answers are given in set phrases. If one understands, 
all right ; but if not, give it up, for an encyclopedia can- 
not be bothered by stupidity. Now, it was different 
with the captain. If the boys failed to understand the 
answers he gave, he was ready to go over them in 
334 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


another way until the statements became perfectly 
plain. The boys, therefore, knew they were certain of 
having their questions intelligently answered when they 
came to the captain. 

But there was something even more than this. They 
had all learned to love the captain as a father, and never 
hesitated to bring to him their most private troubles; 
for they were sure of both sympathy and comfort. 

As the days went on without any word having been 
received from the absent ones, they keenly felt that the 
chances of their friends being alive were every day 
growing smaller and smaller. It naturally became a 
habit after the work of the day was done — and now 
that they were obliged to do everything themselves, this 
work called for the greater part of their waking hours 
— to sit for an hour or so on the porch before retiring. 
While their conversation related to the work of the 
day, as well as to the work planned for the next day, 
it always reverted finally to the captain and Hiram. 
They seemed to take a sort of melancholy comfort in 
recalling the things these men had either done or 
spoken about in the happy days when they were still 
with them. ' 

As we have said, they had almost given up all hopes 
of ever seeing the two men again. In truth, however, 
with perhaps the exception of Harold, each believed, 
somehow or other, that their friends would finally re- 
turn. One night, during one of the conversations above 
referred to. Jack said to Charley and Harold : 

Boys, you must not by any means think I have 

335 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


given up all hope of again seeing the captain and 
Hiram. Of course, I know that every day makes the 
probability of their return smaller, but we must not ^ 

forget that neither of them is a man easy to down. It j 

is true they have been exposed to a severe storm in an j 

open boat far from land. It is also true they have lost : 

two of their oars, and that their mast and sail have gone • 

overboard. Now, while they may have been drowned I 

by the overturning of the boat, yet if they had any j 

chances of escape they are men who would take such j 

chances. Indeed, somehow or other, I feel sure that ^ 

we will see them again.” I 

I hope so. Jack,” said Charley. ‘‘ I never re- j 
member meeting a man I loved as much as the cap- j 

tain, nor a finer or jollier man than Hiram. I say, j 

Jack,” he continued, what a splendid leader the cap- j 

tain was. He knew such a lot and, moreover, knew it t 

so as to make the most of it.” | 

‘‘ Tm glad. Captain Jack,” said Harold, “ to hear you | 
say you believe there is a chance of our seeing them - 
again. For my part, I don’t understand how you make 
it out. I’m afraid we shall never see them again,” he 
added. 

Oh, they’ll come back some of these days, Harold,” 
said Charley; “cheer up!” I 

“ All right, Charley,” said Harold, “ I’ll try to be- 
lieve it. I need not tell you it isn’t that I don’t want > 
to believe it.” ^ 

Next morning, while the three boys had taken a 
short cut from the lagoon to the beach across a part of 

336 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


the reef near Jackson House, that consisted of irregular 
blocks or fragments of limestone, Jack suddenly slipped 
and gave his left ankle a severe wrench. At the same 
time he both cut and bruised the leg against the jagged 
edges of the rocks. 

“ Are you hurt much. Jack ? ” inquired the boys. 

“ I think not,” was the reply. But on attempting to 
walk he found the pain in his left ankle so severe that 
he almost fainted. Indeed, he was unable to touch the 
foot to the ground without severe pain. 

I’m afraid I’m done up for the present,” said Jack, 
bravely smiling. See if you can’t pull me out of this 
hole. Look out you don’t cut yourself on the edges of 
the limestone. They are sharper than I would have 
thought possible.” 

Charley gripped Jack by the shoulders while Harold 
supported the injured leg so it would not touch any- 
thing. In this way they at last succeeded in placing 
him on the sand at the upper edge of the beach. They 
then attempted to carry him to the house, one taking 
the shoulders and the other the uninjured leg, but the 
pain was so severe that they were obliged to try some 
other plan. 

“ Wait a moment here with Jack, Harold,” said 
Charley, I’ll run to the lumber pile and get one of 
the extra shutters of the portable houses. We can use 
it as a stretcher to carry Jack to Jackson House.” 

By the aid of this improvised stretcher they suc- 
ceeded in carrying Jack to the house, placing him on 
the captain’s bed in the front room, 
w 337 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Although Jack was severely injured and in great 
pain, yet it was not so much the pain that troubled him 
as the fear lest the injury would confine him to the 
room for a considerable time. He, therefore, began 
reproaching himself for the accident. 

“ It was extremely awkward in me,” he exclaimed. 
“ It is especially unfortunate to be laid up at a time 
when there are only three of us left on the island.” 

Now, don’t worry. Captain Jack,” said Charley. 
‘‘ Don’t bother yourself about thinking how few of us 
are on the island, but rather thank your stars there 
are two others with you. Think how much better off 
you are than if you were alone on the island. Here 
you have both Harold and myself who will look after 
you and make you as comfortable as possible. Two 
nurses,” he continued, “ for one sick man. Indeed, for 
the matter of that, I think I should say four nurses, for 
I do not doubt that Satan may be taught to wait on 
you and bring you things that you may need when 
we’re away; and even if Satan cannot do this, I’m sure 
Rompey can.” 

Charley had good reason for speaking as he did 
about Rompey, for the intelligent animal seeing that 
Jack had injured himself, had followed the boys to 
the room, and stood looking at them as much as to 
say: 

“ Is there anything I can do ? ” 

Harold seeing this, commenced petting the animal 
and said to him: 

You’ll watch Captain Jack and see that nothing 

338 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


hurts him while we are away, and will bring him things 
when he asks you for them, won’t you, Rompey? ” 

And by the wagging of his tail as well as by his 
sympathetic barkings, Rompey said: 

I certainly will.” 

And now how they missed the captain ! If he were 
only with them Jack would be sure to receive the right 
treatment. But the captain was absent; dead, for all 
they knew. The responsibility was on them, and they 
felt it keenly. 

As soon, therefore, as they had placed Jack on the 
bed they went in search of two things. Harold for 
the medicine-chest they had brought from the brig, 
and Charley for a book on nursing and the proper treat- 
ment of injuries, that the captain, as if fearing an 
accident might occur to some of them during his ab- 
sence, had called their attention to; he had also care- 
fully explained to them some simple methods for 
treating accidents. 

Charley soon found and read the brief directions for 
the proper care of an injury to the ankle. He then 
handed the book to Jack, and said smiling : 

“ I know. Jack, it is considered unprofessional for 
the doctor to permit the patient to know what he is 
doing, or why he is doing it, but in this case the doctor 
knows less about the matter than his patient. I re- 
member your telling the captain that you had already 
taken an extended course in the proper treatment of 
accidents. I’ll ask you to read the directions and see 
if I’m doing right. If not, tell me just what to do. 
339 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Now, Harold,” he said, we must undress Jack so we 
can thoroughly examine his ankle.” 

The left ankle was found to be severely injured. In- 
flammation had already set in, and both the ankle and 
the parts near it were beginning to swell. Moreover, 
there were several ugly cuts and bruises where the flesh 
had been lacerated or injured by the sharp edges of the 
limestone. 

“ Now, Charley,” said Jack, “ you must see first if 
there are any bones broken. Take hold of the foot 
and move it gently to and fro listening carefully 
whether you can hear any grating sounds produced by 
the broken bones rubbing against one another.” As 
Charley did this Jack nearly fainted from the extreme 
pain the movements gave him. As Charley was about 
to stop. Jack replied: 

Don’t stop, Charley. Of course it hurts horribly, 
but if this is not done now, it will be impossible when 
the swelling has gone on much longer.” So the rock- 
ing motion was continued with its accompanying ago- 
nizing pain. 

Fortunately, no grating sounds were heard, so Jack 
replied : 

“ Well, that’s fortunate. I think there are no bones , 
broken.” 

“ Yes,” added Charley; a sort of modified rapture, 
as they say in the comic opera of ‘ The Mikado.’ ” 

“ Now, Charley,” said Jack, ‘‘ as there appears to be 
no fractures of the bones, we must next see if any of 
the bones or ligaments have slipped out of place — that 

340 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


is, have been dislocated. Please look at both ankles and 
see if they are of the same general shape. Of course 
the injured one is larger than the other, for it is be- 
ginning to swell. I mean, does it look as if any of 
the bones or ligaments had slipped out of place? If so, 
you must slip them back again.” 

Jack,” said Charley, examining the injured ankle. 

I’m sorry to say it looks as if there is a dislocation.” 

Then,” said Jack, “ give a steady, strong pull to 
the foot while Harold holds the leg. It’ll hurt awfully, 
but it must be done.” 

Charley gave a steady but strong pull when, at last, 
the dislocated bones slipped into place with a little snap, 
and the ankle took the same general shape as the other. 
The pain during this operation was so severe that Jack 
actually fainted, but soon regained consciousness. 

“ Now,” he said, ‘‘ get some hot water and bathe the 
ankle. Harold, while Charley is doing this, look in 
the medicine-chest for some rolls of bandages.” 

I know,” said Harold, ‘‘ they are bands of muslin. 
Here are several about an inch wide. I judge from 
their size and weight that there are from ten to fifteen 
feet of muslin-strip in each bundle.” 

'' Take two or three of these bundles and put them 
in a pan of boiling water and boil them thoroughly,” 
said Jack to Harold. 

'' What’s that for? ” inquired Harold. 

''To sterilize them,” was the reply. " They have 
been so long on the brig, or on the island, that they may 
have become infected.” 


341 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ But they are marked sterilized,” said Harold. 

‘‘ Yes, but then they may have become infected since. 
Remember the awful air of the cabin from the doctor’s 
specimens.” 

The ankle having been thus treated, Charley pro- 
ceeded to wash the bruised part of the leg, removing 
the blood, and then taking a bottle from the medicine- 
chest labeled ‘‘ Corrosive Sublimate Tablets ” and 
marked Poison,” he dissolved one of them, under 
Jack’s directions, in a large bowl of water, carefully 
washing the cut parts and then pouring some of the 
liquid over the same. 

I know what that’s for,” said Harold. It’s to 
kill any of the little animals that might get into the 
cuts from the dirt or air when, rapidly breeding, they 
would make the wounds fester.” 

Jack now directed Charley how properly to bandage 
his ankle, following some very plain drawings in the 
book showing how this was properly done. 

“ Now,” said Charley, when everything was com- 
pleted, and Jack was comfortably placed in bed, “ we 
have done all we can. Jack, and the hardest work re- 
mains for you.” 

“ What do you mean? ” asked Jack. 

Why, what the book says about the necessity for 
absolute rest on the part of the patient. Shall I read it 
to you ? ” 

“ Oh, no,” said Jack smiling, that’s nearly the first 
thing I read when you handed me the book. It was 
what I most dreaded. Here it is,” and Jack read as 

342 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


follows : ‘ But above all, it is absolutely necessary that 

the patient be assured complete rest. Any attempt to 
use a badly sprained ankle too soon may result in per- 
manent lameness.' " 

'' Never mind, Jack,” said Harold, seeing that the 
prospects were causing him great worry, we’ll man- 
age to pull through somehow or other. Besides,” he 
added philosophically, there’s no good in worrying ; 
it won’t make your ankle get well any sooner. On 
the contrary, it may keep you longer in bed.” 

As a result of the accident but two of them were able 
to be on their feet, and these the youngest. 

But their troubles were by no means over. Early 
next morning, while Harold and Charley were prepar- 
ing breakfast, Charley was worried by the flushed ap- 
pearance of Harold’s face. Without letting him know 
what he was doing, he felt Harold’s hand. It was 
much hotter than he had ever before known it to be. 
Without saying anything they finished the preparation 
of breakfast, taking the food into Jack’s room, where 
they ate together. When they had finished eating, 
Charley, turning to Harold, exclaimed : 

‘‘ Why, Harold, you have eaten nothing. Do you 
feel sick?” : 

“ I don’t feel hungry,” was the reply ; and I have 
a bad headache.” 

'' I think Harold has a little fever this morning. 
Jack,” said Charley. 

That’s so,” said Jack, anxiously feeling his hand. 

I hope you are not going to be sick.” 

343 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ Oh, I guess I am all right,” replied Harold, '' but 
let me tell you the wonderful dream I had last night.” 

‘'All right, Harold,” said Jack anxiously, “let’s 
hear it.” 

“ I dreamed,” replied Harold, “ I saw boat No. 23 
lying on the reef of a small coral island. It was a little 
bit of an island, not more than a mile or so across. The 
lagoon had been filled with sand. There were no co- 
coanut palms, and the land was so low that I think it 
would have been nearly covered by the water at high 
tide.” 

“ Did you see the captain and Hiram on the island ? ” 
inquired Charley eagerly. 

“ Yes, they were both there, but looked hungry and 
worried. They had apparently just finished eating 
something they had taken out of the boat. I noticed 
particularly that the boat had lost its mast, and only 
had one oar. The captain was talking to Hiram, and 
seemed greatly worried about something. Just as I 
drew near and tried to hear what they were talking 
about I awoke.” 

“ There, now,” said Jack, “ that’s a good sign, any- 
how, Harold.” 

“ Yes,” said Harold, “ and I hope it’ll come true. 
Charley,” he continued, turning to the younger of the 
two boys ; “ if you don’t mind. I’ll not help you with the 
work for an hour or so. My head aches so badly that 
I feel quite dizzy when I get on my feet. I think I will 
lie down for a few minutes.” 

“ All right, Harold,” said Charley, “ you’d better 

344 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


take a little nap. Maybe you’ll feel better when you 
get up.” 

But instead of growing better, Harold rapidly grew 
worse. At the end of an hour he became delirious. 
His mind was evidently running on the dream that he 
had had, for they heard him say : 

Uncle Arthur, if you had another oar, or could rig 
up another mast and sail, you and Hiram could bring 
the boat back to Harding Island, which lies over in 
that direction,” and then apparently losing all memory 
of his previous conversation, he would say pleadingly 
to the men : “ Please come back to Harding Island ! 
You do not know how much we miss you! ” 

There was a clinical thermometer in the medicine- 
chest, a form of instrument suitable for taking the tem- 
perature of the human body by the introduction of the 
bulb into the mouth or other cavity. This form of 
thermometer is so arranged that as the mercury rises 
in the tube, on exposure to a higher temperature, it 
does not return to the bulb as in the ordinary ther- 
mometer, and thus making it possible to note the 
highest temperature to which it has been exposed. 

The thermometer showed that Harold’s temperature 
was one hundred and one and one-half. Though not 
very high, yet his condition gave them much anxiety. 


345 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXVI 

Captain Charley. An Impromptu Comic Opera 

Charley was now the only well person on the island, 
and was therefore kept very busy attending to outside 
matters, in cooking, as well as looking after the many 
calls of the two persons he was nursing. Jack’s ankle 
required no little attention, but, knowing how busy 
Charley was. Jack himself attended to as much of the 
bathing and dressing as was possible. Harold re- 
quired more care. His temperature had risen to one 
hundred and two and one-half. At times he was quite 
delirious. He would then imagine himself at home, 
and’ would enter into long conversations with his 
parents, telling them of the many adventures he had 
had both on the derelict brig and on Harding Island. It 
touched Charley very much to hear how frequently in 
these conversations Harold would tell his parents about 
the splendid young lad they had picked up in an open 
boat at sea, and how much Harold had become attached 
to him. During other times, in his delirium, he im- 
agined he was with Captain Harding and Hiram, and 
would hold long conversations with them. 

It was a curious fact that in all his conversations 
with the captain and Hiram he never appeared to for- 
get that both these men were away from Jackson 
House. He seemed to think that somehow or other he 

346 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


had left Jackson House, and had gone to them for the 
purpose of persuading them to go back with him. 

'' Please come back! ” he would plead. You can’t 
imagine how much we miss you. Besides, Jack’s ankle 
is very bad, and I know that both Charley and Jack 
are uncertain whether they have attended to it prop- 
erly. I say. Uncle Arthur,” he would repeatedly in- 
quire, ‘‘ do you think this hurt will lame Jack for life? 
That would be awful, wouldn’t it? So please come 
back with me at once.” 

Rompey was greatly affected by this condition of his 
young master. He spent nearly all the time near Har- 
old’s bed constantly watching him. Every now and 
then he would look up at Charley or Jack shaking his 
tail and making little whimperings as if to say : 

‘‘Won’t you please do something for him? Why 
don’t he speak to me? He looks straight at me and 
never says a word. Have I been doing anything that 
has made him angry with me ? ” 

It was this phase of Harold’s sickness that appeared 
to give Rompey the greatest anxiety; for, though 
Harold looked straight at him, yet he apparently failed 
to recognize him. Every now and then during the 
restlessness of the lad, when he would throw one hand 
over the side of the bed, the dog would gently lick the 
hand in a vain endeavor to have his young master 
notice him. 

Charley was frequently obliged to leave the room to 
prepare food, get cool water, or climb the nearest co- 
coanut palm for fresh cocoanuts, the cool milk of which 
347 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


was refreshing to both his patients. Jack had asked 
Charley to move his bed close to Harold’s, so he was 
able to do many little things for the sick lad, such as 
to give him his medicine, especially to give him a drink 
of water, for which he was almost constantly asking. 
Jack was able to get these things without getting out 
of bed, because Charley had placed a small table close 
to the other side of it. 

It was indeed an anxious time. They were so fearful 
they were leaving something undone that should be at- 
tended to, that they eagerly read and reread all they 
could find in the medical book about fevers. But there 
were unfortunately so many kinds of fever, and their 
symptoms were so uncertain, in most cases requiring 
many days of sickness before they could be properly 
recognized, that they were unable to make head or tail 
out of the directions. They were consequently greatly 
worried, but being boys with plenty of common sense, 
they wisely concluded to do nothing for Harold beyond 
giving him the simple remedies the captain had em- 
ployed during those very few occasions when they 
had been somewhat unwell. 

Fortunately, Harold soon began to mend. There 
were great rejoicings at Jackson House when this 
happy condition was reached. Nor were these rejoic- 
ings limited to Jack and Charley. Satan and Rompey, 
especially the latter, were exceedingly demonstrative in 
showing their delight at Harold being able to recog- 
nize and speak to them. 

The first thing Harold said when he regained con- 

348 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


sciousness was to inquire of both Jack and Charley 
in an anxious manner : 

Have the captain and Hiram come back yet? ” 

They greatly feared when this question was asked 
that the disappointment would act unfavorably on 
Harold’s convalescence. They had the good sense, 
however, to reply immediately, and in as nearly an un- 
concerned manner as possible: 

“ They haven’t come back yet, but we’re hoping 
they’ll be here before long.” And then they imme- 
diately tried to think of something that would take 
Harold’s mind off this question. Fortunately, Rompey 
came to the rescue. Observing that his young master 
had recognized Jack and Charley, he stood gently rest- 
ing his two paws on the side of the bed and looking 
eagerly into Harold’s face, and by tail shakings and 
whimperings to beg notice from him. Harold, seeing 
this, said: 

‘‘ Hello, Rompey, where have you been all this time ? 
Good dog, come here.” 

It was unnecessary to say that both Jack and 
Charley were delighted that Harold’s attention had 
thus been momentarily taken from the absent ones and 
transferred to the animal, so they both took their part 
in speaking to and petting the dog. 

But Satan, becoming jealous of Rompey receiving so 
much attention, flew from the edge of the table near 
Jack’s bed, on which she had been resting, and looked 
toward Charley, cocked her head to one side, and be- 
gan crying : 


349 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ Something to eat here ! ” 

Satan’s remarks appeared to be so appropriate that 
Harold began laughing, saying to Charley: 

‘‘ Satan is not as stupid as she looks. I am awfully 
hungry. I feel almost starving,” he continued, in the 
manner so characteristic of those who are recovering 
from spells of sickness during which they have eaten 
little or nothing. As Charley was going out of the 
room to get something to eat, he continued : “ Wait 
a moment, Charley.” And turning to both boys he 
inquired : How long have I been sick? ” 

“ For three whole days,” was the reply. 

‘‘ That’s very astonishing,” he said, ‘‘ I don’t remem- 
ber anything about it, except that several times I 
thought I had returned home. On several other occa- 
sions, I thought I had visited the captain and Hiram 
on the same lonely island I dreamed about just before 
I grew sick.” 

Harold’s convalescence continued without any set- 
back. There was one thing that had certainly im- 
proved, and that was his appetite. They had become 
so alarmed at reading about the necessity for feeding 
a patient during recovery from typhoid fever on soft, 
easily digestible foods, that they would not let Harold 
have any solid food for some time. 

Why,” complained Harold good-naturedly, ‘‘ I 
couldn’t have had typhoid fever. The books say one 
never gets over that for six weeks from the time the 
sickness begins.” 

“ That’s true,” replied Jack, “ but the book also 
3SO 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


speaks about a kind of typhoid fever called ‘ walking 
typhoid fever,’ during which the patient although un- 
well and uncomfortable, is able to remain out of bed 
during most of this time.” 

“ Oh, come. Captain Jack,” replied Harold in a jolly- 
ing tone, do either you or Charley remember any 
time during the five or six weeks before I went to bed 
when I was either unwell or had lost my appetite ? ” 

“ We do not,” cried both boys with a shout, ending 
in a laugh. “ No, Harold, we certainly do not re- 
member your ever having lost your appetite during the 
time to which you refer.” 

Then, Jack,” pleaded Harold, ‘‘ can’t I have some 
solid food ? ” 

“ Harold,” replied Jack, “ don’t let’s take any risks, 
so be sensible and eat some soft food.” 

All right,” said Harold, “ I will. I say, Charley,” 
he continued, turning to that person, “ you’re cook ; 
can’t you get me up something that is jolly nice? Do 
you think you could make a rice pudding? ” 

“ Yes,” said Jack, anxious to encourage Harold, 
I’d like to eat some rice pudding myself.” 

‘‘ I don’t know,” said Charley. “ I know how it 
tastes and what it looks like, and what it has in it, 
but just how it is made I must confess my ignorance. 
However, I’ll try.” 

What has it in it? ” inquired Jack in good-natured 
raillery. 

‘‘ Rice, sugar, milk or cream, and if you can get it, 
a little dash of nutmeg.” 


351 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ Well,” was the reply, “ all those articles are among 
our stores. We brought so many air and water-tight 
packages each containing ten pounds of rice, that I 
have often wondered what we could do with them all. 
I know too, there is plenty of sugar. As to the milk and 
cream you can get them from the cocoanuts, and as 
for the nutmeg, if you haven’t any you’ll have to do 
without it.” 

“ But there are plenty of nutmegs,” replied Charley. 

I remember seeing one in a little tin nutmeg grater 
I was looking at in the kitchen only yesterday, and 
several dozen others in a bag.” 

As Charley was leaving the room, Harold said : 

Please make plenty, Charley. I’m awfully hungry. 
If I can’t have solid food, let me have as much soft 
food as I can eat. I guess. Jack, you won’t object to 
that, will you? ” 

‘‘ I think,” said Jack laughing, you can have it 
often but not too much at a time.” 

‘‘ Well,” said Charley, getting ready to leave the 
room, I’m off. I’ll do my best.” 

‘‘ Let me see,” said Charley to himself when he 
reached the kitchen. I remember the rice puddings 
Hiram used to make. They were certainly splendid. 
He brought them to the table in a two-quart dish. I 
wish I had watched him carefully when he made it, but 
I was in such a hurry to go with Harold to the swim- 
ming-pool that I didn’t stop to watch. But then it 
ought to be a simple matter. Rice pudding only con- 
tains three things; rice, sugar, and cocoanut milk. I 

352 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


don’t count the nutmeg. That can be put in after the 
whole thing is cooked.” 

So Charley commenced to get ready. Getting out a 
ten-pound box of rice, and plenty of sugar, he opened a 
number of cocoanuts and extracted the milk. He also 
got a lot of cream by scraping a few somewhat unripe 
fruit. 

Now,” continued Charley to himself, how much 
rice shall I use. Let me see. Harold wants me to 
make a big pudding, so there will be enough to eat. I 
know Jack likes it, and so do I, and then Rompey and 
Satan will be disappointed if I don’t give each of them 
a good dishful. I think I’ll make enough to fill a four- 
quart pan, so as to leave enough over for to-morrow. 
There’s no trouble about the milk and cream, since I 
can’t put any more in the pan than it will hold, and 
when it cooks off I will add more. 

And now I wonder how much rice will be needed. 
I guess I’ll take enough to little more than half fill the 
pan. Say I use two and a half quarts,” which Charley 
proceeded to measure out. I wonder,” he continued, 
whether it is necessary first to boil the rice. I guess it 
is. Anyhow, I’ll boil it first in water and then in milk 
and cream. Let me see ; what shall I boil the rice in ? 
I know; this four-quart boiler will be just the thing. 
It is certainly big enough to boil two and a half quarts 
of rice.” So Charley put it on the fire, barely covering 
it with water and milk, which was soon brought to a 
boil. 

I’m not going to have this rice pudding spoiled by 

353 


X 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


burning. A burnt taste is so disagreeable.” He was, 
therefore, careful to stir the rice in the boiler every few 
minutes. 

Gracious how the stuff is swelling,” said Charley, 
noting the great increase in the volume of the rice. 

ril have to add more water and milk. The rice is 
now almost dry.” 

He added the water and kept on stirring, but the 
rice kept on swelling in a most amazing manner. It 
actually swelled so that it rose to the top of the four- 
quart boiler, and was beginning to boil over and fall 
on the stove. 

“Looks as though I had cooked too much,” said 
Charley. “ But I ain’t going to waste it.” 

Fortunately there were a number of these gallon 
boilers on the brig, and Hiram had put them in the 
kitchen for cooking. 

“ I’ll ladle some of this stuff out into another boiler,” 
he said, which he did. 

But in order to keep the stuff from burning, he was 
obliged to add water and milk to each of the boilers 
every now and then. 

“ Well,” said Charley, “ this certainly surprises me. 
The wretched stuff is continuing to swell.” 

It did, indeed, for now both pots were filled with rice 
and beginning to boil over on the fire. 

“ Gracious,” said Charley, “ I’m not going to be 
beaten this way. I’ll use two other pots,” and soon 
there were four pots of the boiling, seething mass, with 
Charley rushing frantically from pot to pot stirring 
354 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


each with a large spoon to prevent their contents from 
burning. 

In the meanwhile Jack and Harold, who heard 
Charley running about the kitchen, for their room was 
almost immediately over it, began to wonder what was 
going on. So Jack called out: 

What’s the matter, Charley ? How’s that rice pud- 
ding coming on. You won’t forget to cook enough, 
will you ? ” 

‘‘ Oh, no,” said Charley grimly; I’ll cook enough 
all right.” 

“ Take care,” said Harold, I smell something burn- 
ing.” 

“ So do I,” said Charley, but never mind, Harold, 
I’m making a wonderful pudding down here. I’m sure 
both of you would be surprised if you could see it. 
But please excuse my not talking any more. The rice 
pudding requires all my attention,” cried Charley, 
frantically rushing from pot to pot. 

I wonder what’s up,” said Harold to Jack. 

'' I don’t know,” replied Jack laughing, but I 
think I can guess. Whatever it is, however, Charley is 
taking gymnastic exercise along with the cooking. 
Listen how he’s rushing around.” 

“ Jack,” said Harold, ask him straight out what’s 
the matter.” 

Charley,” called Jack, tell us what’s the matter.” 

“ I’m not sure,” answered Charley, “ but I think 
some one has been playing a trick on me, and has 
molded baking powder into grains resembling rice.” 
355 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


What makes you think that? ” inquired Jack, be- 
ginning to laugh, being pretty sure he knew what was 
the matter. 

‘‘ Why, the wretched stuff swells so. I put the rice 
in a four-quart boiler, but it began to swell so much it 
filled that and another four-quart boiler. The swelling 
has kept on until I can’t manage it, although I have 
four full four-quart boilers holding it, and I’m think- 
ing of adding two others, for I don’t intend to lose any. 
You asked me to cook a lot and I’m cooking a lot, and 
you’ve got to do your part toward eating it.” 

‘‘ I’ll eat my share,” said Harold, “ I’m not going 
back on the cook, Charley, after he has taken all this 
trouble.” 

I say, Charley,” called out Jack, how much rice 
are you cooking ? ” 

Oh, only a full two and a half quarts,” was the 
reply. ‘‘ I thought I had better be sure to have 
enough.” 

At this both boys burst into loud laughter. They 
had both watched Hiram making rice pudding and 
cooking rice often, and knew that at the most, for a 
good-sized pudding, three or four tablespoonfuls of rice 
would be plenty. Of course, it would be necessary to 
add large quantities of water, or preferably milk, while 
the rice was cooking, and that made a rich custard with 
the rice greatly increasing the bulk. 

When Charley learned how great a mistake he had 
made, he began to laugh good-naturedly, saying: 

‘‘ I’m beaten this time. I guess you’ll have to make 

356 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


out with boiled rice and sugar served with cocoanut 
milk and a dash of nutmeg. But I promise to prepare 
for you to-morrow a first-class pudding if both you 
and Jack will put your knowledge together and tell 
me just how to go about it.’’ 

The combined knowledge of the other two boys re- 
sulted in the following recipe for what they agreed 
to call “ Harding Island rice pudding.” It was as 
follows : 

Place in a two-quart pan about four tablespoonfuls 
of rice. Add two cups of sugar and enough milk and 
cream nearly to fill the pan. Place in a hot oven for 
two hours and stir occasionally, adding milk and cream 
from time to time to supply that boiled off. When 
nearly done flavor with grated nutmeg to taste. Serve 
either hot or cold. 

Charley put his whole mind on the preparation of 
this chef-d'ceuvre. It was so great a success, indeed, 
that they chaffed him, saying he must certainly teach 
Hiram how to make Harding Island rice puddings. 

Harold’s convalescence continued satisfactorily, so 
they all felt in an extremely joyous mood. 

One afternoon, shortly after Harold’s convalescence, 
Charley, who had been absent from the sick-room 
rather oftener than usual, informed Jack and Harold 
that he had prepared a surprise for them in order 
properly to celebrate Harold’s recovery and Jack’s 
evident bettered condition. 

All right, Charley,” said Jack, I’m sure a little 
fun now will help all of us.” 

357 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


After an early dinner, Charley gravely handed not 
only to Jack and Harold but also to Rompey and 
Satan an invitation written on separate sheets of paper 
on which the boys read the following : 

GRAND ENTERTAINMENT 
in the Sick-room at Harding Island, Thursday, 2 p. m. 

CAROLA, THE WONDERFUL AUSTRALIAN WIZARD AND 
SWEET WARRLER 

Will Give an Exhibition of His Marvelous Powers 
at the Above Place and Time. 

Come Early if you Want a Good Seat. 

The boys laughed as they read the announcement. 
Rompey looked at his gravely and, concluding that 
Charley wished him to take care of it, wagged his tail 
and looked up at his young master as much as to say : 

ril watch it all right. No one shall take it from 
me.” 

Satan, however, trying to eat hers, and finding it un- 
palatable, remarked: 

“ Nothing to eat here ! ” 

“ Charley,” said the boys, when is this wonderful 
exhibition to come off ? ” 

‘‘ As soon as the janitor fixes the room,” was the 
reply. 

‘‘ Who’s the janitor, Charley? ” 

I am the janitor,” said Charley gravely. 

The fixing of the room consisted in placing two 
chairs on the floor in front of Jack’s bed, and a chair 

358 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


that had been placed in front of Harold’s bed and on 
which he was now sitting. 

‘‘ The entertainment will begin in a few moments,” 
said Charley. ‘‘ The audience is requested to pay es- 
pecial attention to the announcer, so that they may 
better know what is going on.” 

‘‘ Who is the announcer? ” inquired Harold laugh- 
ing. 

I am the announcer,” said Charley seriously. 

You may talk about your lightning-change artists 
in the vaudeville entertainments. Charley could equal 
any of them. For almost immediately the janitor be- 
came the announcer, and Charley appeared clad in the 
cast-off uniform of the captain. It was ragged and not 
altogether too clean, but the bright, animated face that 
shone through it made it all right. Charley gravely 
announced the following : 

The Sweet Warbler will now present to you the 
celebrated Carola from Australia, who will take the 
leading part in a new comic opera written especially 
for this occasion. He will be aided in this work by 
the famous invisible singers, who will take seats on the 
two empty chairs you now see before you.” 

Another quick change of costume and Charley ap- 
peared dressed in a fantastic garb, consisting of a 
drapery formed of the calico prints. He pretended to 
lead into the room the two invisible celebrated singers 
he had referred to, and whom he introduced as the 
New Cook and the Scullion Maid.” 

‘‘ Cook, take a seat on my right, please, and the 

359 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Scullion Maid the seat on my left. The announcer,” 
he said gravely, failed to let you know that the name 
of the new opera is the ‘ Harding Rice Pudding, and 
How it is Made.’ ” 

Then followed a number of ludicrous songs describ- 
ing some of Charley’s troubles in the preparation of the 
first pudding, together with minute instructions to him 
from both the Cook and the Scullion, the former lady 
appearing to be especially anxious about the amount of 
rice used since, she declared, they would suspect her of 
stealing it, while the Scullion’s instructions were not to 
dirty so many pots and things since she would have 
to clean them. 

The curious part about the play was the wonderful 
skill with which Charley was able not only to change 
his voice, but also to make it appear to come from the 
invisible cook or her invisible aid on the two chairs. 
Charley possessed marvelous skill as a ventriloquist, 
so that when he made the invisible figures apparently 
speak or sing, it caused great astonishment on the part 
of Jack, and much amusement to Harold. 

Rompey and Satan appeared somewhat frightened 
at hearing voices they could not see, and on several 
occasions Rompey rushed toward the chairs barking 
and, being unable to see any one there, would come 
back and, shaking his tail, would look up in Harold’s 
face as much as to say: 

I don’t understand it, but since you are apparently 
not frightened I guess it’s all right.” 

When they came to part second on the programme, 
360 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Charley, as announcer, declared that the Australia 
Wizard would now appear in his wonderful character 
of Rambolan, the Hindostanese Magician.” In a 
few moments he reappeared completely naked except 
for a flowing mass of printed calico around his loins. 
His entire body, however, was almost completely cov- 
ered with the suns, moons, stars, comets, and other 
heavenly bodies, together with squares, triangles, and 
circles, which had been transferred from the highly 
colored calico prints before referred to. 

Charley, who possessed great skill at slight of hand, 
was able to make articles appear and disappear in a 
wonderful manner, apparently from and into empty 
space. He called special attention to the fact that he 
had concealed nothing up his sleeves, which indeed 
was evident, considering the nude condition of all his 
body except his loins. He had, however, ingeniously 
employed the covering at his loins to hide the various 
articles when they appeared and disappeared. 

Much of the fun of this part of the programme was 
due to the wonderful changes in the expression of 
Charley’s face. As the various articles rapidly ap- 
peared and disappeared, he made it express surprise, 
astonishment, fear, and amazement. He was so suc- 
cessful in this that he kept Jack and Harold in an al- 
most continuous roar. 

Part three of the entertainment was a display by the 
Australian Wizard of his wonderful educated animals. 
Here both Rompey and Satan performed a number of 
very clever tricks Charley had privately taught them. 

361 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Charley/’ remarked Jack, I had no idea you were 
good at sleight of hand and ventriloquism. How is it 
you never told us about this ? ” 

‘‘ Oh, I never thought it worth while,” he replied. 

Harold, however, knew all about it, but I persuaded 
him to keep quiet, for I wished to see if I could not 
surprise you some day.” 

“ Well,” replied Jack, “ you certainly have surprised 
me, and have given us a splendid entertainment.” 


362 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXVII 

The Bottle on the Beach. Harold and Charley 
TO THE Rescue 

Harold had now been up and around for several days. 
Owing to his general excellent health he was soon able 
to take his full share of the work that, during his sick- 
ness, had fallen on Charley. 

There was one point that had given Jack much un- 
easiness during the time Harold had been confined to 
his bed. Since all the work then fell on Charley, it was, 
of course, impracticable for him to visit either Harding 
Channel or the site of the bonfires on Parker Cliffs. 
There had, therefore, been nearly a whole week during 
which the fires had ceased to burn. The column of 
smoke by day and the pillar of fire by night had no 
longer stood a welcome beacon for their friends, as- 
suming that, perchance, they might be living and 
within sight of two such prominent signals. 

Charley,'' said Jack, one morning after Harold had 
recovered sufficiently to do his share of the work for 
two days, I think you had better go to-morrow to 
Harding Channel and Parker Cliffs and start the fire 
again, and then make a careful examination of the 
beach on the northern shores of the island." 

Shall I take Harold with me ? " inquired Charley. 

363 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ I would almost be afraid to leave you alone, for there 
is no telling what might happen.” 

“ What do you say, Harold ? ” inquired Jack. 

“ I would like very much to go with Charley, but I 
think I had better stay here with you. Jack,” was the 
reply. 

Very well,” said Jack. Charley, you had better 
take Rompey with you. I think he'll help you con- 
siderably in looking around.” 

The arrangements were soon made, and Charley 
starting off in boat No. 13 reached Harding Channel in 
due time. There was so strong a tide running in that 
he had some little trouble in reaching the ocean on the 
northern shore of the channel. The disagreeable odor 
from the decomposing fish had now entirely disap- 
peared. Anchoring the boat Charley soon reached the 
top of the cliffs and started a fire for the day. He then 
laid another fire which he intended to touch off when he 
left on his return to Jackson House. 

It was natural that after lighting the fire for the 
day, Charley should stand for a moment looking over 
the waste of water that lay between him and the place 
where the heavens seemed to touch the ocean on the 
northwest horizon. Somewhere in this direction he 
thought it was possible the absent ones had found a 
temporary shelter on a lonely coral reef. The fire had 
now commenced to burn brightly, so partially quench- 
ing it with water, he stood for a moment watching the 
tall column of smoke as it rose almost perpendicularly 
in the still air. 


364 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


They may be able to see it,” he thought. “ If so, it 
will at least give them the information as to the exact 
direction of Harding Island, and will let them know 
that we are still here. I wonder,” he added, what 
they'll think at the absence of the smoke and fire while 
I was obliged to remain at Jackson House to look after 
Jack and Harold?” He stood a while musing, and 
then turning to Rompey, said : There is nothing more 
for us to do here, Rompey, until we return. Let’s de- 
scend to the ocean and make a search of the coast on 
the northeastern and northern coasts of the island. I 
wonder,” he added to himself, “ what Captain Jack 
thinks ril find there.” 

The wreck of the coral-encrusted brigantine was now 
lying high and dry on the beach, for it was low tide. 
Thinking the opportunity of examining the vessel too 
good to be lost, Charley succeeded in penetrating the 
mass of now dead corals in the neighborhood of the 
forecastle, which he entered. Some of the planks 
forming the roof had been washed away, so that the 
room was well lighted. Nearly everything it had 
originally contained had either been washed away or 
had disappeared long ago. In one corner, however, 
he discovered the coral-encrusted skeleton of a human 
being. It was evidently that of a man, for a single 
boot, remaining on one of his feet, was the only ar- 
ticle of dress that had survived the long time that had 
passed since his death. An open-face watch, how- 
ever, was lying near the right-hand side of the skele- 
ton, where it had apparently fallen when the vest, in 

365 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


which it had probably been placed, had rotted away. 
The watch was covered with a thin but air and water- 
tight coating of coral rock that had preserved it from 
decay. For some reason or other the deposit of coral 
on the glass face was so thin that the hands of the 
watch could be distinctly seen. They had stopped at 
twenty minutes past twelve, probably on the day the 
brigantine was wrecked, so many, many years before. 

Picking up the watch as something to show Jack and 
Harold, Charley proceeded along the northern coast of 
the island. When he had gone quite a distance from 
Parker Cliffs he began to see undoubted signs of the 
absent ones. Here and there, washed up from the sea, 
fragments of the kinds of food he remembered had 
been placed in the boat on which the captain and Hiram 
had been when they disappeared in the storm, were to 
be seen lying on the sand of the beach. There were 
several corks which Charley recognized as being the 
same as those in the bottles of port wine that had been 
placed among the food supplies. 

‘‘ Now I understand,’’ said Charley to himself, 
what Jack hoped I would find. I will take some of 
these things to Jackson House. They have been car- 
ried by the same current that brought to us Harold’s 
cap, the oars, mast, and sail of boat No. 23. When 
Captain Jack, Harold, and I were last on this portion 
of the coast there were no signs of these things. It 
is evident, therefore, that Captain Harding and Hiram 
are somewhere toward the northwest and, moreover, 
were alive long after the storm.” 

366 



Rompey outran the lad, and in a few 
moments returned carrying in his 
mouth an empty but sealed bottle/* 

Page 366 









. ■ ]ji 6 *^ '■'Vi' ■ '■•■■' H . . , , 

-,-,.>ifiW:- V<^...-^y' il, 

* . • . *. * * w *. ; ^ *? 



- T**' ■■ - W<^< ■ • .'■•/ '■■■ '.‘^' 4 fu • 



%i 

% 




’V : \ ^ .- - 

Fr- -: s ■ -^ .- 



4 a 


fi'W**' ’■ • ■ • * V" -/ 


;r.^ 


f ' i-> ., 1 ,. 


?’ 3 ?' vif^ ’ ■ ''• ?■• •‘ •' 

• ^ -:-y *^hr^ '/I* ii"*- "'.4 

1 1 *• » ‘ . ' fm ■" 

^ * * . fc* * * ^ . , ■- '■ . 

w^i. . i . ^ ; r 


^'.v. 

-* • V 


; 4 » 


r» * * * • ♦ ‘ ' I ** 

'Va 


.•v, \*. ^ r 


-.V 




1 ^ %/ 

^ ? V f .i 


1 =“ 

* .r • 


iii ■ ^ •>-> ; .' 

' * V ' 2 *i ' 



•% •' 



. . ,. t-*.' 


'S 




i jj< 


?V^ 4 •'f* ■" .'.7 

V’. . • • 


V* 


>. » 


*» * 



t 4 : 


4 ^ - : 

^ ** 


• 

ft‘ ' 




fi 


-.+ 

♦ 




< • I 


' • iT • 

-■ .t'^ *’i * r.*.- 


<• • 


I 






w ^ -v- • . • I I • i 

p^^*, . t«-’V/<.':'‘/.'‘.,..'’,;v'' ;: ’!.*=' ’''I ji- ■'’■ v’'"'! 

' ' j- ' ,T j 

*>. • :' . .n M^CT J» >C ? 



i 


i 


V!*'. ir*,i£ 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Charley, however, did not stop here, as he intended 
to make a further examination of the coast. When he 
had proceeded for about two miles farther to the west, 
Rompey suddenly began barking in a tone that Charley 
knew meant that he had seen something that pleased 
him, for turning around and looking at Charley as 
if to say: 

Come with me, I want to show you something I see 
beyond us.” 

He ran rapidly further up the coast, followed by 
Charley. Rompey, however, outran the lad, and in a 
few moments returned carrying in his mouth an empty 
but sealed bottle, and placing it at the feet of his young 
master looked up at him and wagged his tail as if to 
say: 

What have you got to say to this ? Am I not a 
clever dog? ” 

Charley did not stint the praises that he gave to 
Rompey, but exclaimed : 

“ Doubtless this contains a letter from the post- 
office of the sea. That it is from the captain and Hiram 
I have no doubt, for I recognize it as one of the bottles 
they had with them. However, there's no use in guess- 
ing. I’ll open the bottle and look.” 

Sure enough the bottle contained a long letter signed 
by the captain and Hiram, saying that they had been 
cast on a small island where they could hardly get 
enough food and water to sustain life, and asking the 
boys, or any one else finding the bottle, to come 
promptly to their aid. But since this letter will be read 

367 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


aloud by Jack as soon as Charley hands it to him, we 
will wait until then to learn its exact contents. 

Charley had read enough to learn that the captain 
and Hiram were in need of instant aid, so he started at 
once on a rapid walk toward Parker Cliffs. Here he 
set fire to the pile of combustibles he hoped would burn 
the greater part of the night, and returning to the boat 
was soon rowing rapidly toward the landing at Jack- 
son House, where he found Harold waiting to receive 
him. 

Have you had any luck?” exclaimed Harold. 

Have you any tidings of the captain and Hiram? ” 

‘‘ I have, indeed,” cried Charley, triumphantly hold- 
ing up the bottle. “ This bottle contains a letter telling 
us all about them. They were still alive when the letter 
was written. They are now in a dangerous position, 
so let’s hurry up, show the letter to Jack and have him 
read it aloud to us.” 

‘‘What’s the matter, Charley?” inquired Jack, as 
soon as the two boys entered the room. “ Did I not 
hear you say you had found in a sealed bottle on the 
shore a letter from the captain and Hiram? Then 
they are still living? ” 

“Yes, Jack,” said Charley; “here is the letter. I 
found it sealed in this bottle lying on the very part of 
the coast you asked me to examine. But read it 
quickly. I have read enough to know that the captain 
and Hiram are in need of instant help. How splendid 
it will be if we can reach them and bring them back 
to Harding Island.” 


368 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Jack took the letter and, opening it, eagerly read the 
following : 

Two and a half days from Harding Island toward the 
northwest. 

My Dear Boys : 

The storm that suddenly separated our boats carried us 
toward the northwest for two and a half days. We tried hard 
to return to the island, but finding it too dangerous con- 
tinued drifting with the wind. 

We have lost all our oars except one. Our mast and sail 
were swept away, and our boat, becoming unmanageable, was 
nearly swamped when we fortunately reached a lonely island 
of only a mile and a half by a mile in extent. Fortunately, 
there is a little water on the island and plenty of fish, so that 
with the provisions we had in the boat we have managed to 
live so far. Our foodstuffs, however, are rapidly decreasing, 
and we are now on rations. Indeed, were it not for turtles’ 
and birds’ eggs, of which there are unfortunately only a few 
on the island, we would now be nearly without food. 

Hiram and I have come to the conclusion that there is a 
strong ocean current setting directly toward Harding Island; 
for we have kept the bearings of that island. I am sending 
this bottled letter in the hope that it may reach you. It is 
now more than a full week since the storm separated our 
boats. 

We are in great danger on this little island. Only a few 
parts of its surface are as high as ten feet above the water. 
Should a storm occur, as may happen at any moment, we 
would probably be swept into the ocean. Come to our aid 
as quickly as possible in boat No. 13. Bring plenty of pro- 
visions and fresh water. God bless you all. 

(Signed) Capt. Arthur Harding, 
Hiram Higgenbotham. 

And then, as if they appreciated the fact that the letter 
might fall into the hands of some vessel, the captain 
gave, as nearly as he could, the latitude and longitude 
y 369 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


of both Harding Island and the lonely islet on which 
they had been cast, stating that two men, one an Eng- 
lishman and the other an American, together with three 
lads, two from England and one from Australia, had 
been cast upon a large coral island. That, during a 
severe storm, the boat containing the two men had been 
blown out to sea, and that they were now in a position 
of great danger on a lonely coral islet. He urged any 
one finding the letter to hasten to the rescue of the men 
as well as to take the boys off the island. As regards 
the position of Harding Island the captain had come to 
the conclusion that it was an island of the Paumotu 
Group, situated in latitude — S., and longitude — W, 
from Greenwich. 

There was much excitement in the sick-room when 
Jack had finished reading : 

‘‘ Hurrah! cried Jack. '' They are, I believe, still 
alive.’’ 

‘‘We will probably find them still alive if we reach 
them as quickly as is possible,” said Charley. 

“ Two days and a half from Harding Island,” 
said Jack, “ our signals could not be seen by them, 
could they ? ” he said to Charley. 

“ Certainly not,” was the reply. 

“ How unfortunate it is,” said Jack, “ that I am bed- 
ridden at such an important time. Charley, don’t you 
think you and Harold could put me in the boat so 
that we could all go to the rescue of the captain and 
Hiram?” 

“ No, Jack, I don’t. You know how badly the boat 
370 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


gets shaken when the waves are high. You would not 
only be taking a great risk in doing this, but would be 
so much in the road that you would hinder rather than 
help us. Of course, we would like to have you with 
us. On such a trip we will need all the advice and help 
we can get. It’s bad enough to be obliged to leave you 
alone, but two and a half days in an open boat is too 
much for me to try without help, so that Harold will 
have to come with me.” 

Never mind leaving me alone,” said Jack, you 
can prepare enough food for me for several days, leav- 
ing it where I can easily get it. Besides,” he said, “ you 
know I can move around a little now by the use of the 
pair of crutches you made me the other day. They are 
not much to look at, but they’ll be a great help now I 
can safely be a little on one foot. Of course,” said 
Jack, ‘‘ you’ll leave Rompey with me. With his aid 
I think I can get along very well.” 

Come, Jack,” said Charley, let’s determine what 
we shall put in the boat so that we can start early to- 
morrow morning. We’ll leave plenty of food and 
water for you, and I think that Rompey will be able to 
take good care of you.” 

Very well, Charley,” said Jack. It’s hard for me 
to remain here and see you and Harold leave on a long 
ocean voyage in an open boat. The desperate condi- 
tion of our friends, however, certainly warrants your 
taking the risk, so get everything ready as soon as pos- 
sible. Nevertheless, take enough time to see that noth- 
ing is left that might be needed.” 

371 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Charley and Harold had everything ready for start- 
ing early the next morning ; for it was not much after 
midday when Charley had returned to Jackson House 
with the sealed letter. Bidding Jack good-bye, and 
telling Rompey to remain to take care of him, they 
pushed the boat off and were soon making good head- 
way for Harding Channel. 

The tide was still running out, so they had no diffi- 
culty in passing through the channel, and were soon 
pulling the boat with a steady stroke toward the north- 
west. At Jack’s suggestion, they had taken in the boat 
the broken masts, together with the materials for new 
sails, as well as the oars they had picked up at sea, and 
had also included such of Hiram’s tools as they thought 
he would need should it be possible to repair boat No. 
23 and bring it back with them. 

It was a long voyage for boys so young to make in 
an open boat. Fortunately, during their entire time 
on the water, the weather was characteristic of that 
wonderful calm that has given the name Pacific to this 
great body of water. There were few or no waves, so 
that they could easily keep the boat steadily moving 
toward the northwest. 

Of course, the boys knew that it would be very easy 
to pass by so small an island. They, therefore, kept a 
constant lookout for it. On the second day, several 
hours before sunset, Charley, turning to his companion, 
remarked : 

‘‘ Harold, I think I can see a dim speck on the 
horizon directly over our bow.” 

372 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Yes, Charley,” said Harold, '' that’s right. I hope 
it’s the island we’re looking for.” 

They rowed the boat steadily toward the dim speck. 
But distances are often extremely deceptive on the 
sea, especially during the remarkably clear weather they 
were then having. Although they rowed straight to- 
ward it, several hours passed before the island began 
to show clearly above the water. At last they came near 
enough to see it. It looked like a mere speck in the 
great deep as, indeed, it was, and appeared to be 
almost surrounded by breakers. As they drew still 
nearer they saw two men they recognized as the cap- 
tain and Hiram, the latter of whom was expressing his 
joy at their appearance by an impromptu dance on the 
sand. 

Island, ahoy ! ” shouted Charley. “ Show us the 
safest landing-place.” 

‘‘ Boat, ahoy ! ” was the reply, and the one they 
recognized as the captain, pointing their boat to the 
right of a line of breakers, shouted : Bring her in 
through that opening. You’ll find deep water there.” 

In a few moments the boat had passed through the 
opening indicated, and had safely landed on a small 
coral beach. In a few moments the two boys were in 
the embraces of the captain and Hiram. 

‘‘ Thank God, boys,” said the captain, you have 
come. We are nearly starved. There was unusually 
high water yesterday, and the island was completely 
covered by water. We can get no fresh water on the 
island, and most of our food was ruined by salt water. 
373 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Had it not been for our boat, that still floats, we should 
have been drowned. What food have you on board ? ” 

“ Plenty of food and fresh water,’’ replied Charley, 
so they were soon breaking their long fast. 

“But where is Jack?” was the question speedily 
asked by the captain. 

Then Charley briefly gave an account of what had 
occurred on Harding Island during the separation, and 
the captain had additional cause to be grateful to Him 
who has even the islands of the sea in his care. 


374 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXVIII 
A Happy Reunion 

When Hiram saw in the boat the broken mast and the 
materials for a new sail, he remarked : 

Onless ye hev brought my tools I kain’t do much 
with them things.” 

But, Hiram,” exclaimed Charley laughing, we 
have brought all the tools we thought you would need. 
Jack was very particular about seeing that this was 
done.” 

“ That’s very clever in Jack and you, my lads,” said 
Hiram. “ Cap’n,” he continued, ‘‘ I reckon I had better 
rig up the mast agin and make a new sail. It’ll help us 
powerful in gittin’ back to the island. What do ye 
say ? ” 

Do so by all means, Hiram,” said the captain. 

What do you call the new island, captain ? ” in- 
quired Charley. 

We have named it Hiram Island,” was the reply. 

Why, Hiram,” said Harold, turning to the grin- 
ning sailor, you’re becoming well known in these 
parts of the world.” 

Yes,” said Hiram, I cal’clate I am becoming 
wery celebrated. What with Hiram Harbor on Hard- 
ing Island, and Hiram Island I hev been done proud, 
indeed.’’’ 


375 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


All joined in helping Hiram rig up the new sail so 
as to leave Hiram Island as soon as possible. They 
were not only anxious about Jack being alone all this 
time, but wished to get off so as to avail themselves of 
the magnificent weather. There was time, however, 
before leaving for the boys to make a brief examination 
of the island. This did not take long, the island was 
so small. But small as it was, it possessed nearly all 
the characteristics of a regular coral island. It’s out- 
lines were those of an irregular flattened circle. It had 
the regular coral sand beach and shore platform facing 
the ocean, but the lagoon was absent. There had 
originally been a lagoon, but long ago it had either 
dried up or had been filled with sand washed or blown 
into it from the ocean. Here and there were a few sand 
hills formed by the wind, but in no place was the land 
much more than ten feet above the level of the ocean. 
The coral beach facing the old lagoon was still to be 
seen. 

The life of the island was limited to a few screw- 
pines growing in the sand and some climbing plants. 
There were no cocoanut palms. Some birds had laid 
their eggs in the sand on the higher portions, but the 
high water of the preceding day, that had so nearly 
been disastrous to the captain and Hiram, had driven 
them away, and they left the island, flying toward the 
southeast. Most probably, as the captain remarked, 
toward Harding Island. 

As soon as the mast and sail had been rigged up, 
they transferred the supply of food and fresh water 

376 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


from boat No. 13, and all getting in, set out for Hard- 
ing Island with boat No. 13 towed after them. 

They met with nothing of especial interest on their 
return. Not only had Charley kept in mind the direc- 
tion of Harding Island, but both the captain and Hiram 
had done the same thing. In due time they not only 
sighted the island, but at last brought both boats to 
Landing No. 2 at Jackson House. 

Although Jack was, of course, unable to receive 
them, Rompey was present to do the honors for Jack- 
son House. The poor dog was nearly crazy with de- 
light at seeing them again, and ran rapidly from one to 
another, licking their hands and faces and endeavoring 
by wonderful tail shakings to tell them how glad he was 
to welcome them back. 

Harold,” said the captain, you and Charley had 
better run to the house and let Jack hear the good 
news. He can hear the way Rompey is going on, and 
will be anxious to know whether we are all safe.” 

As the two boys ran rapidly to Jackson House, 
Charley said : 

We’ll call out to Jack that the captain and Hiram 
are both with us, or else when he sees only us he will 
think we have returned alone, and have therefore been 
unfortunate in our search.” 

Running up the stairs of Jackson House they burst 
into Jack’s room, crying out: 

‘‘ Hurrah, Jack! We’ve brought them both back in 
good health. They will be here now in a few minutes, 
as soon as they secure the boats.” 

377 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ Thank God,” said Jack. “ I knew you had re- 
turned from the way Rompey went on; but when I 
heard the footsteps of only two of you I feared you 
were bringing bad news.” 

In a few moments the captain and Hiram burst into 
the room. Jack threw himself into the arms of the 
captain, while Hiram, awaiting his turn, was also soon 
heartily embracing the lad. 

“ Now, Uncle Arthur,” exclaimed Harold, as soon 
as the embraces were over and a hurried explanation 
as to what had happened to each of them during their 
separation, won’t you please look at Jack’s ankle? 
We are anxious to know whether it has been properly 
treated.” 

Tell me just what has been done for it. Jack. The 
boys have already told me how the accident occurred.” 

When they were through, the captain said : 

It sounds all right. Jack, as far as the treatment 
goes, but let me see whether you have succeeded in get- 
ting the ankle straight, with all the bones and ligaments 
in their proper places.” 

The three boys, as well as Hiram, anxiously scanned 
the captain’s face when he made a careful examination. 

‘‘ It’s all right,” he exclaimed. I don’t think you’ll 
have any trouble from it. Indeed, it looks in such good 
condition that I think, before long, you’ll be able to 
begin walking on it again.” 

“ Hurrah ! ” cried the boys. ‘‘ That’s the best news 
we have had since we saw you and Hiram on Hiram 
Island.” 


378 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


Charley, who had been hanging affectionately 
around the captain, said : 

‘‘ I say, captain, you and Hiram can hardly believe 
how greatly we missed you. It seemed so odd to have 
no one to whom to go for advice when we were in 
trouble, especially to have no one to whom to tell our 
little successes and discoveries. It seemed just as if 
the bottom had dropped out of everything when we 
brought the boat back to Harding Island on the day of 
the storm. And then when Harold was taken sick with 
the fever we hardly knew what to do. We took from 
the library the medical book that tells about sickness 
and methods of treatment. It was plain sailing when 
we read up about ankles, because ankles are ankles; 
there's no getting mixed up with them. But when we 
came to read up about fevers, we found that fevers 
were the worst conundrums we had yet struck. In- 
deed, even the book itself did not appear to be able to 
tell one kind of fever from another until the fever was 
well developed, so we were at our wits' ends and, not 
knowing what to do, concluded it would be safer to do 
nothing, so we gave Harold the simple remedies you 
gave us the few times we were not feeling well." 

‘‘And you were very wise in doing so," said the 
captain. 

“ I imagine you are right, captain," said Charley, 
“ but suppose we had made a mistake. But it don't 
make any difference now," he said, hugging the cap- 
tain, “ we've got you back again ; so if one of us gets 
sick now we may be sure of the proper treatment." 
379 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


‘‘ What kind of fever did you conclude Harold 
had ? ” inquired the captain. I suppose you must 
have formed some idea or other/’ 

I should think they did,” exclaimed Harold. “ I 
was only sick a few days, and when I got well I was so 
hungry that I could eat almost anything. I believe 
I could have eaten some of that horrible sea-slug you 
cured and smoked, and which none of us have been able 
to eat, but Jack said I might have had typhoid fever, 
so he kept feeding me on what he called ‘ soft food.’ ” 

Well,” said the captain, I don’t think that Jack 
was so wrong; although, as I understand it, typhoid 
fever is a disease that takes full six weeks to run.” 

I thought, sir,” said Jack apologetically, “ that 
probably Harold might have had what is known as 
walking typhoid fever.” 

Never mind. Jack,” said the captain, you acted 
cautiously, and therefore properly. Hiram,” he said in 
a laughing tone, turning to the boatswain, ‘‘ I guess we 
can trust the boys to take care of themselves, don’t you 
think so ? ” 

I reckon they’re all right for sartin,” replied Hi- 
ram grinning. They’re wery intelligent lads. I’ll 
alius back ’em to take proper care of themselves.” And 
then turning to the lads, he said : I say, boys, how did 
ye make out for cooking? Did ye have any trouble in 
preparing stuff for the table ? All the cooking must hev 
fallen on Charley when both the others were a-bed.” 

This remark, of course, led to the narration of 
Charley’s first wonderful rice pudding, and the awful 
3S0 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


swelling of the rice. After they had all enjoyed a 
hearty laugh, Charley, turning to the captain, said : 

“ Captain, I know you and Hiram are ready for a 
first-class meal. Hiram, come with me to the kitchen, 
and ril help you to prepare a regular feast in honor of 
the day. I want to show you the advance I have made 
in cooking since that first rice pudding.” 

As they were leaving, the captain said : 

It won’t be much more trouble, so while you are 
cooking ril bring an extra table to the room. We can 
then have the meal here in Jack’s room. It will be 
less lonely for him than if we eat it downstairs.” 

That meal may not have been at all wonderful from a 
culinary point of view, although the food was both ex- 
cellent and well prepared. But I very much doubt 
whether a meal has ever been eaten with a greater ap- 
petite and more pleasure than that memorable feast in 
the room that Jack had been occupying. Every one at 
the table had a splendid appetite, and then too, all 
their troubles, doubts, and perplexities had disap- 
peared, so that they ate with an appetite as great, if 
not greater, than any meal they had ever eaten on 
Harding Island. And this is saying a great deal. 

There was so much talk, after eating, that they 
sat a long time not only in asking and answering 
the questions as to what had occurred to the two boats 
during the storm as well as afterward. Indeed, it was 
nearly midnight when the captain said to the boys : 

"‘We had better have our regular Bible reading, 
boys, and then turn in. It is now quite late and there 

381 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


is much to do to-morrow. Of course, you have been 
unable for more than a week now to look after Maddox 
Clearing, and this we must do the first thing in the 
morning.” 

The captain’s selection was the Twenty-third Psalm, 
The Lord is my shepherd, I shall not want.” It was 
an especially appropriate selection considering the 
many tribulations through which they had passed and 
their present happy condition. When he came to the 
fourth verse, and read: Yea, though I walk through 
the valley of the shadow of death, I will fear no evil, 
for thou art with me,” they felt that the Lord, indeed, 
had been with them to deliver them from all their trou- 
bles, and when the fifth verse was read, Thou pre- 
parest a table before me in the presence of mine ene- 
mies,” they looked significantly at the remains of the 
good things that had been so abundantly placed on the 
table. 

After a brief prayer, in which the captain returned 
heartfelt thanks to the Shepherd for the manner in 
which he had carried them through their troubles, they 
turned in for the night. 

Before going to sleep, Charley said to Harold : 

Harold, I don’t ever remember having had so 
splendid a day since I was taken out of the open boat 
when I was so near joining my former companions in 
death, and I have had many splendid days both while 
on the derelict brig and on Harding Island. 

“ It’s the same with me, Charley,” said Harold, “ I 
never remember such a splendid day.” 

382 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXIX 
The War Canoe 

The next few days were spent at Maddox Clearing 
harvesting their crops, some of which were stored in 
the attic at that place, but by far the greater amount 
was taken to Jackson House, and kept either in the 
attic or in some of the unused rooms. When this work 
was done, and an examination made of the entire 
island, there was plenty of spare time during which, 
it is unnecessary to say, the younger boys and, indeed 
for the matter of that, all of them had many splendid 
baths in the swimming-pool. Indeed, the spare time 
at the end of the harvest was spent largely by the boys 
in excursions in boat No. 13 on the principal lagoon, 
as well as in The Chums on the lagoon of Twin Island 
No. I. During many of these excursions the captain 
and Jack, and sometimes Hiram, were present, but the 
greater part of the time Jack spent with the captain 
preparing the manuscript of the great book on the 
“ Physical Geography of the Sea,” while Hiram was 
busy in one or another of the many things that 
claimed his attention. And such times Harold and 
Charley spent together boating, fishing, swimming, 
and walking. 

As soon as they could find the time they removed 
the coral-encrusted skeleton of the man from the fore- 

383 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


castle of the brigantine and buried it alongside of Mad- 
dox near the Maddox Clearing, the captain reading the 
Episcopal burial service. Afterward they erected a 
cross on the grave, simply cutting thereon the fact that 
it marked the grave of the remains of a man taken 
from the wreck of the vessel of which Maddox had 
been captain. 

Among other things the two lads especially liked 
to do, while away on these excursions, was to visit the 
coral-encrusted brigantine that, as before mentioned, 
was now high and dry on the beach at Parker Cliffs 
facing the ocean. They had cleaned the encrusted 
coral from the top of the table in the cabin, as well as 
from the floor, had covered the table with one of the 
many-colored blankets, and had spread another blanket 
on a part of the floor. Since the sunlight could shine 
full and clear in the room, it formed a pleasant retreat 
during the hotter hours of the day, so that they liked 
to retire to it to talk, tell stories, or to make entries in a 
little journal they had commenced, possibly in imita- 
tion of what Jack and the captain had been doing. 
This journal or diary was entitled, “ Our Adventures 
on Harding Island.” It was a remarkable production, 
containing much more imagination than would proba- 
bly have been expected by those who have never taken 
the trouble to study the characteristics of boys about 
the age of Harold and Charley. The English may 
not have been elegant, but interesting facts were there 
and were well put. And since this work kept the boys 
busy, and tended to improve their English, it formed 

384 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


a very pleasant and profitable way of spending a few 
of the warm hours of the day. They called this place 

Brigantine House,” and always kept a supply of pen- 
cils and paper for the work. Charley, who, as has 
already been stated, had a remarkable gift for draw- 
ing, had illustrated the journal with numerous ludi- 
crous sketches depicting their adventures or experi- 
ences. They were now busily engaged in describing the 
many things that had happened to them not only dur- 
ing the storm, but during their great and adventurous 
voyage to the northeast, when they had rescued the 
captain and Hiram. 

I fancy I hear some one, on reading about this re- 
sort of the boys, say: 

What in the world can healthy boys find in such an 
uncomfortable place as the cabin of a wrecked brigan- 
tine, when there were so many better places in the open 
air, or in either of the houses at Maddox Clearing or at 
Jackson Landing?” 

But I am sure no healthy boy will be among these 
critics. Such boys know full well the fun that can be 
obtained from the ability of being in curious and out- 
of-the-way places. As all boys know, there is a great 
pleasure connected with such surroundings. Our boys, 
therefore, keenly enjoyed remaining in a place in which 
so many curious things had probably happened; for, 
being imaginative, as indeed nearly all healthy, grow- 
ing boys are, they took pleasure in picturing to 
themselves the many strange things that might have 
taken place in that cabin more than a hundred years 
z 385 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


before, when it had been occupied by Captain Maddox 
and other officers of the pearl-hunting brigantine. 

Besides, if any of my readers suppose that the cabin 
was a dirty, damp, disagreeable place, they are very 
much mistaken. The bright sunlight, as well as the 
dry air that now could freely enter it, had long ago 
driven out all traces of mustiness. So far from the 
interior being dark and gloomy, a flood of sunlight 
entered through the open doorway and port holes, and 
being flung back from the white surfaces of the en- 
crusting coral, illumined the interior of the cabin so as 
to make it resemble a fairy palace such as might have 
been the abode of the mermaids at the bottom of some 
great ocean. 

It was in this manner that the three boys and the 
two men passed the four weeks on the island after the 
return of the captain and Hiram. They were indeed 
four happy weeks — happier by far than any they had 
previously known on the island. They had now again 
fallen into their usual employments, so that the days 
passed rapidly, without any dragging of time. Among 
other things, Hiram had made them all new suits of 
underwear from the highly colored cotton prints. 
While Jack was acting as amanuensis for the captain, 
the latter was giving Jack a course of instruction in 
navigation in which he was making considerable prog- 
ress. 

Charley and Harold had discovered an ocean- 
grotto near the boat-landing on the northern shore of 
Harding Channel at the end nearest the lagoon. They 
386 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


had explored it for a short distance into the cliffs. It 
was by no means so extensive as the great grotto, the 
sudden destruction of which during the earthquake 
shock had resulted in the formation of Harding Chan- 
nel. It extended, however, sufficiently into the cliffs 
to serve as an admirable hiding-place for the boat, 
so that no one passing through Harding Channel 
would be able to see it. 

But now a great calamity was about to overtake 
them. A calamity far more serious than any they had 
previously experienced. 

About one month after the return of the captain and 
Hiram to the island, Harold and Charley had left Jack- 
son House early in the morning in order to finish some 
work at Maddox Clearing before the heat of the day, 
for the balance of the day was theirs, and they wanted 
to make the most of it. The evening before they left, 
Hiram had brought each of them a new suit of under- 
clothes he had prepared from the highly colored cotton 
prints. They had put these on, giving Hiram their 
other clothes, which he had promised to wash and 
bleach. With a view of transferring some of the 
colored designs to their journal, in the manner of the 
decalcomania pictures that are known to most boys, 
Charley had placed a lot of cuttings of the prints in one 
of his pockets. 

As soon as the boys had finished their work at the 
clearing they visited the swimming-pool. On remov- 
ing their clothes they found, as on previous occasions, 

387 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


that their bodies had been covered with the colored 
designs on the printed calico. This time, however, 
the transferrence had been wonderfully well done. The 
conditions of moisture and warmth were just such 
as to ensure the transferrence of the patterns in such 
a manner as to prevent running. The bodies of both 
lads were therefore covered with a wonderful combi- 
nation of highly colored moons, suns, stars, comets, 
and other hieroglyphics. One might, indeed, easily 
imagine they were not ordinary boys, but powerful 
magicians or necromancers. 

They tried to rub the marks ofY, but the water only 
fixed them more firmly to the skin. This didn’t worry 
them, so after their swim they put on their clothes and, 
leaving the boat at the hiding-place in the grotto, 
walked along the northern shore of the channel toward 
the ocean, were soon in the cabin of the brigantine, 
where they had a jolly time entering notes in their 
journal, in chatting, telling stories, and singing. 

As has already been remarked, both boys had well- 
trained voices. Charley had a pure soprano and 
Harold an alto, and since both had sung in church 
choirs at their homes, and had been well trained, their 
voices blended admirably, so that their songs were 
pleasant to listen to. Indeed, it had become a custom 
at Jackson House before retiring to have the lads sing, 
especially such songs as Jack and the captain and 
Hiram could join in; the captain with a bass voice and 
Jack with a baritone. 

The boys had just finished singing when Charley, 

388 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


who had been looking out of a port hole which gave 
him a view of the ocean to the northeast, cried out in 
alarm to Harold: 

“ Good gracious, Harold, I see a canoe filled with 
dark-skinned men coming rapidly this way.” 

Looking in the direction indicated, Harold saw a 
long canoe containing a dozen dark-colored men, half 
of whom' were paddling. As Charley had said, the 
canoe was rapidly approaching the brigantine. The 
men had evidently seen it from a distance, and were 
coming to make a closer examination in the hope of 
finding something of value. 

“ What kind of canoe is that ? ” exclaimed Harold. 

“ Why, don’t you remember what Mr. Maddox said 
in the letter we found in the box in his hand ? ” 

‘‘ Oh, yes,” answered Harold, “ I remember now. 
That’s a war canoe. I remember he spoke about a 
war canoe. What shall we do, Charley ? ” exclaimed 
Harold. 

Let’s steal off the brigantine on the side away 
from them and make our way to the grotto, where we 
will hide and wait till they leave. I guess I’ll take these 
pads of writing paper with me and this pencil,” said 
Charley, going into his pockets, “ they may come 
handy.” It may be mentioned that Charley generally 
had a number of small writing-pads in his pockets, to- 
gether with pencils. He used them for rough sketches, 
and had, of course, obtained them on the brig. 

There v as no trouble in the boys’ leaving the brigan- 
tine on the side away from the approaching canoe 

389 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


without being seen, but it was quite another thing to 
pass unobserved over the flat land of the beach. It is 
true they tried to do this by crouching near the ground, 
but before they had gone far they were detected by the 
men in the canoe that was now rapidly approaching 
the beach. Not waiting for the boat to land, several 
of the almost naked savages jumped into the water 
and, reaching the land, ran rapidly toward the boys, 
seizing them, and binding their hands together back of 
them with a coarse rope made of cocoanut fiber. They 
said something to the boys, but it was in a language the 
boys could not understand. The boys on their part 
were also unsuccessful in making them understand 
what they said. 

After some difficulty the canoe safely landed in the 
new channel near the ocean. One of the men, who was 
evidently a chief, commenced to make signs. Charley, 
who at once concluded that it was the best policy not 
to resist the men — for, of course, two boys could do 
nothing against twelve men — pretended to regard the 
whole matter as a joke, and looked laughingly at them. 

The chief and, indeed, most of the men appeared to 
be much pleased with the apparent bravery of the two 
boys, for Charley had at once advised Harold to do 
exactly what he was doing. 

“ We can’t get away from these men now,” he said, 
but we may fool them and persuade them afterward 
to untie our hands. We will then be able to get away 
and hide somewhere in the grotto. Let’s try to under- 
stand what that man, who I think is the chief, is trying 

390 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


to ask us.” And then approaching the chief with a 
smiling face, and looking him straight in the face, he 
raised his eyebrows, as much as if to say to the man : 

“ What is it you want ? ” 

The chief appeared instantly to understand the lad’s 
query, and began making signs to indicate that they 
were looking for drinking water; for placing some 
ocean water in his hand he raised it to his lips pretend- 
ing to drink, and then spitting indicated that the water 
was not fit to drink. He then walked a short distance 
along the coast and pretending to dip his hand into a 
pool of water raised it to his lips, smacked them as if 
satisfied with the taste and, looking at Charley, he 
raised his eyebrows as much as to say : 

Can you show me where I can find some ? ” 

Charley, who was quick-witted, had no difficulty in 
understanding, so nodding his head, as much as to 
say, I will show you,” turned so as to bring his tied 
hands near the hands of the chief, thus indicating that 
he could show him better if his hands were untied. 
And when this was done he pointed to Harold’s. 

The chief appeared to be much tickled by this action 
of the young boy, and said something to his men, who 
laughed in a manner that seemed to show that both 
lads were beginning to make friends with their captors. 

As soon as the hands of the boys had been freed, 
Charley and Harold, beckoning to the chief, proceeded 
to a part of the coast toward the north, where a strong 
spring of good, cool, fresh water was pouring out of 
an opening in the limestone cliff. 

391 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


The chief tasted the water, and said something to 
the boys that they understood as being thanks for what 
they had shown them. Then calling to some of the 
men in the boat they brought water vessels, and filling 
them with enough water to last the crew for three or 
four days, took them back to the boat. 

But the chief still wanted something more. Turn- 
ing to the boat he made signs to Charley that they were 
hard up for food; for moving his mouth, as if eating, 
he would turn to the boat and try to show by the nod- 
ding of his head that there was nothing there, and 
then turning to Charley he would point to the island 
as much as to say: 

What can we find to eat here? ” 

Charley at once understood the chief, and beckoning 
him to follow, led the chief, accompanied by five men, 
to a grove of cocoanut trees about a mile from where 
they had landed. Standing at the foot of two of the 
largest trees the boys made signs to the chief as to 
whether they wished them to climb the trees and 
throw the cocoanuts to them. The men laughed as the 
chief nodded his head indicating yes, and the two boys 
shinning up the trees like monkeys soon threw down 
as many cocoanuts as all of the men could carry to the 
boat, and then came down. This good-natured will- 
ingness of the boys to do what had been asked of them 
again greatly pleased the chief ; for, making no effort 
again to bind their hands, he beckoned them to follow 
him to the boat, which was soon laden with the cocoa- 
nuts. 


392 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


It was evident that the men did not intend to make 
an extended examination of the island. As the boys 
learned afterward they had been on one of the preda- 
tory expeditions so common in these parts of the world. 
They had only approached the island, which was ap- 
parently new to them, for the purpose of looking for 
water and food to last until their return to their own 
island. On seeing the coral-encrusted wreck of the 
brigantine, they had landed on this part of the coast 
in order to see if it contained anything of value. 

Before leaving, however, the chief again began to 
make signs to Charley, and pointing to the channel 
was evidently desirous of knowing how deep the water 
was and whether their canoe could safely pass through 
it into the lagoon. Fearing that should the canoe 
take the northern shore of the channel their boat might 
be seen, Charley pointed to the southern shore, and 
indicated by signs that the water was deep enough. He 
had difficulty, however, in making himself understood, 
so taking one of the paper pads from his pocket he 
rapidly made a sketch of the island, of the Harding 
Channel, and of the canoe, which he represented as 
floating in the water on the western coast, and then 
drawing an irregular line underneath this canoe, to in- 
dicate a rough bottom, he showed that the distance 
from the bottom of the canoe to the bottom of the 
channel was many times the height of the canoe. 

The chief instantly understood the drawings, and 
then, again patting the boy on the back, he said some- 
thing that appeared to meet the approval of the men, 
393 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


for they all commenced murmuring. They examined 
the drawing as though they believed that Charley was 
a very unusual specimen of a boy, which indeed was 
true, for he was much brighter than the average civil- 
ized boy, and therefore must have been almost im- 
measurably brighter than any of their own lads. The 
chief was so much pleased with the sketch that he 
kept it. 

Leaving Charley and Harold in the care of two men 
the chief entered the canoe with the remaining men and 
rapidly passed along the southern shore of Harding 
Channel and entered the lagoon. In the meanwhile, the 
two men with whom the boys had been left sauntered 
off slowly toward the brigantine, evidently with a view 
of examining it during the absence of the others. 


394 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


CHAPTER XXX 
In Captivity 

It must not be forgotten that Rompey, who almost 
invariably accompanied the boys in their excursions, 
was with them when they were captured and their 
hands bound back of them. While this was being done 
Rompey had threatened to bite the men, growling fe- 
rociously and rushing at them. The men, however, 
appeared to regard this as a huge joke, for such a 
comparatively small animal to fly against men armed 
with huge spears. So they tried to kill the dog. 
Rompey, however, was too quick for them, and always 
escaped. Standing just a little distance beyond them, 
he continued barking. The chief now said something 
to one of the men, evidently telling him to kill the 
animal, for the man hurled his spear at the dog, who 
happily escaped it. Rompey ran away but did not 
desert the boys, for he remained in full sight of them. 

When the men who had been left with Charley and 
Harold went to the brigantine, they pointed to the 
lads telling them to wait for them and, appearing to 
doubt that they would do this, bound them to a part of 
the old rudder. Fortunately, the binding was not very 
tight, so that Charley succeeded in loosing his right 
hand, and drawing a sheet of paper and lead pencil 
395 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


from his pocket, hurriedly scribbled on it the following 
note. 

‘‘ A war canoe has landed on the island near the 
brigantine. Harold and I saw them coming while in 
the cabin. They have taken us prisoners and bound 
our hands. I have endeavored to gain their good will 
by showing them where to get fresh water and cocoa- 
nuts. I think they intend taking us away in the canoe. 
Am sending this by Rompey.” 

As soon as the men disappeared, Rompey ran rapidly 
toward them and tried to tear the bindings loose with 
his teeth, but was unable to do so. Charley quickly 
tied the note under Rompey’s collar, and then said to 
the dog : 

‘‘ Go to the captain, Rompey. Go find the captain.” 

The animal appeared unwilling to leave the boys 
and again began to tear at the cocoanut rope that bound 
them but, hearing the men returning, ChaMey again 
bade him seek the captain. So jumping up at the boys 
and licking their faces affectionately, the dog set off 
at a rapid gait along the northern coast of the island, 
evidently bound for Jackson House. 

The war canoe returned in about half an hour. The 
men had apparently seen nothing in the lagoon to at- 
tract their attention. They had not made a careful ex- 
amination or else they would have seen the flagpoles 
at the landing-places. 

The chief, who did not seem to be in a hurry, spent 
a considerable time in the careful examination of the 
brigantine. It was clear that the natives were ac- 

396 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


quainted with wrecks, and had confidently expected to 
be able to take from this things of value. They failed, 
however, after an extended examination to find any- 
thing that struck their fancy with the exception of the 
highly colored blankets employed for covering the 
table and the floor of the room. The chief ha^ already 
cut a hole in the middle of the blanket employed for 
covering the table and, thrusting his head through it, 
was marching around as proud as a turkey cock. The 
other blanket from the floor had been divided into four 
equal parts that were similarly, though less conspicu- 
ously, adorning four other men who appeared to be 
next in authority to the chief. 

The savages then prepared a meal consisting of dried 
fish they had brought with them and the fruit of the 
cocoanut. It was several hours from the time that they 
had landed on the island before they motioned the two 
boys to accompany them to the canoe and, pushing 
off, were soon moving rapidly toward the northeast. 

The lines on which the boat was built were excellent. 
The men were strong and vigorous and, since six of 
them paddled, the speed with which the boat moved 
was much greater than anything the captain and Hiram 
had been able to get out of any of the boats on Hard- 
ing Island. 

Though Charley said nothing, yet he carefully 
scanned the island as its distant shores were becoming 
more and more indistinct from the boats. At last, to 
his great joy, he could faintly see in the distance three 
people running rapidly along the southern coast of the 
397 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


island. He recognized them as the captain, Hiram, and 
Jack. 

That’s good anyhow,” he whispered to Harold, 

they’ll at least know in which direction we have been 
' carried.” 

But leaving the canoe moving rapidly toward the 
northeast, let us return to Jackson House. Jack and the 
captain had been spending an extremely pleasant day. 
Jack had completed his work as an amanuensis, atid 
the captain was giving him another lesson in sea- 
manship. 

It was evident Jack had been making satisfactory 
progress, for the captain seemed greatly pleased with 
an answer he gave to a question put. At this moment 
both stopped talking and looked at each other with no 
little alarm; for both distinctly heard Rompey’s light 
footsteps running toward the house unaccompanied by 
the boys. 

“What can be the matter. Jack?” exclaimed the 
captain. “ Rompey all alone ! Where are the boys ? I 
fear something has happened to them.” 

“ I never knew Rompey to come home alone when 
he had started out with the boys,” said Jack. 

At this moment Rompey came running into the 
room. He was greatly excited and ran immediately to 
the captain and, looking him earnestly in the face, be- 
gan whimpering as if trying to call his attention to 
something. 

“What’s the matter, Rompey?” inquired the cap- 
tain, “ where are Charley and Harold ? ” 

398 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


At this the dog began barking louder than ever and, 
at the same time, rubbed his neck against the captain’s 
hand as if trying to call his attention to the note 
Charley had attached to his collar. 

See, captain,” said Jack, “ Rompey has brought a 
note.” 

The captain had seen the note even before Jack had 
commenced to talk. Removing it from Rompey’s col- 
lar, he hurriedly read Charley’s hastily scribbled com- 
munication. 

It is as I feared. Jack,” said the captain, Charley 
and Harold have been taken prisoners by savages who 
have landed on the island in a canoe. Listen,” and 
with that he read the note, the contents of which have 
already been given in the previous chapter. 

Can we do anything? ” inquired Jack of the cap- 
tain. 

We will try to rescue them. But run quickly and 
bring Hiram here to talk the matter over. I think I 
heard him outside the house a few moments ago.” 

When Hiram entered the room with Jack, as he did 
a few moments afterward, Jack, of course, had told him 
the terrible news. Hiram appeared even more alarmed 
than the captain; for he knew the danger of being 
taken captive by some of the savages of that part of 
the world, especially when they were on a war expedi- 
tion. 

Where were the lads when they wuz took, cap- 
tain ? ” inquired Hiram. ‘‘ On what part of the island 
did the canoe land ? ” 


399 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


The boys were in the brigantine. They tried to 
escape, but were taken prisoners. Listen to the note 
Charley sent by Rompey.’^ 

As the captain read the note, Hiram’s face showed 
growing fear. 

That’s sounds wery bad, captain,” he remarked ; 
and then seeing that the captain thoroughly shared his 
fears, and being desirous of comforting both the cap- 
tain and Jack, he added: But don’t give up. Ef we 
put our wits against the wits of them savages we ought 
to be able to beat them.” 

“ That’s right, Hiram,” said the captain, who had 
in the meanwhile been thrusting a pair of revolvers in 
his belt and taking a rifle. Let’s get off. Jack, take 
pistols and a rifle with you. Hiram, do the same 
thing.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said Hiram, “ and I’ll take this cutlass with 
me. I feel more at home with a cutlass than I do with 
them shooters.” 

What will be our quickest way to the southeastern 
coast? ” said the captain. 

“ Boat No. 23 is at the landing,” said Jack. ‘‘ We 
can row there much faster than we can run.” 

They hurried to the boat, but before starting took the 
precaution of placing additional food and water in it, 
and rowed it rapidly toward Harding Channel. 

The distance between Jackson House and Harding 
Channel had probably never been covered by them in 
shorter time than was made by boat No. 23 on this 
memorable occasion. The boat fairly flew through the 
400 



" They . . . were just able to see a tiny 
speck moving rapidly from the island.” 

Page 400 







^ ^ I i*^ .^.yi * 3'- .>.% 

‘ . •* ‘ ' Jl>^’ 

M ^ -J« ^ ^"Q^RJ « * • ♦ «. * • . r • "^i i’* •‘•' 

.•■ '■ .5':-*->f-' 







:!>^gb|yj|l' r- ^ 


fc' ■ ■■':te'.--^-iiS'''^ 

f '‘rii-'' ^ ' '"■ r. '■ • ■■■ ■ ■ . 


'H 

•• ■ 


■ ;• ■ -V' • “ ' ;• *'■■ .^^"4; 'V^# 

■ i** c it" '* ■'■ •' ■ ‘ w Vffl^ 





. > K^Ku9 

'■ \- . '' 

■ . : WJ j 




^ r|fc 

.>H« 

. 9 ^ ', .i-^. 


•,*•’• vv 


^ ** ' -i-' * =* A il. j I ^ 

'^*■1 ' - - ;• ■ ' Jtf .V :W ■ 

'i\ ’-^‘> ■; - 5= : .....V *f 



WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


water, and the water of the lagoon being at that time 
almost as smooth as a mirror, they made magnificent 
time, and were soon at the eastern side of the island. 
Running down the beach toward the southeast they 
looked across the waters toward the southwest and 
were just able to see a tiny speck moving rapidly from 
the island. 

“ I reckon that be them,” said Hiram, pointing to the 
distant object. 

The captain who, of course, had his glasses with him, 
focused them on the tiny speck, and looking for a few 
moments, said: 

‘‘ Yes, Hiram, I can see the boys quite distinctly.” 

Do they look skeert, captain ? ” anxiously inquired 
Hiram. 

“ Not a bit of it,” remarked the captain. “ As well 
as I can see from their faces, one would think they were 
merely going on a rowing excursion. What are those 
colored things some of the men are wearing ? Oh, I see 
now,” he added, it’s some of our blankets. I wonder 
whether they have been up to Maddox House.” 

‘‘ Captain,” said Jack, “ the boys had two blankets 
in the cabin of the coral-encrusted brigantine, one on 
the table as a cover, and the other on the floor. Don’t 
you remember you gave them two for that purpose ? ” 
Yes,” said the captain, ‘‘ I remember now.” 

Cap’n,” said Hiram, I’m wery glad to learn that 
the boys don’t appear skeert, for them savages’ll be 
more apt to treat them well if they stand up boldlike. 
How many men are there in the boat ? ” 

401 


2A 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


As far as I can see there are only twelve men.” 

“ Then, if we can come up to them, we might man- 
age to take the boys from them.” 

Yes,” said the captain, ‘‘ if we should come up to 
them, but take the glasses and look for yourself. In 
the first place they are too far off for us to be able to 
reach them and, moreover, as you can see, they have 
six paddles and are carrying the canoe at a very much 
more rapid gait than anything we are able to do with 
boat No. 23.” 

“ Nevertheless, captain,” said Jack anxiously, ‘‘ we 
will surely go after them, won’t we? ” 

‘‘Yes, Jack,” was the reply; “ we will certainly go 
after them. But let’s watch them for a few moments 
longer to see if they change their direction.” 

As they watched they saw that the course of the 
canoe was not changed, but that it was still rapidly 
moving toward the northeast. At last it disappeared 
below the horizon. 

“ Come,” said the captain, “ let’s pull the boat the 
other side of the channel and hurry to the top of the hill 
at Parker Cliffs where we can watch the distant canoe, 
,^and be sure that it does not change its direction:” 

■ It took some time for them to do this, but when they 
reached the top of the hill the captain was soon again 
able to see that the canoe had not yet changed its direc- 
tion. 

As the captain was scanning the distant boat, he sud- 
denly exclaimed in an excited tone : 

“ Five other canoes have joined the one that is carry- 
402 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ing off our boys. They evidently belong to the same 
party, for they are not fighting but are still going to- 
v^ard the northeast. The canoe containing the boys 
is evidently not commanded by the chief of the party, 
for it is follov^ing, and not leading the other canoes.” 

'' Do you think there is any danger of the savages 
killing the boys, captain? ” inquired Jack eagerly. 

‘‘ What do you think of that, Hiram ? ” said the cap- 
tain, apparently unwilling to answer Jack directly. 

‘‘ I s’pose, my lad,” said Hiram, “ you want to know 
the truth ? ” 

Yes, Hiram,” said Jack, tell me what you really 
think.” 

“ Then,” said Hiram, I must say that Fm afeerd 
there is much danger. Ef course it all depends on who 
the men be. There be so many kinds of people in these 
here waters thet ef the men in the canoes come from 
some of the islands the boys would be ez safe ez they 
would be with us. But then agin there be others, and 
some of ’em are cannibals, thet might probably eat the 
youngsters.” 

Oh, that would be horrible,” said Jack, ‘‘ let’s hurry 
after them.” 

All in good time,” said the captain. ‘‘ This is 
something we must do intelligently. The boat is not 
sufficiently loaded with food and water to go the great 
distance it will probably be required to do before reach- 
ing the island to which our boys are evidently being 
taken.” 

“ Now, Master Jack,” said Hiram, seeing how anx- 

403 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


ious the boy was, let me tell ye this. What the cap’n 
told us about Master Charley and Harold looking as 
though they weren’t skeert like gives me great hopes 
that the youngsters will get through this trouble all 
right. Them boys be wery bright, especially Master 
Charley, and I shouldn’t wonder that he had concluded 
to try to win the savages over to him, and as I and you 
know, cap’n,” he continued, with a sad smile, ‘‘ the lad 
is oncommonly strong in that line.” 

“ Hiram’s right, Jack,” said the captain. “ The boys 
appear to have taken the best way of ensuring their 
safety.” 

They stood for a few moments at the top of the hill 
until the group of distant canoes disappeared below the 
northeastern horizon. 

Let us return to Jackson House,” continued the 
captain, and load the boat with everything that is 
necessary. We will then start on our long voyage. 
We will leave nothing undone to rescue our dear boys 
from the savages and bring them back to Harding 
Island.” 

What happened to the boys and their three friends 
will be recited in the third book of this series, entitled. 

In Captivity in the Pacific.” 


THE END 


404 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


APPENDIX 
The Cocoanut Palm 

The following facts concerning the cocoanut or, as 
the Polynesians call it, the haari, and the botanists the 
coccos nucifera, will be of interest to the general reader. 
The following extract from Vol. I, Polynesian Re- 
searches,” by William Ellis, has therefore been ap- 
pended : 

The tree on which the cocoanut grows is also one 
of the most useful and ornamental in the islands, im- 
parting to the landscape, in which it fails not to form a 
conspicuous object, all the richness and elegance of 
intertropical verdure. 

The stem is perfectly cylindrical, three or four feet 
in diameter at the root, very gradually tapering to the 
top, where it is probably not more than eighteen inches 
round. It is one single stem from the root to the 
crown, composed apparently of a vast number of small 
hollow reeds, united by a kind of resinous pith, and 
enclosed in a rough, brittle, and exceedingly hard kind 
of bark. The stem is without branch or leaf, except- 
ing at the top, where a beautiful crown or tuft of long 
green leaves appears like a graceful plume waving in 
the fitful breeze, or nodding over the spreading wood 
or the humble shrubbery. The nut begins to grow 
in a few months after it is planted; in about five or six 

405 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


years the stem is seven or eight feet high, and the 
tree begins to bear. It continues to grow and bear 
fifty or sixty years, or perhaps longer, as there are 
many groves of trees, apparently in their highest per- 
fection, which were planted by Pomare (a chief of one 
of the largest of the South Sea Islands) nearly forty 
years ago. While the plants are young they require 
fencing in order to protect them from the pigs; but 
after the crown has reached a few feet above the 
ground the plants require no further care. 

“ The bread-fruit, the plantain, and almost every 
other tree furnishing any valuable fruit, arrives at per- 
fection only in the most fertile soil; but the cocoanut, 
although it will grow in the rich bottoms of the valleys, 
and by the side of the streams that flow through them, 
yet flourishes equally on the barren sea-beach, amid 
fragments of coral and sand, where its roots are washed 
by every rising tide ; and on the sunburnt sides of the 
mountains, where the soil is shallow and remote from 
the streams so favorable to vegetation. The trunk of 
the tree is used for a variety of purposes : their best 
spears were made with cocoanut wood; wall plates, 
rafters, and pillars for their larger houses were often 
of the same material; their instruments for splitting 
bread-fruit; their rollers for their canoes, and also 
their most durable fences were made with its trunk. 
It is also a valuable kind of fuel, and makes excellent 
charcoal. 

“ The timber is not the only valuable article the 
cocoanut tree furnishes. The leaves, called niaiiy are 
406 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


composed of strong stalks twelve or fifteen feet long. 
A number of long narrow-pointed leaflets are ranged 
alternately on opposite sides. The leaflets are often 
plaited, when the whole leaf is called paiia, and forms 
an excellent screen for the sides of their houses, or 
covering for their floors. Several kinds of baskets are 
also made with the leaves, one of which, called arairi, is 
neat, convenient, and durable. They were also plaited 
for bonnets or shades for the forehead and eyes, and 
were worn by both sexes. In many of their religious 
ceremonies they were used, and the niau, or leaf, was 
also an emblem of authority, and was sent by the chief 
to his dependents when any requisition was made; 
bunches or strings of the leaflets were also suspended in 
the temple on certain occasions, and answered the same 
purpose as beads in Roman Catholic worship, remind- 
ing the priest or the worshiper of the order of his 
prayers. On the tough and stiff stalks of the leaflets, 
the candle nuts, employed for lighting their houses, 
were strung when used. 

Round that part of the stem of the leaf which is 
attached to the trunk of the tree, there is a singular 
provision of nature for the security of the long leaves 
against the violence of the winds. A remarkably fine, 
strong, fibrous matting, attached to the bark under the 
bottom of the stalk, extending half-way around the 
trunk, and reaching perhaps two or three feet up the 
leaf, acting like a bracing of network to each side of 
the stalk, keeps it steadily fixed to the trunk. While 
the leaves are young this substance is remarkably 
407 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


white, transparent, and as fine in texture as silver 
paper. In this state it is occasionally cut into long nar- 
row slips, tied up in bunches, and used by the natives 
to ornament their hair. Its remarkable flexibility, 
beautiful whiteness, and glossy surface render it a 
singularly novel, light, and elegant plume; the effect 
of which is heightened by its contrast with the black 
and shining ringlets of the native hair it surmounts. 
As the leaf increases in size, and the matting is ex- 
posed to the air, it becomes coarser and stronger, as- 
suming a yellowish color, and is called Aa. 

There is a kind of seam along the center, exactly 
under the stem of the leaf, from both sides of which 
long and tough fibers, about the size of a bristle, regu- 
larly diverge in an oblique direction. Sometimes there 
appear to be two layers of fibers which cross each other, 
and the whole is cemented with a still finer, fibrous, and 
adhesive substance. The lengths and evenness of the 
threads or fibers, the regular manner in which they 
cross each other at oblique angles; the extent of sur- 
face, and the thickness of the piece corresponding with 
that of coarse cotton cloth; the singular manner in 
which the fibers are attached to each other cause this 
curious substance, woven in the loom of nature, to 
present to the eye a remarkable resemblance to cloth 
spun and woven by human ingenuity. 

This singular fibrous matting is sometimes taken 
off by the natives in pieces two or three feet wide, and 
used as wrapping for their arrowroot, or made up into 
bags. It is also occasionally employed in preparing 
408 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


articles of clothing. Jackets, coats, and even shirts are 
made with Aa, though the coarsest linen cloth would 
be much more soft and flexible. To these shirts the 
natives generally fix a cotton collar and wristbands, 
and seem susceptible of but little irritation from its 
wiry texture and surface. It is a favorite dress with 
the fishermen and others occupied on the sea. 

‘‘ The fruit, however, is the most valuable part of 
this serviceable, hardy, and beautiful plant. The 
flowers are small and white, insignificant when com- 
pared with the size of the tree or the fruit. They are 
ranged along the sides of a tough, succulent, branching 
stalk, surrounded by a sheath, which the natives call 
aroe, and are fixed to the trunk of the tree, immediately 
above the bottom of the leaf. Fruit in every stage, 
from the first formation after the falling of the blos- 
som, to the hard, dry, ripe, and full-grown nut, that 
has almost begun to germinate, may be seen at one time 
on the same tree, and frequently fruit in several dis- 
tinct stages on the same bunch, attached to the trunk 
of the same stalk. 

The tree is slow in growth, and the fruit does not, 
probably, come to perfection in much less than twelve 
months after the blossoms have fallen. A bunch will 
sometimes contain twenty or thirty nuts, and there are, 
perhaps, six or seven bunches on the tree at a time. 
Each nut is surrounded by a tough, fibrous husk, in 
some parts two inches thick; and when it has reached 
its full size it contains, enclosed in a soft white shell, a 
pint or a pint and a half of juice or cocoanut milk. 

409 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ There is at this time no pulp whatever in the in- 
side. In this stage of its growth the nut is called oua, 
and the liquid is preferred to that found in the nut in 
any other state. It is perfectly clear, and in taste com- 
bines a degree of acidity and sweetness, which renders 
it equal to the best lemonade. No accurate idea of the 
consistency and taste of the juice of the cocoanut can 
be formed from that found in the nuts brought to Eng- 
land. These are old and dry, and the fluid compara- 
tively rancid; in this state they are never used by the 
natives except for the purpose of planting or extract- 
ing oil. The shell of the oua, or young cocoanut, is 
often used medicinally. 

In a few weeks after the nut has reached its full 
size, a soft white pulp, remarkably delicate and sweet, 
resembling, in consistency and appearance, the white 
of a slightly boiled egg, is formed around the inside 
of the shell. In this state it is called niaa, and is eaten 
by the chiefs as an article of luxury, and used in prepar- 
ing many of what may be called the made-dishes of 
Tahitian banquets. After remaining a month or six 
weeks longer, the pulp on the inside becomes much 
firmer, and rather more than half an inch in thickness. 
The juice assumes a whitish color and a sharper taste. 
It is now called omoto, and is not so much used. If 
allowed to hang two or three months longer on the 
tree the outside skin becomes yellow and brown, the 
shell hardens, the kernel increases to an inch or an inch 
and a quarter in thickness, and the liquid is reduced 
to less than half a pint. It is now called opaa, and, 
410 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


after hanging some months on the tree, falls to the 
ground. The hard nut is sometimes broken in two 
and broiled. . . 

If the cocoanut is kept long after it is fully ripe 
a white, sweet, spongy substance is formed in the in- 
side, originating at the inner end of the germ which is 
enclosed in the kernel, immediately opposite one of the 
three apertures or eyes, in the sharpest end of the 
shell. This fibrous sponge ultimately absorbs the 
water and fills the concavity, dissolving the hard kernel, 
and combining it with its own substance, so that the 
shell, instead of containing a kernel and milk, encloses 
only a soft cellular substance. While this truly won- 
derful process is going on within the nut, a single 
bud or shoot, of a white color but hard texture, forces 
its way through one of the holes in the shell, perforates 
the tough, fibrous husk and, after rising some inches, 
begins to unfold its pale green leaves to the light and 
the air ; at this time, also, two thick white fibers, origi- 
nating in the same point, push away the stoppers or 
covering from the other two holes in the shell, pierce 
the husk in an opposite direction, and finally penetrate 
the ground. If allowed to remain, the shell, which no 
knife would cut, and which a saw would scarcely pene-, 
trate, is burst by an expansive power, generated within 
itself; the husk and the shell gradually decay and, 
forming a light manure, facilitate the growth of the 
young plant, which gradually strikes its roots deeper, 
elevates its stalk, and expands its leaves until it be- 
comes a lofty, fruitful, and graceful tree. 

411 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


“ There are many varieties of the cocoanut tree, in 
some of which the fruit is rather small and sweet. For 
each variety the natives have a distinct name, as well as 
for the same nut in its different stages of perfection. I 
have the names of six sorts, but it is unnecessary to 
insert them. 

The juice of the nuts growing on the seashore does 
not appear to partake, in any degree, of the saline 
property of the water that must constantly moisten the 
roots of the tree. The milk of the nuts from the sandy 
beach or the rocky mountain is often as sweet and as 
rich as that grown in the most fertile parts of the 
valley. 

On first arriving in the islands, we used the cocoa- 
nut milk freely, but, subsequently, preferred plain water 
as a beverage; not that the milk became less agree- 
able, but because we supposed the free use of it pre- 
disposed to certain dropsical complaints prevalent 
among the people. Cocoanuts were formerly a con- 
siderable article of food among the common people, 
and were used with profusion on every feast of the 
chiefs; but, for some years past, they have been pre- 
served and allowed to ripen on the tree, for the pur- 
pose of preparing oil, which has recently become an 
article of exportation, although the value is so small 
as to afford them but little encouragement to its ex- 
tended manufacture. 

The cocoanut trees are remarkably high, some- 
times sixty or seventy feet, with only a tuft of leaves, 
and a number of bunches of fruit on the top ; yet the 
412 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


natives gather the fruit with comparative ease. A little 
boy strips off a piece of bark from a purau, branch, 
and fastens it round his feet, leaving a space of four 
or five inches between them, and then, clasping the 
tree, he vaults up its trunk with greater agility and 
ease than a European could ascend a ladder to an 
equal elevation. When they gather a bunch at a time 
they lower them down by a rope ; but when they pluck 
the fruit singly, they cast them on the ground. In 
throwing down the nuts they give them a whirling 
motion that they may fall on the point and not on the 
side, whereby they would be likely to burst. 

‘‘ The cocoanut oil is procured from the pulp, and is 
prepared by grating the kernel of the old nut and de- 
positing it in a long wooden trough, usually the trunk 
of a tree hollowed out. This is placed in the sun every 
morning, and exposed during the day; after a few 
days the grated nut is piled up in heaps in the trough, 
leaving a small space between each heap. As the oil 
exudes it drains into the hollows, whence it is scooped 
in bamboo canes and preserved for sale or use. After 
the oil ceases to collect in the trough, the kernel is put 
into a bag, of the matted fibers, and submitted to the 
action of a rude lever press ; but the additional quantity 
of oil thus obtained is inferior in quality to. that pro- 
duced by the heat of the sun. 

In addition to these advantages, the shells of the 
large old cocoanuts are used as water-bottles, the 
largest of which will hold a quart ; they are of a black 
color, frequently highly polished, and with care last a 

413 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


number of years. All the cups and drinking vessels of 
the natives are made with cocoanut shells, usually of 
the omoto, which is of a yellow color. It is scraped 
very thin, and is often slightly transparent. Their ava 
cups were generally black, highly polished, and some- 
times ingeniously carved with a variety of devices, but 
the Tahitians did not excel in carving. The fibers of 
the husk are separated from the pulp by soaking them 
in water, and are used in making various kinds of cinet 
and cordage, especially a valuable coiar rope. 

“ It is impossible to contemplate either the breadfruit 
or cocoanut tree, in their gigantic and spontaneous 
growth, their majestic appearance, the value and 
abundance of their fruit, and the varied purposes to 
which they are subservient without admiring the wis- 
dom and benevolence of the Creator, and his dis- 
tinguishing kindness toward the inhabitants of these 
interesting islands.” 

The following quotation from Hartwig’s ‘‘ Tropical 
World ” will give some additional information con- 
cerning the cocoanut palm; 

‘‘ No other tree in the world, no other plant cultiva- 
t3d by man contributes in so many ways to his wants 
and comforts as the cocoanut palm. Besides furnish- 
ing their chief food to many tribes on the coast within 
the torrid zone, the nut contains a valuable oil which 
burns without smoke or smell, and serves, when fresh, 
for culinary purposes. 

The fibrous rind or husk of the nut furnishes the 
414 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


coiar of commerce, a scarce less important article of 
trade than the oil itself. It is prepared by soaking for 
some months in water, for the purpose of decomposing 
the interstitial pith, after which it is beaten to pieces 
until the fibers have completely separated, and ulti- 
mately dried in the sun. Ropes made of coiar, a name 
given to cocoanut fiber or the buoyant cables made 
therefrom, though not so neat in appearance as hempen 
cords, are superior in lightness, and exceed them in 
durability, particularly if wetted frequently by salt 
water. From their elasticity and strength they are ex- 
cedingly valuable for cables. Besides cordage of every 
caliber, beds, cushions, carpets, brushes, and nets are 
manufactured from the filaments of the cocoanut husk, 
while the hard shell is fashioned into drinking-cups, 
spoons, beads, bottles, and knife-handles. From the 
spathes of the unopened flowers a delicious ^ toddy ’ is 
drawn which, drunk at sunrise, before fermentation has 
taken place, acts as a cooling, gentle aperient, but in a 
few hours changes into an intoxicating wine, and may 
be distilled into arrack. The strong, tough foot-stalks 
of the fronds, which attain a length of from eighteen to 
twenty feet, are used for fences, for yokes for carrying 
burdens on the shoulders, for fishing-rods ; the leaflets 
serve for roofing, for mats, for baskets, for cattle-fod- 
der; and their mid-ribs form good brooms for the 
decks of ships. Cooked or stewed, the cabbage or 
cluster of unexpanded leaves is an excellent vegetable, 
though rarely used, as it necessarily involves the de- 
struction of the tree; and even the tough web or net- 
415 


WRECKED ON A CORAL ISLAND 


work, which sustains the foot-stalks of the leaves, may 
be stripped off in large pieces and used for straining. 
After the cocoanut tree has ceased to bear, its wood 
serves for many valuable purposes — for the building of 
ships, bungalows, and huts ; for furniture and farming 
implements of every description ; and, as it admits of a 
fine polish, and its reddish ground color is beautifully 
veined with dark lines, it is frequently imported into 
England under the name of porcupine-wood,” 



416 







'*/ .■ 


• * 


. ■ 1 ’• . 

• . ^ ■•.*»’'• • * 

\* X.' >■ • *■ 

r 




>-*• 


!< 





»•»' 


, f 1, 


■ 1 • 

Y 


i ' / 


t o 


i • 


' » 


: 'V. - ' 

* V t ' ^ 





4 i 


»•» 


1 1 


V •' 




Y 




•S 









. If 


r.^ . i. ‘»/ /i ^ .1 ]yaj 

I • . • . 7' 


)• j' 


/ *'! . V 


M 





’ I 


k 4 



M 


I • . 




• 

#i 3 


^j'jS 




\- •. 


.-fa 


' « 


Hi 





• 1 

•rV^'' 

^ » « 

1 ^ 


V '» 


* ' • ». 


-i’ . A 


' V ' * 



» 


> » 

• 

« 

1 • 

• 

1 


4 

« 


• 

4 1 

' 1 • 

• N 1 

- * ’>*■•'■ 

1“ ' ' 

*.t. ' ' 1-., 

t ^ 


•'4 

' f 


LI 

'■'d 


,h 


I 




9. ! 


• I ■' I 

,V * ■* -■ >• 


• . ( 


k \ 



• ^ : » 


A " 








•V 





Hr I 

/ 

'[:S 

t, ' ” 


% 








► 



f 






I 


i 







I 


# 


A 




« 




f 

^ I • 


/ 


« 


< 

,*• 


» 


* 


k 




« 




4 


» « 


',► • 


« 


I 


f 


I 


« 


t 


4 


s 


•l 

A 



' i 


4 






r 


/ 


f 


I • 


t 



\ 

i 

. • 



iSL\ 





r 



I • 

I 


i' 


<• ■ 


f 


TF» 

Jt, 



%. r 


t 


• i 




f 



I 


I 




1 



I 


t 


• • t 


t 




4 



I I 


T 

t 



s 



4 4 


\ 

• « * ' * 

• ; 

f 

I 

« 




* i 


9 




% ' 


# 


r t 

< • 


•j 


\ 



t 


I 

i. . 4* • 





• \ 

1 X 






% 


4 





t 





% 


I 



4 

f 


^ .1 

t 


• ' 






hi/. '■ ■•■ ''ll' ■/ ■■' ./» ■Vi 



a;i! ;.?i V %/ 1 / 


* • 



■ ' ■ i' >y :. 

- -'I 1 ^ I f 1 ‘ 

' 4 -' < ) ; : . ' *■, . 

• 19 i.fi . ' ‘i 



'! ■ ■ ■• ■ , .‘ -r C , , 

• I* . * i ^ . ». / ._ 'T \~‘* J * ' 


» • J 


V i 


it 


t 


* I I* 









1 

- 


• -t 

r ► ■» 

1 

' ■ 

4 r 

■ # • 

f' ' 


i- < 4 " ‘ 


•4 

J t 


( 

4 / 




: '(lii.v' -1 

■ ?!sl! 

i.: ^ 




• 1 • 'S V 

.m'* 'My !-! -v \.-i5Lj ' j 


4. 

* ^ 


•K 

J • 


r-^ 4 


. V. ;*>. 


'r f 

^ « • 


\ ftV* 




M , 






IR 


\ t Ij r^if A., * ■ k 

'A' I'*' I ** 'f* “k 

. .f irl% '■ ^4^ y ■ . ‘ y ■■’' 'V >'• . , 


’ ' .-S 


5 J. ‘.{.Ir 


r ;'' \ ti'i ilutiM/l-iiJi 





